A Course File

On

CAD/CAM
IV- B. Tech. – I– Semester
Submitted to
DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

By
Mr. D. Dev Singh
Assoc.Professor, Dept. of ME

CMR INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY

Kandlakoya(V), Medchal Road, Hyderabad – 501 401
Ph. No. 08418-222042, 22106 Fax No. 08418-222106

2012-13

1
 CONTENTS

Sl. No. Particulars Page No.

1 JNTUH Syllabus 3
2 Student Entry Behavior or Pre-requisites 4
3 Course Objectives 4
4 Course Outcomes 4
5 Mapping of Course with PEOs-PSOs-POs 5
6 Mapping Of Course Outcomes with PEOs 8
7 Mapping Of Course Outcomes with PSOs 9
8 Mapping Of Course Outcomes with POs 10
9 Direct Course Assessment 11
10 Indirect Course Assessment 12
11 Overall Course Assessment and Attainment level 16
Pi diagrams, Bar charts, Histograms for representing
12 17
results
13 Lesson/Course Plan 18
14 Actions and Assessment Plan 19
15 Lecturer Notes 22
16 Question Bank 347
17 Internal Examination Question Papers with key 349
18 External/End Examination Question Papers 353

2
 1. JNTUH SYLLABUS
CAD/CAM
UNIT – I
Computers in industrial manufacturing, product cycle, CAD/CAM hardware, basic
structure, CPU, memory types, Input devices, display devices, hard copy devices, and
storage devices.
UNIT –II
Computer Graphics: Raster scan graphics, coordinate system, database structure for
graphics modeling, Transformation of geometry, 3D transformations, mathematics of
projections, clipping, hidden surface removal.
UNIT –III
Geometric modeling: Requirements, geometric models, geometric construction
models, curve rep. methods, Surface representation methods, modeling facilities
desired.
UNIT –IV
Drafting and Modeling systems: Basic geometric commands, layers, Display control
commands, editing, dimensioning, and solid modeling.
UNIT – V
Numerical control: NC,NC modes, NC elements, NC machine tools, structure of
CNC machine tools, Features of machining center, turning center, CNC part
programming, Fundamentals ,manual part programming, computer assisted part
programming,
UNIT – VI
Group Tech: part family, coding and classification, production flow analysis,
advantages and limitations, CAPP: Introduction, Retrieval type and Generative type
UNIT – VII
Computer aided quality control: Terminology in QC, computers in QC, contact
inspection methods, Non-contact inspection methods- optical and non-optical
computer aided testing, integration of CAQC with CAD/CAM
UNIT – VIII
CIMS: Types of manufacturing systems, machine tools and related equipments,
material handling systems, Computer control systems, human labour in the
manufacturing systems, CIMS benefits
TEXT BOOKS:
1. CAD/CAM by Zimmers &Groover/PE/PHI
2. CAD/CAM Tteory and practice by Ibrahim Zied/TMH
REFERENCES:
1. Automation, production systems & Computer integrated manufacturing/Groover/PE
2. Compter Aided Design and Manufacturing/Lalith Narayana,etal/PI
3. CAD/CAM/CIM/Radhakrishnan and Subramanian/New Age
4. CAD/CAM: Concepts and Applications/Alavala/PHI
5.Computer Numerical Control Concpts and Programming/Warre S Seames/Thomson

3
2. Student Entry Behaviour (Pre-Requisite Course if Any from I/II/III/IV
Year): Independent

3. Course Objectives
Course
Course Objective Statements
Objectives
The objectives of the topics are to know the computer graphics and the
Objective-1 CAD/CAM hardware.

Users have to know the generation of geometric models using

Objective-2 mathematical representations.

To describe the concepts of NC, CNC, DNC systems and develop part
Objective-3 programs.

The objective of the GT is to classify model parts based on bar codes

Objective-4 for computer aided process planning.

Describe the computer aided inspection and testing of NC components.

Objective-5
The objective of CIMS is to communicate with the CAD/CAM systems,
Objective-6 material handling systems and QC systems.

4. Course Outcomes
Course
Course Outcome Statements
Outcomes
Students understand the basic concepts of computer, computer
CO-1 graphics, and components of CAD/CAM systems.

Students understand the creation of different geometric models.

CO -2
Students learn the working of NC, CNC, DNC systems with newly
CO -3 developed part programs. Students are advised to visit CNC industries.

Students understand the GT based bar coded model parts which are
CO -4 displayed in computer aided process planning.

Students understand the inspection of parts using computer controlled

CO -5 CMM and by Non-contact inspection methods.

Students understand the integration of CAD/CAM systems and human

CO -6 being involvement in CIMS.

4
 Course Objectives & Outcomes Mapping
Course Outcomes
Course Objectives
CO-1 CO-2 CO-3 CO-4 CO-5 CO-6
√
Objective-1

Objective-2 √

Objective-3 √

Objective-4 √

Objective-5 √

Objective-6 √

5. Mapping of Course with PEOs-PSOs-Pos

Program Educational Objectives (PEOs)

Sl. No. PEOs Name Program Education Objective Statements

1 PEO – 1 Impart profound knowledge in humanities and basic

sciences along with core engineering concepts for practical
understanding & project development.[PO’s:
1,2,3,4,5,7,8,9,10,11 and 12] [PSO’s: 1 and 2]
2 PEO – 2 Enrich analytical skills and Industry-based modern
technical skills in core and interdisciplinary areas for
accomplishing research, higher education,
entrepreneurship and to succeed in various engineering
positions globally. [PO’s: 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10 and 12]
[PSO’s: 1, 2 and 3]
3 PEO – 3 Infuse life-long learning, professional ethics,
responsibilities and adaptation to innovation along with
effective communication skills with a sense of social
awareness. [PO’s: 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11 and 12] [PSO’s: 2
and 3]

Program Specific Objectives (PSOs)

Sl. No. PSOs Name Program Specific Objective Statements

1 PSO – 1 Use mathematical abstractions and Algorithmic design

along with open source programming tools to solve
complexities involved in efficient programming.[PO:1,2,3,4
and 5] & [PEO:1 and 2]
2 PSO – 2 Ensure programming & documentation skills for each
individual student in relevant subjects i.e., C, C++, Java,
DBMS, Web Technologies (Development), Linux, Data
Warehousing & Data Mining and on Testing Tools.
[PO:1,2,3,4,5,10 and 11] & [PEO:1,2 and 3]
3 PSO – 3 Ensure employability and career development skills
through Industry oriented mini & major projects,
internship, industry visits, seminars and workshops.
[PO:6,7,8,9,10,11 and 12] & [PEO:1,2 and 3]

5
 Program Outcomes (POs)

PO Graduate PO Statements
Names Attributes
PO1 Engineering Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals, and an
knowledge engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering problems. [PEO’s:
1,2 and 3] [PSO’s: 1,2 and 3]
PO 2 Problem analysis Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze complex engineering
problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of mathematics,
natural sciences, and engineering sciences. [PEO’s: 1,2 and 3] [PSO’s: 1,2 and 3]
PO 3 Design/ Design solutions for complex engineering problems and design system components or
development of processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate consideration for the public
solutions health and safety, and the cultural, societal, and environmental considerations.
[PEO’s: 1,2 and 3] [PSO’s: 1,2 and 3]
PO 4 Conduct Use research-based knowledge and research methods including design of experiments,
investigations of analysis and interpretation of data, and synthesis of the information to provide valid
complex problems conclusions. [PEO’s: 1,2 and 3] [PSO’s: 1,2 and 3]
PO 5 Modern tool usage Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and modern engineering
and IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex engineering activities with
an understanding of the limitations. [PEO’s: 1,2 and 3] [PSO’s: 1,2 and 3]
PO 6 The engineer and Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to assess societal, health,
society safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to the
professional engineering practice. [PEO’s: 2 and 3]
PO 7 Environment and Understand the impact of the professional engineering solutions in societal and
sustainability environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and need for sustainable
development. [PEO’s: 1,2 and 3]
PO 8 Ethics Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and
norms of the engineering practice. [PEO’s: 1,2 and 3] [PSO’s: 2 and 3]

PO 9 Individual and Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in diverse teams, and
team work in multidisciplinary settings. [PEO’s: 1,2 and 3] [PSO’s: 3]
PO 10 Communication Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the engineering
community and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and write
effective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give
and receive clear instructions. [PEO’s: 1,2 and 3] [PSO’s: 2 and 3]

PO 11 Project Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the engineering and management

management and principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to
finance manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments. [PEO’s: 1 and 3] [PSO’s: 2
and 3]
PO 12 Life-long learning Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent
and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological change. [PEO’s: 1,2 and
3] [PSO’s: 1,2 and 3]

6
 Course Mapping

Course Name PEO1 PEO2 PEO3 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

√ √ √ √ √ √
CAD/CAM

Po1
Course Name Po1 Po2 Po3 Po4 Po5 Po6 Po7 Po8 Po9
0
Po11 Po12

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
CAD/CAM

7
6. Mapping of Course Outcomes With PEOs

Mapping of Course Outcomes with PEOs

No Course Outcomes PEO1 PEO2 PEO3

1 CO - 1 √ √ -

2 CO – 2 √ √ √

3 CO – 3 √ √ √

4 CO – 4 √ - √

5 CO – 5 √ - √

6 CO - 6 √ √ √

Correlation of Course Outcomes with PEOs

No Course Outcomes PEO1 PEO2 PEO3

1 CO - 1 H H --

2 CO – 2 H M H

3 CO – 3 H H H

4 CO – 4 H -- H

5 CO – 5 H -- H

6 CO - 6 H H H

7. Mapping of Course Outcomes with PSOs

8
 Mapping of Course Outcomes with PSOs
No Course Outcomes PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

1 CO - 1 √ - √

2 CO – 2 √ √ √

3 CO – 3 √ √ √

4 CO – 4 √ - √

5 CO – 5 √ - √

6 CO - 6 √ √ √

Correlation of Course Outcomes with PSOs

No Course Outcomes PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

1 CO - 1 H -- H

2 CO – 2 H H H

3 CO – 3 H H H

4 CO – 4 H -- H

5 CO – 5 H -- M

6 CO - 6 H H H

8. Mapping of Course Outcomes with POs

9
 Mapping of Course Outcomes with POs

Course Po1
No Po1 Po2 Po3 Po4 Po5 Po6 Po7 Po8 Po9 Po11 Po12
Outcomes 0

1 CO - 1 √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

2 CO – 2 √ √ √ √ √ √ √ - √ √ √ √

3 CO – 3 √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

4 CO – 4 √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

5 CO – 5 √ √ √ √ √ √ - √ √ √ √ √

6 CO - 6 √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Correlation of Course Outcomes with POs

Course Po1
No Po1 Po2 Po3 Po4 Po5 Po6 Po7 Po8 Po9 Po11 Po12
Outcomes 0

1 CO - 1 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 3

2 CO – 2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 0 3 2 3 3

3 CO – 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 3

4 CO – 4 3 1 3 3 3 2 1 3 3 3 2 3

5 CO – 5 3 3 2 3 3 3 0 3 3 3 3 3

6 CO - 6 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 3 3 3 3

9. Direct Course Assessment

10
 Tools Used: Internal Exams, External Exams, Clearing Subject & Assignments.
No Description Actual Remarks
Targeted Course
Performanc
Performance Attainment
e
All Course the
Outcomes in
60% of Students(36
general attained
Students) should 53 Students
Internal & Marks
1 Secure 60% of Secured 15 3M
Marks(25) Awarded or
Internal Marks i.e., Marks
Attainment Level
15 Marks
is 3(Strong &
High)
All the Course
Outcomes in
50% of Students(31
general attained
Students) should 50 Students
External & Marks
2 Secure 50% of Secured 38 3M
Marks(75) Awarded or
External Marks Marks
Attainment Level
i.e., 38 Marks
is 3(Strong &
High)
All the Course
61 Students Outcomes in
A minimum of 90%
should secure general attained
of Students(55
Clearing of 40 Marks or 3 & Marks
3 Students) should 3M
Subject(75) Credits Awarded or
clear this course in
whichever is Attainment Level
first attempt
lower is 3(Strong &
High)
All Course
Outcomes in
general
65% of Students
41 Students attained
should secure
out of 61 Marks
4 Assignments 80% of 3M
students got Awarded or
Assignment
4 Marks Attainment
Marks i.e., 5M.
Level is
3(Strong &
High)

Average Course Attainment=(3+3+3+3)/4=(12/4)=3.00 Strong & High

 Course Attainment Level=3M(High)

 Performance in Internal & End Exams is Substantial.
 Hence all the Course Outcomes are summarily Attained
 As Direct Assessment is equal to 80% of 3 Marks i.e., 2.4 Marks

11
 10. Indirect Course Assessment

(As mentioned-strong (3), moderate (2), weak (1) & no comment (0))

Mission Statements of ME
 Provide fundamentals and state of art technical knowledge in frontier areas of
Mechanical Engineering.
 Emphasize on collaborative research and consultancy by initiating MOUs
with industries and R&D organizations.
 Enrich self learning, professional ethics, entrepreneurship and leadership
through effective interaction with stakeholders to handle real world
challenges.

Correlation of Mission Elements with Mission Statement of ME Department

related to the Course

No Mission Elements Strong Moderate Weak No

Comment
M-1 Provide fundamentals and state of
art technical knowledge in frontier
√ -
areas of Mechanical Engineering.

M-2 Emphasize on collaborative

research and consultancy by
initiating MOUs with industries √ -
and R&D organizations.

M-3 Enrich self learning, professional

ethics, entrepreneurship and
leadership through effective
√ -
interaction with stakeholders to
handle real world challenges.

12
 Correlation of Mission Elements with Mission Statement of ME Department
related to the Course

No Mission Elements Strong Moderate Weak No

Comment
M-1 Provide fundamentals and state of
art technical knowledge in frontier
areas of Mechanical Engineering. 3

M-2 Emphasize on collaborative

research and consultancy by
initiating MOUs with industries 2
and R&D organizations.

M-3 Enrich self learning, professional

ethics, entrepreneurship and
leadership through effective 3
interaction with stakeholders to
handle real world challenges.

13
Indirect Course Assessment through Student Satisfaction Survey
(Using Indirect Assessment Technique through a feedback for a Weightage of 20%)
Year & Semester: IV/I Academic Year: 2014-
15
Course Title: CAD/CAM
No. of Students on Rolls as per Attendance Register: 61 (Response by:60
)
Name of the Faculty: D.Dev singh, Designation:Assoc.Prof
Mo
Stro
Question der We No
ng/
Based on Mission Medium/Para ate/ ak/ com Grad
No hig Total
PEO/PO/PSO Element meter med low men e%
h
/CO ium (1) t (0)
(3)
(2)
Class room
teaching,
simulations,
To what
labs, practice,
extent the
mini & main
course Provide
Projects,
provide fundament
conferences,
fundamentals als and
professional
knowledge state of art
1 and student 50 5 5 165 2.75
with state of technology
association
art to promote
activities,
technology to quality
technical
promote education
clubs, guest
quality
lectures,
education?
workshops,
student
technical fests
simulations,
labs, practice,
mini & main
Projects,
conferences,
To what
prof. and
extent the Emphasize
student
course on
2 association 48 7 5 163 2.71
emphasize on collaborati
activities,
collaborative ve research
technical
research?
clubs, guest
lectures,
workshops,
student
technical fests
3 Does the Interaction Class room 47 5 8 159 2.65
course have teaching,
any scope for simulations,
interaction labs, practice,
with mini & main
stakeholders Projects,
conferences,
prof. and
student

14
 association
activities,
technical
clubs, guest
lectures,
workshops,
student
technical fests
NSS
Rate focus of
Activities,
the course
Environment
towards Profession
al Events,
addressing al ethics,
Literary
4 professional with 35 15 10 136 2.26
events/activiti
& ethical realistic
es,
issues w.r.t. problems
professional
realistic
association
problems
activities
Rate the role
of the
facilitator in
mentoring TLP, use &
and availability of
promoting Continuou digital
the self s self library,
5 50 5 5 165 2.75
learning learning internet
abilities to ability access,
excel industrial
academically visits
and
professionally
?
Rate the
Tools,
methodology
techniques,
adopted and
methods,
techniques
6 TLP teaching aids 45 10 5 160 2.66
used in
used in class
teaching
room
learning
instructions
processes.
Rate the
course in
applying
sciences & Mini and
Applying
engineering main
fundament
fundamentals projects,
als & use
7 in providing latest 52 5 3 169 2.81
of modern
research software, and
tools for
based R&D
R&D
conclusions activities
with the help
of modern
tools?
8 Did the Design, Main 51 5 4 167 2.78
course have develop Projects,

15
 any scope to
design, seminars,
and test a
develop and workshops,
system or
test a system training
component
or programmes
component?
NSS
Rate scope of Activities,
Cultural,
this course in Environment
legal,
addressing al Events,
health,
cultural, Literary
9 environme 50 5 5 165 2.75
legal, health, events/activiti
nt and
environment es,
safety
and safety professional
issues
issues? association
activities
Group
projects,
Scope of
use of Team Events,
applying
manageme simulations,
management
nt practice,
fundamentals
fundament conferences,
to
als for prof. and
demonstrate
10 effective student 50 5 5 165 2.75
effective
project association
technical
manageme activities,
project
nt & technical
presentations
control clubs,
& report
techniques workshops,
writing?
student
technical fests
Average Course Attainment Level is 2.68(High) 2.68
Indirect Assessment(20% *2.68)=0.537

11.Overall Course Assessment

(80% Direct + 20% Indirect, if any)

No Assessment Type Weightage Attainment Level

Direct-Assignment, Quiz,
1 Subjective, University Exams, 0.80 0.80(3)=2.40 Max
Results, Bench Marks
Indirect-Surveys-
2 0.20 0.20(2.68)=0.537 Max
Questionnaire
Overall 1.00 2.937 High

Course Attainment level: 2.937 (Strong & High)

16
 12.Pi diagrams, Bar charts, Histograms

Mark
Description
s
Internal Assignment 5
26%
Internal Quiz 10
Distinction=
46%
First class=
Internal Subjective 10
Pass=

External(Univ. 28%
75
Exams)

17
 13. Lesson/Course Plan

UNIT NAME OF THE TOPIC NO. OF

NO. CLASSES
Computers in industrial manufacturing, product 6
cycle, CAD/CAM hardware, basic structure, CPU,
memory types
Input devices, display devices, hard copy devices, 6
I storage devices
Computer Graphics: Raster scan graphics, 5
coordinate system, database structure for graphics
II modeling
Transformation of geometry, 3D transformations, 5
mathematics of projections, clipping, hidden surface
removal
Geometric modeling: Requirements, geometric 6
models, geometric construction models, curve rep.
III methods
Surface representation methods, modeling facilities 6
desired
Drafting and Modeling systems: Basic geometric 3
commands, layers
IV Display control commands, editing, dimensioning, 3
solid modeling
Numerical control: NC,NC modes, NC elements, 6
NC machine tools, structure of CNC machine tools,
V Features of machining center, turning center
CNC part programming, Fundamentals ,manual part 8
programming, computer assisted part programming
Group Tech: part family, coding and classification, 5
production flow analysis, advantages and limitations
VI CAPP: Introduction, Retrieval type and Generative 2
type
Computer aided quality control: Terminology in 5
QC, computers in QC, contact inspection methods
VII Non-contact inspection methods- optical and non- 5
optical, computer aided testing, integration of
CAQC with CAD/CAM
CIMS: Types of manufacturing systems, machine 5
tools and related equipments, material handling
systems

18
 Computer control systems, human labour in the 4
VIII manufacturing systems, CIMS benefits
Total number of classes required: 80
14.Actions and Assessment Plan

Students should have to attend the lecture classes and maintain and follow the
lecture notes of the subject. There are other requirements other than attending the
classes. The following actions taken to improve the course plan and to meet the
objectives.
8.1.) Actions

8.1.1. Assignments
Assignments were given to students on weekly basis. Every week one topic will be
given based on previous year question papers and important topics from each unit as
and when then topic is thought to the students. Students’ evaluation will be done on
the basis of performance in the assignments and feedback will be given to improve
their performance.

8.1.2. Mini Project

Students will be made to undergo a Mini Project for duration of 15 days along with
their class work. The project enables the students to be aware of CAD/CAM processes.

1) Workshop & Seminars

Students are encouraged to attend various workshops held at different organizations in
order to improve their knowledge in CAD/CAM subject. Seminars are conducted
every fortnightly at college premises and students take active participation in seminars
on CAD/CAM.

2) Paper Presentations
Paper presentations on various topics of CAD/CAM will be given by students during
weekend sessions. Faculty members also use various techniques to make the subject
more interesting and lively while teaching to the students.

8.1.3. Case Study

Case studies will be taken from imminent journals like Elsevier and Springer and
made solved by students.

8.2.) Slip Tests:

Slip tests are conducted in the class rooms.

8 slip tests are conducted per semester per course.
2 questions are given for each slip test.
Instructions:
Slip test should be in written documents with the following requirements.
1) Cover page with name, roll number, course name and course section.
2) A page with questions.
19
3) Solutions/Explanations.

QUESTIONS FOR SLIP TESTS

UNIT- I
1. Discuss briefly product cycle.
2. Define CAD, CAM, CAD/CAM TOOLS.
3. Explain Refresh display.
4. Briefly discuss about all input devices.
5. What are the different memory types?
6. Discuss about storage devices.
7. Discuss about color display.

UNIT –II
1. Discuss about Raster scan graphics.
2. Explain about 2D transformation.
3. Discuss about DBMS.
4. What are hidden surface removal methods?

UNIT –III
1. What are the wireframe entities?
2. Explain the Bezier cuve.
3. Explain coon patch and blending surface.
4. Derive the parametric equation of Hermite bicubic surface.

UNIT –IV
1. Explain about geometric commands.
2. Write about Birepresentation.
3. Discuss about CSG.
4. What are the display control commands and explain.

UNIT – V
1. Explain about NC elements.
2. Write about machining and turning centers.
3. Explain about CNC system.
4. Discuss about DNC systems.
5. Write a manual part program by considering any work piece.

UNIT – VI
1. Explain part classification and coding systems.
2. Write about Opitz coding system.
3. What are the advantages and limitations of group technology?
4. Explain Retrieval type of CAPP.

UNIT – VII

20
 1. What are the terminology in the quality control.
2. Explain Inspection and testing.
3. Write about machine vision.
4. Explain about computer control CMM with a neat sketch.

UNIT – VIII
1. Explain in detail about CIM circle.
2. Write about different machine tools used in CIMS.
3. Explain about all industrial trucks.
4. What are the benefits of CIMS.

21
 15. LECTURER NOTES

UNIT-I

COMPUTER HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE

22
 UNIT-I

COMPUTER HADWARE

3) INTRODUCTION
There are two basic components in a computer system used in CIM. They are:
i. Computer Hardware
ii. Software

Hardware consists of the various types of computers like personal computers,

(PCs), graphics workstations, input devices like mouse, keyboard and digitizer and
output devices like plotter and printer.
Computer software includes:
i. The operating system which controls the basic house-keeping operations in a
computer.

ii. Software packages used for conceptual design like Alias and for geometric
modeling like solid modeling (Solid Works, Unigraphics, CATIA,
Pro/Engineer etc).

iii. Application software which includes the programs for design analysis,
simulation and synthesis, tool design, process planning, enterprise resource

23
planning, PDM, PLM, CNC programming, computer aided inspection etc.
These also cover finite element analysis, kinematics analysis, piping design,
architecture, PCB design, VLSI design, computational fluid dynamics, expert
systems, and several application-specific software packages.

24
 CAD/CAM

1.2 COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS

Several computer platforms can be used for running the software packages for computer
integrated manufacturing. Figure 4.1 shows a typical computer hardware configuration.
Usually a powerful server computer and a number of client nodes will be used. The
server will be usually a high performance computer, configured to meet the specific
operational requirements. The nodes may be a personal computer (PC) or a graphics
workstation. The heart of any computer is a microprocessor, which is designed on the
basis of the length of the word it can handle. Thus, we have 16 bit, 32 bit and 64 bit
microprocessors. The microprocessor carries out arithmetic operations such as addition
and subtraction. They also carry out logic operations and alter the sequence in which
instructions are carried out depending upon the statements contained in the program. The
server stores data and the programs (operating system and application programs) in a part
of its primary memory. The remaining part of this memory acts as the working storage
and buffer storage for input and output. The contents of this memory are lost when the
power is switched off and therefore it is called volatile memory. This memory is called
Random Access Memory (RAM) or read-write Memory. Another type of primary
memory is the Read Only Memory (ROM) in which some programs stay resident. These
programs are permanently stored by the computer manufacturer. The Basic Input/Output
System (BIOS) is usually stored in ROM. The nodes may also have adequate memory
and processing capabilities depending on the application requirements.

ENTERPRISE
SERVER

DESIGN WORKSTATIONS

PC NODES PC NODES

Fig. 1.1 A Typical Computer Hardware Configuration

The computer will have a number of mass storage devices built into it. Common
types of mass storage devices are floppy discs, hard discs, CD-ROMS and removable
Computer Hardwar

25
storage devices. Another type of mass storage device is the cartridge tape. Softwares
are usually stored in the hard disc and they can be loaded into the primary memory
as and when required. In a networked environment, the software is stored in the
hard disc of the server and the users can access the software from the different
terminals or nodes connected to the server. Hard discs are also used for storing data
files, drawing files and other related files. A magnetic tape is used to backup the
files so that vital files and information are not lost in the event of a disc failure.
Optical discs (CD-ROMs) are widely used nowadays for mass storage.

The display of the programs and drawing is done on the monitor. Several types
of monitors or video display units (VDU’s) are used as display devices. These
include monochrome and color monitors. Super Video Graphics Array (SVGA) is
the type of monitor that is widely used on PC’s today. A number of input devices
are also used, the most popular being the ubiquitous mouse, used for command
input, menu selection or pointing on the screen. The keyboard is indispensable for
computer operation and is used for command input. A digitizer tablet is also a
convenient input device, often used in design. Special input devices are used in
laptop computers. Hard copy outputs are usually taken on a plotter. Printed reports
and files and print plot drawings can be obtained using a printer.

1.3 CLASSIFICATION OF COMPUTERS

Computers are commonly divided into the following types:
i. Personal Computer or Microcomputers
ii. Mini Computers

iii. Mainframes

iv. Supercomputers

Today the distinction between various types is blurring with advances in

microprocessor and microelectronics technologies and processing approaches.
Processing speed, accessible memory and cost are the factors used to classify
computers. Both processing speed and memory depend on word length.

1.3.1 MICRO COMPUTERS AND PERSONAL COMPUTERS

The personal computers are so named because these were originally developed as a
single user desk-top system to increase the productivity of employees. Apple
Computer Company is the pioneer in popularizing PC’s. IBM introduced their
personal computer in the year 1981 and presently IBM or their licensees and Apple
Computers (Macintosh series of computers) are the major computer companies who
are world leaders in the PC
ma

26
rket. Many dedicated microcomputers and super micros optimized for CAD
applications are now sold as Windows NT based graphic workstations. The IBM
personal computer and the microcomputers that run on the same software (called

27
 CAD/CAM

compatibles) are very popular with designers. These systems have a powerful CPU, and a
fast system clock (a timing signal that co-ordinates the data flow in CPU) of 2.8 GHz or
even higher. Most Personal Computers (PC’s) are designed around a single processor
chip as CPU which will have either 32 or 64 bit word length. Presently the minimum
memory quoted on a low end PC (Pentium 4 at 2.8 GHz) is 512 MB. These PC’s are
based on 32 bit 80586 microprocessors.

Most CAD applications require at least one floppy disc (storage capacity of 1.44 MB)
drive and a hard disc drive which storage capacity starting from 40 GB and a CD-ROM
drive. The relatively fast access speed of hard disc drive is particularly useful in CIM.
Personal computers are also often used as front-end systems of many turnkey CIM
systems where more powerful computers are used for data intensive activities like finite
element analysis. Several computer companies manufacture IBM PC compatible
computers in India. Notable among them are HCL, HP, Wipro, Zenith etc.
Table 4.1 gives the specifications of a typical personal computer.

Table 1.1 Specifications of a Typical PC

2.8 GHz or faster CPU

ATX Motherboard with on board LAN or network
adapter 512 MB RAM
40 GB or higher 7200 rpm IDE hard disc
drive 1.44 MB 3.5” Floppy disc drive
CD- RW 40 X Read, 24X Write, 10 X Rewrite
drive 17’’ LCD Monitor or 17’’ CRT Monitor
On- board sound or Creative Live sound card and amplified
speakers PS2 Key Board and Mouse
nVidia GeForce video card, on board Intel Extreme Graphics Card

1.3.2 OVERVIEW OF PENTIUM PC

The hardware of a Pentium computer consists of the following:
i. Mother board
ii. Hard disc/floppy disc controller card
iii. Graphics adapter card
iv. Input/Output card
v. Switch mode power supply
vi. Floppy disc drive
vii. Hard disc drive
viii. CD-ROM drive

28
Computer Hardware
ISA and P

Flash
BIOS

Adaptec
7880 SCS
chipset

Fig. 1.2 Layout o

the Mother Boar
of a Pentium
Computer
A
S
wi
tch
M
od
e
Po
we
r
Su
pp
ly
(S
M
PS
)
pr
ov
ide
s
the
ma
in
bo

29
ard with power and each of the expansion slots up to 1 Ampere per slot. It can sense
any spike in the incoming power line voltage and reduce the current to zero thereby
protecting the computer circuitry. This also provides the DC voltages necessary for
the operation of the computer.
i. Alphanumeric keys: Alphabetic, numeric and symbol keys are arranged in a
fashion similar to a typewriter. The shift key is used to shift from capital or
lower case or vice versa. “Caps lock” key enable the selection of capital
letters when the “Caps lock” condition is on. A separate numeric keypad is
provided on the right side.
ii. Function keys: These are soft keys which can be programmed in the software
and special functions can be assigned to each one of these keys. These are
marked F1 to F12.
iii. Cursor control keys: There are four cursor control keys. These keys are
useful in editing programs, controlling cursor in graphics applications etc.
iv. Special keys: These include control, alt, break, number lock, page up, page
down, home, insert, tab, delete, print screen etc. Function keys, cursor
control

keys and special keys can be used to improve the productivity of software
operation considerably.

30
 CAD/CAM

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - =

Fig.1 keybord

31
The operating system of a Pentium PC can be Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows XP
or Windows NT. With Windows NT operating system, the personal computer can act as a
server for a number of nodes too.

1.3.3 MINI COMPUTERS

Mini computers are 64 bit machines and can access more memory. Most turnkey CAD/
CAM systems are based on standard mini computers and a substantial amount of third
party software is available to perform sophisticated design, analysis and related tasks.
Mini computers are very popular with design departments because of their capability to
support several interactive terminals, permitting widespread access to engineering and
design databases. Minis have perhaps also the best price/performance ratio with a lower
initial cost compared to mainframe. Most manufacturers of mini computers offer a range
of desk top units to super mini’s that rival main frames in speed and memory. This wider
range enables firms to progressively use more and more powerful and costly computers
using the same software. Mini computers with adequate computing power can be
configured as enterprise servers for CIM implementation in small and medium
enterprises.
Super minis with a capability of carrying out floating point operations of 500
MFLOPS or more are now being increasingly used in design applications. Another
characteristic common to most minicomputers is the virtual memory, a feature which
allows execution of large programs in stages which cannot otherwise be handled by the
available memory. As a result the computer can run programs requiring storage of
considerable data. This facility is essential for data and compute intensive tasks such as
finite element analysis (FEA).

1.3.4 MAIN FRAME COMPUTER

Main frames have developed from original computers and are typified by their large size
and massive memory. Main frames are used today in applications requiring substantial
data processing at high speeds. Main frames typically support several terminals and can
drive a large number of peripheral units including printers, disc drives, tape drives etc.
fra
Computer Hardware me
.
Large memory is an essential requirement of main frames as they are frequently
Fo
used for data intensive operations like design analysis, database management,
r
weather forecasting, traffic and financial operations. Main frames can operate in
lar
batch mode or can be used in a time-sharing environment. Main frames are often
ge
used to provide processing power after a problem has been set up with a personal
ent
computer or mini computer. Main frames are also linked to several smaller
er
computers, which enable the latter to access the large data base of the main frames.
pri
This feature is particularly advantageous for design in large design offices where a
ses
single data base environment is desirable. The work stations located in the design
,
offices can access the main frame computer of the company for analysis and data,
ma
thereby simpler design analysis and drafting are done locally and part of the data
inf
intensive design analysis like FEA and solid modeling are carried out at the main
ra
32
me based computing environment could be a cost effective solution for
implementing CIM.

1.3.5 SUPER COMPUTERS

Super computers take advantage of the most recent advancement in electronic
circuit design, processing techniques and memory organization to attain computing
speeds many times that of main frames. Typically main frames operate at a few
megaflops (one megaflop is a million floating point operations per second) whereas
supercomputers can have speeds between 20-400 megaflops.
Though these computers are priced very high, because of their high processing
speed, the processing cost may be low even in the case of very complex CAD
applications which require evaluation of several alternatives or which require
several iterations to be carried out. Applications of super computers include
modeling and simulation tasks such as solid modeling, kinematical analysis , modal
analysis, finite element analysis and computational fluid dynamics. An advantage of
supercomputers is the vector processing facility which can drastically increase
computing speed. Data pipelining, high speed circuits and large internal memories
enable complex design and analysis operations handled conveniently. The
performance of a supercomputer can also be achieved by using several processors
working in parallel mode.

1.4 DATA COMMUNICATIONS

Computers need to communicate with printers, terminals and other computers. This kind
of input/output is typically called data communications, since streams of data are
transferred between sources and destinations. This flow must be synchronized. This is
typically done under the control of “handshaking” conventions that use either dedicated
hardware lines or special character sequences. A simple example of handshaking involves
a printer capable of printing only 120 characters per second, but receiving data at 10
times that rate. When the printer’s input buffer is full, it sends a busy signal to the data
source (by pulling high a line connecting the two), indicating that it cannot accept any
more

33
 CAD/CAM

for a while. Later it can accept more data. The “busy” signal here is what is meant by a
handshake signal.
Some popular devices for transferring digital data are considered below:
i. Parallel interface
ii. Serial RS 232 data link
iii. IEEE 488 interface bus (also called General Purpose Interface Bus — GPIB)
iv. USB port
v. Modems
vi. Computer to computer communications.
1.4.1 PARALLEL INTERFACE
A parallel interface is one that moves information 8 bits or more at a time. Centronics
printer interface is a standard parallel interface. This interface allows data to be
transferred to a printer, 8 bits at a time. Fig. 4.4 shows the timing diagram of a Centronics
parallel interface. When the computer sends a byte of data to the printer it also sends a
pulse down the strobe line. When the printer has read the data byte and is ready to accept
another, it acknowledges that fact by sending back a pulse on the ACKNLG Line. IBM
PC typically uses the BUSY line for handshaking in a polled mode. Polling means that
computer hangs in a little loop, testing the line until the desired condition occurs. As soon
as the BUSY Line goes low the PC’s ROM BIOS routine pulses the STROBE line low,
telling the printer that a new byte is ready.

D ATA
0 .5S 0 .5S
STROBE

0 .5S

BUSY

ACK

0 .5S
Fig. 1.4 Timing Diagram of Centronics Parallel Interface
Figure 4.5 shows a Centronics interface connector, pin-numbers as they appear on the
36-pin D-shell Connector.

Name Adapter Pin Number

Data Strobe (low) 1
Data bit 1 (LSB) 2
Data bit 2 3
Data bit 3 4
Fig. 1.5 (Contd...)

34
Computer Hardware

Name Adapter Pin Number

Data bit 4 5
Data bit 5 6
Data bit 6 7
Data bit 7 8
Data bit 8 (LSB) 9
Acknowledge 10
Busy (High) 11
Paper End (High) 12
Select (High) 13
Supply Ground 14

4
Oscillator Transmit 15
Logical Ground 16
Chassis GND 17
+5 V DC 18

Fig. 1.5 Centronics Interface Connector

4) PARALLEL/SERIAL CONVERSION
When extremely high data rates are not required, the number of wires required for data
communication can be reduced substantially by converting the bytes to be transmitted
into a serial bit stream. This requires only two wires for bi-directional transmission and a
ground line. In a serial bit stream the bits are represented by codes having specific time
intervals. The standard asynchronous serial formats used in data communications allocate
a time interval known as baud period to each bit (Baud is used to honor a Frenchman
named Baudot). The bits are transmitted in separate groups, usually 8 bits long, called
characters. The name “character” is used because each group of bits represents one letter
of the alphabet when text is being sent. In the standard asynchronous format, the time
between characters when no data is being transmitted is indicated by a steady high
voltage called a mark. The transmitter tells the receiver that a character is about to start
by sending a low-bit known as start bit as shown in Fig. 1.6

0 1 2 3 4 5* 6* 7* P* SP
Fig. 1.6 Serial Bit Stream Format

Each character is preceded by a low-level start bit, which synchronizes the receiver
and transmitter clocks. The character (5, 6, 7 or 8) bits follow, least significant bit first.
The asterisk (*) indicates optional bits. An optional parity bit and one or more stop (high-
level) bits terminate the character. Each bit lasts one baud rate period. Serial receivers
and transmitters can be instructed to send or receive as few as 5 or as many as 8 bits per
character. After the desired number is sent out an optional parity bit may follow. The
parity bit P is useful if the data line is suspected to be noisy for accurate transmission. For
even parity

35
 CAD/CAM

P=1 if the number of 1’s in the character is odd and P=0, if the number of 1’s is even. At
the end of the bits the transmitter inserts one or more high stop bits into the data stream.
Because any amount of time can elapse between characters the serial data transmission
method is called asynchronous method. The standard baud rates are 110, 150, 300, 600,
and 1200. 2400, 4800, 9600 and 19200. Printers and other hard copy devices are usually
restricted to low baud rates. Using an 8-bit character with one parity and one stop bit,
there is a total of 10 bits. A transmission rate of 300 baud yields 30 characters/sec.
A UART or Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter is a special chip used to
simultaneously transmit and receive serial data performing the appropriate parallel/serial
conversions and inserting or checking extra bits used to keep serial data synchronized.
Bytes sent as 8 bit parallel data to the output data port are converted into a standard
format serial bit stream for transmission inside UART. Similarly an incoming serial bit
stream is detected by the receiver inside the UART and converted to parallel data.

5) RS-232 INTERFACE
RS-232 is a serial transmission mode which is a voltage level convention. While the
current loop signal can be sent over large distances and can be easily implemented using
opto-isolators which prevents wiring mistakes from doing any damage, RS-232 may
cause hardware damage if improperly connected. The RS-232 is rated for distances only
up to 15 m. This is often used for terminal-modem and terminal-computer connections.
RS-232 is a standard set by Electronic Industries Association and represents 1’s by -3
to -20 V and 0’s +3 to 20 V. The standard connector is the 25 DB connector. Two IC’s
are normally used to handle the TTL level signals to RC-232 and vice versa. They,
respectively, are 1488 and 1489. Fig. 1.7 shows pin numbers for most commonly used
RS-232 lines.

RS-232 Definition I/O Data Terminal Data Communication

Equipment (DTE) Equipment (DCE)

Signal Ground 1 1
Transmit Data 0 2 3
Receive Data 1 3 2
Request to send (RTS) 0 4 5
Clear to send (CTS) 1 5 4
Data set ready (DSR) 1 6 20
Chassis Ground 7 7
Carrier Detect 8 8
Data terminal ready 0 20 6

Fig. 1.7 Pin Numbers For RS 232 Lines

Computer Hardwar

36
1.4.4 UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS
Universal Serial Bus (USB), the most successful interconnecting port in computer
history so far is a connectivity specification developed by Intel and other technology
leaders. It operates at a speed of 480 Mbps and is used in millions of PCs and
mobile devices. USB is now a standard feature in all PCs. Using USB port one can
plug standard peripherals as well as devices like portable computing devices, cell
phones, digital cameras and MP3 players to PCs. High speed wireless USBs also
have a bandwidth of 480 Mbps.
1.4.5 MODEMS
It is often necessary to communicate between workstations at different locations
separated by a considerable distance. In such cases an interface element called
modem can be used at each end of a data transmission channel. A modem is a
modulation — demodulation device that converts the discrete stream of digital
pulses to variable analog wave patterns which can be transmitted over telephone
lines and at the digital data from the transmitted signal (demodulation). Figure 4.8
shows a typical arrangement. Telephone lines can also be used to transmit the
analog signals between modems. The usage can be an external modem or a plug-in
modem card.

COMPUTER MODEM PHONE TELECOM PHONE MODEM COMPUTER

LINE
Fig. 1.8 Modem Connection
1.4.6 COMPUTER TO COMPUTER COMMUNICATIONS
A design office can make use of a number of different computer systems and peripherals.
The networking of this computers enables the sharing of peripherals, application software
and databases. Across the network the users can also communicate or transfer data or
files. The networking if restricted to short distances, say a department or a building, is
called a Local Area Network (LAN). A LAN is a system made from the following
building blocks that can be added or configured as needed:
Network server
Network interface card
Storage disc
Connecting Cable
Workstations
LAN’s use special systems to manage the shared resources on the network. These
systems are called servers. A server is a combination of hardware and software. A
hardware can be a personal computer like a Pentium or a more powerful RISC based
workstation or

37
 CAD/CAM

a minicomputer. The central mass storage disc contains the files and programs that are
shared by the designers. Typically a LAN server may require at least 20 to 200 GB of
storage space. In order to communicate to a computer, an interface card with the
components necessary for sending and receiving messages has to be plugged into the
computer. This printed circuit board is called the network interface card or network
adapter. The computers to be connected in a LAN may include personal computers of
different families, workstations and minicomputers. Each device in the network is
attached to a transmission cable so that messages can be sent from one device to another.
LANs are run on cables varying from low-cost twisted pair telephone wire to single or
multi-channel co-axial cable or expensive high performance fibre optics cable.

(a) B U S (b) S TA R (c) R IN G

Fig. 1.9 LAN Topologies

There are different topologies used for networking. The important topologies are
described briefly below:
i. Bus topology
The bus topology is a simple design with a single length of cable known as bus.
All devices on the LAN are attached to the bus and share this single
communications medium (Fig. 4.9 a).
ii. Star topology
In star topology the computers are arranged on the form of a star, with each
device connected to the network server with a separate cable. Though the cable
length is more the system has a higher reliability (Fig. 4.9 b).
iii. Ring network
Figure 4.9 c shows the ring network. Here the networking is carried out such that
the messages pass through the intermediate computers between the sending and
receiving computer.
iv. Hybrid schemes
Many practical LAN schemes combine some of the above topologies for best
performance. Network technologies are discussed in detail in a later chapter.

38
Computer Hardware

A typical workstation will have the following networking features as options:

• Ethernet networking connector
• Asynchronous and synchronous communication ports

• Transmission control protocol/Internet protocol (TCP/IP) or XNS

• ISO/OSI, SNA, DEC net, Netware.

v. Wireless LAN (WLAN)

Wireless LAN extends the reach of existing wired networks through high frequency
radio waves to the entire organization. This is also known as Wi-Fi. IEEE 802.11
is the set of standards for Wireless Local Area Networks. Each computer, mobile,
portable or fixed is referred to as a station in 802.11. Portable stations can be used
only at fixed points. Mobile stations can access the LAN even while moving. When
two or more stations come together to communicate with each other, they constitute
a basic service set (BSS). A BSS that stands alone (not connected to a base) is called
an Independent Basic Service Set (IBSS). It is also referred to as an Ad-Hoc network.
In an ad-hoc network stations are connected only peer to peer. Two or more BSS’s
are interconnected using a Distribution System (DS). Entry into DS is accomplished
using an Access Point (AP). Large and complex networks could be created using
several BSS’s and DS’s.

1.5 DESIGN WORK STATIONS

Engineering workstations are computer systems with adequate computing power, based
on 32 or 64 bit microprocessors. Workstations are typically divided into two broad
categories: Low-end and high-end.
Low-end work stations generally consist of personal computers. Appropriate software
and special hardware like graphics accelerator cards are added to these for boosting the
performance. Personal computers have the additional advantage of being able to run a
substantial amount of software such as programs for analysis, database management, etc.
The processing capability of personal computers is generally enhanced by the addition of
a co-processor in the microprocessor circuit which increases the processing speed by two
or three times. Special custom-built graphics boards increase resolution and decrease

High-end workstations are designed around one or more powerful RISC processors.
Examples of such processors are PA-RISC, MIPS, and SPARC etc. Hardware
generally consists of high resolution graphics display of 1024 X 1024 pixels, or more, a
processor capable of 2 to 4 MIPS or more and 512 MB to 8GB core memory and mass
storage in the range of 36-146 GB (Giga Byte), with optional magnetic tape back up.
These
39
 CAD/CAM

Computers used for high end workstations are optimized for engineering analysis and
graphics work. Many of them use custom-built processors often incorporating hardware
features to boost the speed of processing. However the systems using standard processors
have the advantage of several software packages with practically little customization.
Workstations consist of three basic components:
A primary processor
Associated memory
Graphics display system and software
Leading workstations like SUN, IBM, Silicon Graphics, Hewlett-Packard etc., use
special architecture based on RISC (Reduced Instruction Set Computing) chips and
specialized graphic boards. The graphic features like display manipulation are realized in
hardware for fast response. Workstations typically place emphasis on graphics display
and manipulation. The features of a display system are directly related to the processing
power of the display driver. Functions such as color fill; entity generation and
transformation of displays are controlled by the display processor and associated
hardware.
Networking ability is a standard feature often incorporated in Workstations.
Workstation can be used in a variety of ways. First, they can act as dedicated stand alone
processors for certain design or analysis tasks. They can also be networked with each
workstations is as front end processors for large host computers. An important feature of
a workstation is that they operate in a windows environment using graphic user interfaces
like X-Windows or OSF/MOTIF which enables effective implementation of CAE and
concurrent engineering approaches.
6) ARCHITECTURE OF A TYPICAL GRAPHICS WORKSTATION
Figure 1.10 shows a system level block diagram of a typical high end CAD workstation.
A color (RGB) monitors with 19” screen size and resolution of 1280 x1024 pixels is the
standard. Some workstations will have monitors with resolution of 1920 x 1200 pixels.
Workstations enable the display of the drawings in several colors.
VIDEO OUTPUT

ETHERNET

SERIAL PORT
RGB CPU Parallel Port
MONITOR BOARD AUDIO
SCSI

GRAPHICS
BOARD

Fig. 1.10 System Level Block Diagram of a Graphics Workstation

40
Computer Hardware

Selectable palette of 256 colors out of 17.6 million colors is normally available. The
hardware include a CPU board with a RISC (Reduced Instruction Set Computing)
microprocessor with Cache Memory and 512 MB RAM. Many CAD/CAM applications
require at least 24 GB or more of disc capacity. Disc capacity can go up to 140 Gbytes in
a sophisticated graphics workstation. The communication facilities include two or more
serial ports, one or more parallel ports, and TCP/IP Ethernet controller or other facilities
for networking. A graphic workstation has also to fit into other networking environments
like NFS (Networking File System), IBM Emulation, Hypernet etc.
The distinguishing feature of a graphics workstation is the graphics board which does
the display generation and manipulation. The graphics subsystem is discussed in detail in
the following sections.

1.6.1 GRAPHICS SYSTEM

Graphics system consists of four subsystems:
a. Geometry engine subsystem
b. Scan conversion subsystem

c. Raster subsystem

d. Display subsystem

These subsystems are shown in Figure 1.11 schematically.

GEOMETRY

SCAN CONVERSION

RASTER

DISPLAY

Fig. 1.11 Subsystems of a Graphics Engine

1.6.2 GEOMETRY ENGINE

The geometry engine accepts 3-D world co-ordinate data and converts them into X, Y
screen co-ordinates. Depth information is manipulated using Z-buffer. Colors are also
processed. The geometry pipeline facilitates among other functions lighting, clipping, and
3D to 2D projection, viewing transformations, rotation, scaling and translation.

41
1.6.3 SCAN CONVERSION
The scan conversion subsystem carries out polygon decomposition, edge slope
calculations, span slope calculations and span interpolation. The output of the scan
conversion is the pixel information to the raster subsystem.

42
 CAD/CAM

1.6.4 RASTER SUBSYSTEM

The raster subsystem will have usually 24 bit planes. This will provide eight bit planes
for each primary color (RGB) so that (28) shades of a single color can thus obtain.
Since the different colors are obtained by the three primary colors a total of
(28)3colors are available on the screen.
In a typical raster engine five 256K X 4D RAM provide 4 bits of Z-depth. The raster
information is stored in the frame buffer. Twenty 64 K X 4 video RAM provide 4 bits for
each pixel of 1280 X 1024 resolution. Entry level systems will have 12 bit planes and
high end systems will have 32 bit planes for the frame buffer. These provide the color
and depth for the images.
1.6.5 DISPLAY SUBSYSTEM
The display subsystem has multi-mode graphics processors which manage the display,
send the Red, Green, Blue color (RGB) data to the respective digital to analog converters
as well as provide a video output.

1.6.6 CAPABILITIES FOR MODELING IN A TYPICAL

GRAPHICS WORKSTATION ENVIRONMENT
The following modeling capabilities are desired in a workstation:
a. 2D and 3D modeling and drafting facilities
b. Display of text

c. Animation

d. Color selection (usually a palette of 256 colors)

e. 3D viewing

f. Z-buffering

g. Gouraud shading

h. Depth cueing

i. Lighting models

j. Anti-aliasing

k. Texture mapping

43
 The RISC based workstations function with UNIX operating system in a Windows
environment. A graphics workstation will also provide a graphics library like OPEN GL
which provides easy to use and flexible high level graphics subroutines with broad
functionalities in a high level language like C or an object orient language like C++ or
graphic modules like ACIS and Parasolid. These can be used for creation of graphic
models including real time interactive solid models. The user can create a customized
graphic software with the aid of such a graphics library.

44
Computer Hardware

7) SPECIFICATIONS OF TYPICAL GRAPHICAL WORKSTATION

Brief specifications of a few typical workstations are given below:
Technical Specifications of a HP Workstation
System Processing Unit
PA-8800 or PA 8900 dual
Central processor : core
Clock frequency : 900 MHz
Number of processors : 1 to 4
The above data are given for general information. As technology advances, the
specifications will be continuously ramped up. The readers are advised to refer to the
catalogues of manufacturers to obtain current information on the hardware, performance
specifications etc.

8) INTERACTIVE DISPLAY DEVICES

9)
1.7.1 INTERACTIVE GRAPHIC TERMINALS
Interactive graphics is an important component of CAD providing a window through
which the communication with the computer can be realized. Such systems which enable
communication between the human operators and the computer are called “user-friendly”
or simply friendly computers. In an interactive graphics session, the user constructs a
geometric model by specifying points, lines, arcs and circles on the screen. When each
command is issued, the software will request additional data often supplying some of the
information needed. There is always a “HELP” feature which the designer can consult if
he is in doubt. Technically the model is the mathematical representation of the diagram in
the computer data base. The operator uses the display screen almost in the same manner
as a drawing board to create various projections or views of the object. But unlike manual
drafting, CAD incorporates several features to speed up drafting and increase drafting
productivity. The display devices be can classified into two groups:

i. Display devices based on CRT principle

ii. Flat screens

Most interactive CAD systems use CRT based graphic monitors. CRT is a glass
enclosed tube in which a finely focused electron beam is deflected to a phosphor coated
screen. The screen then glows to produce a visible trace when excited by impinging
electrons. The principle of operation of a monitor is given below.

45
1.7.2 DISPLAY DEVICES BASED ON CRT

The position of the visible trace on the CRT screen is controlled by a focusing system

and a set of horizontal and vertical deflection plates as shown in Fig. 1.12.

46
 CAD/CAM

In a color CRT, there are three electron guns, one each for red, green and blue. The
phosphor dots for red, green and blue are arranged in a triangular pattern. The individual
beams intersect at a shadow mask which directs a red beam to a red phosphor dot and so
on.

GLASS TUBE
FOCUSING ANODE
SYSTEM
CATHODE
PHOSPHOR
COATING

VERTICAL
DEFLECTION
PLATES
HORIZONTAL
DEFLECTION
PLATES

Fig. 1.12 Principle of a CRT

1.7.3 RASTER SCAN TECHNIQUE
The screen of a monitor can be considered to consist of a large number of minute
subdivisions called picture elements (pixels, in short). For example, in a typical SVGA
monitor, the screen is divided horizontally into 1024 units and vertically into 768 units.
The resolution of this monitor is then 1024 x 768.
A raster CRT graphics device can be considered a matrix of discrete cells each of
which can be made bright. Thus it is basically a point plotting device. If a line is to be
drawn, it can be approximated by a series of dots close to the path of the line. Figure 1.13
illustrates this concept.

ig. 4.13 Line Drawing

47
Computer Hardware

Let us assume that a line AB is to be drawn. On a raster scan monitor, the adjacent
pixels closer to the path of the line are addressed and the resulting “line” appears to have
a staircase like look or is said to be jagged. However, the resolution is is more, then the
line appears smooth. Vertical or horizontal lines appear smooth, irrespective of the
resolution.
A frame buffer is a common method of implementing a raster CRT graphics device. It
can be considered to be a large contiguous piece of computer memory. In the simplest
can, there can be one memory bit for each pixel in the raster. This amount of memory is
called a bit plane. A 320 X 200 raster requires 64 K memory bits in a single plane. The
picture is built in the frame buffer one bit at a time. The memory bits can be either in 0 or
1 state. If a particular pixel is to be addressed, the corresponding bit in the frame buffer is
changed from 0 to 1. Since the raster CRT is an analog device, it requires an electrical
voltage and the digital data of the frame buffer has to be converted to an analog voltage
through a digital to analog converter (DAC). This is schematically shown in Fig. 1.14.

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Fig. 1.14 Frame Buffer

A single bit plane yields a black and white display. Color or different grey levels can
be achieved by using additional bit planes. Fig. 1.15 shows 4 bit plane frame buffer. The
intensity of each pixel in the CRT is decided by the combination of the pixel values.
(1111 in the picture shown). Since there are four bit planes, there can be 2 4 (=16)
combinations. The resulting binary number is interpreted as an intensity level between 0
and 24 – 1 (=15). This is converted into a voltage between 0 (dark) and 15 (full intensity),
by the digital to analog converter.

Thus this arrangement can represent 16 grey levels or color shades.

The color graphics monitors are usually referred to as RGB monitors since the
different colors are obtained by mixing three primary colors, Red I, Green (G), and Blue
(B). A simple color frame buffer can be implemented with three bit planes, one for each
primary color.

48
 CAD/CAM/CIM

3
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 P O IN T P L O T T E D
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
0 0 0 D IG IT A L
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
TO
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ANALOG
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
CONVERTER
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

SCREEN
4 — B IT P L A N E
FRAMEBUFFER
Fig. 1.15 4-bit Plane Frame Buffer

Each bit plane drives as individual color given for each of the three primary colors.
This arrangement can lead to eight colors as given in the Table 1.3.

Table 1.3 Color Table

Black 0 0 0
Red 1 0 0
Green 0 1 0
Blue 0 0 1
Yellow 1 1 0
Cyan 0 1 1
Magenta 1 0 1
White 1 1 1

Additional bit planes can be used for each of the three color guns. In a 24 bit plane
buffer 8 bit planes are used for each color. Each group drives a 8 bit Digital to Analog
Converter (DAC) and can generate 28 = 256 intensities of red, green and blue. This when
combined together can result in (28)3 = 16, 777, 216 or 16.7 million possible colors.

1.7.4 FLAT SCREENS

CRT has the disadvantage that it is extremely bulky. Moreover, CRT consumes
considerable power with increased heat dissipation requirements. Portability is reduced
because of the size and the material of CRT. These disadvantages have prompted the
manufacturers try different types of flat screens as output devices for computers. Flat
screens are necessary for laptop, notebook and palm top computers. Flat screens operate
on the principle of liquid crystal display.
10) I
Computer Hardware
N
P

49
 UT DEVICES
For interactive graphic tasks more often several input devices are used. These allow
entering data in an easily interpretable graphic form. The task is usually
accomplished by controlling the position of a set of cursor cross hairs on the screen.
Some devices like light pen are touched on the screen for more direct interaction.
Some of the input devices which are employed for graphic applications are
described in the following sections.

1.8.1 KEYBOARD
The keyboard interacts with the computer on a hardware and software level. The
keyboard contains a keyboard controller (like 8042 or 8048) to check if any key is
pressed or released. If any key remains closed for more than half a second the
controller sends a repeat action at specific intervals. It has limited diagnostic and
error checking capabilities. A buffer is normally available to store a certain number
of key actions if the computer is busy.

1.8.2 TOUCH SCREENS

Touch screens are direct devices. They are used by simply touching CRT display
with one’s finger or a pointing device. Two types of touch screens (mechanical and
optical) are used in CAD applications.
Mechanical type is a transparent screen overlay which detects the location of the
touch. Optical touch screen systems use rows of light emitters and receptors
mounted just in front of the screen with the touched location determined by broken
beams.
Mechanical systems have a resolution of 0.25 mm in position detection. These
devices are more popular as cursor control systems. Optical systems are of low
resolution and are mainly used for menu selection.

1.8.3 JOYSTICKS
Joystick is a potentiometric device that contains sets of variable resistors which feed
signals that indicates the device position to the computer. These devices rely on the
operator’s sense of touch and hand-eye co-ordination to control the position of the
cursor on the screen. (Fig. 1.16)

Fig. 1.16 Joy Stick

50
 CAD/CAM

Joystick devices are normally set so that side-to-side movement produces change in X
Co-ordinates and front to back movements produce change in Y Co-ordinates. Thus they
are best suited for pointing in tasks such as menu selection or creating simple schematics.
Many users prefer joysticks because they allow rapid cursor movement for relatively
small device movements, enabling graphic operations to be performed quickly. Three
dimensional capability is possible by moving the handle up and down or by twisting it to
provide data entry in the Z-axis.

1.8.4 TRACK BALLS

Track ball has a ball and socket construction but the ball must be rolled with fingers or
the palm of the hand. The cursor moves in the direction of the roll at a rate corresponding
to rotational speed. The user must rely heavily on the tactile sense when using a trackball
since there is no correspondence between the position of the cursor and the ball. The ball
momentum provides a tactile feed back. Trackballs are effective for tracking, following
or pointing at moving elements. Track discs also perform a similar function.

1.8.5 MOUSE
Mouse is today one of the widely used input devices in graphics applications. Mouse is a
small hand held puck like instrument which is attached to the computer (Fig. 1.17).
Mouse can be moved around by the operator on any flat surface to provide graphic input.
Its ability to rapidly position the cursor on the screen is its most important advantage.
Mouse is available as a mechanical or optical graphic input device. In the case of a
mechanical mouse, the rolling ball at the bottoms of the mouse causes two encoders to
rotate. The movement of the mouse is thus converted into pulses which move the cursor
in the X and Y direction in proportion to the movement of the mouse. Mouse can be
operated in a limited space. Since the mouse can be used without looking at it, the user
can concentrate on the screen and hence design productivity can be considerably
increased.

Fig. 1.17 Mouse

An optical mouse works on the basis of signal generated by the reflecting light from a
special metallic plate or which the mouse is moved. The source of light is an LED located
underneath the mouse. There are no moving parts in an optical mouse and that is an
advantage over the mechanical mouse. Slippage at the contacting surfaces is a
disadvantage of mouse

51
 for
Computer Hardware ent
1.8.6 DIGITIZER eri
ng
Digitizer boards or tablets are electro-mechanical vector graphic input devices that
cu
resemble a drafting board. These are used together with a movable stylus or reticule
rv
called a cursor or a puck. They are used to enter drawings into computer graphics
es
systems by taping the drawing to the surface of the digitizing board and placing the
an
cursor over points whose co-ordinates are to be entered. Figure 1.18 shows a
d
digitizer.
sh
STYLUS ap
TABLET
es
of
irr
MENU eg
ula
r
nat
ur
Fig. 1.18 Digitizer e.
A digitizer consists of three basic elements: a locator in the form of a pen or stylus
or puck or cursor, a tablet and a software package. A digitizer can be used to copy
existing drawings and send the geometric data directly to the computer. But more
frequently digitizers are used to create a drawing using an interactive drafting
package to enter a sketch or a drawing which can then be redrawn or edited as the
display appears on the CRT screen. The operation of a digitizer is similar to that of a
mouse. The user moves the stylus or puck across the flat surface of the tablet. The
surface of the tablet is magnetized and is embedded with wires in X and Y
directions. The tablet surface can be configured to represent the screen. The
physical motion of the stylus is converted by the wires into digital location signals
received by the locator. The coded electrical or acoustic signal is then routed to the
computer and displayed on the graphic terminal.

Digitizers are available in various sizes up to 1250 X 1600 mm. Of the two
commonly used locators, the puck cursor is generally more accurate. Its cursor has a
sighting device, usually a lens with cross hairs and integral push button pads for
entering commands, defining points and making other digitizing operations. In
many of these systems, the work surfaces on which drawing data are entered also
contain the function menu.
Data can be picked up by the cursor in two general modes. In the point mode,
the user locates specific points with the cursor and presses the appropriate function
buttons to enter the data. A typical operation will be to enter the end points of a
straight line. In the stream mode, a continuous flow of data points is sent to the
processor with the data rate determining digitizer’s resolution. This method is used
52
53
 CAD/CAM

Some type of digitizers can pick 3-dimensional information from a model, moving
the tip of a wand along the model. These systems generate signals that are analyzed to
produce co-ordinates. This type of digitizer is very useful for reverse engineering. In the
case of sonic digitizers a spark gap in the stylus tip creates a sound pulse that is detected
by two strip microphones one for X and one for Y axis. The location of the source of
sound is indicated by the time it takes for the sound to reach the microphones. The sonic
digitizer does not require a tablet.

The major sub-groups of standard digitizers are free cursor digitizers, constrained
cursor digitizers and motorized cursor digitizers.
1.8.7 THUMB WHEEL
Thumb wheels are potentiometric devices. Two of them are provided for X and Y
movements of cursor. These also have the advantage that one can look at the screen and
move the cursor.
1.8.8 AUTOMATED ENTRY
One of the major needs of design offices switching over to CAD is the necessity to
convert existing paper drawings to computer files. Many automated devices are now
available for entering drawings into CAD database. These units can scan a drawing and
convert them into a form useful for CAD with little manual intervention. A typical
automated drawing entry device contains a scanner and a workstation for viewing and
editing the drawing. Software is required for rasterizing and vectorizing the scanned
drawings.
Most systems begin the data entry process by scanning a document to create a raster
image. A scanning rate of 13 dots/mm is adequate for most engineering applications. The
pixel data may be stored or manipulated by converting it into vectors with the aid of
sophisticated software. At the work station vectors are organized into graphic primitives
such as line, arcs, circles, etc. symbols and text may also be recognized by the system and
are converted into a single piece of data. Many systems can even recognize handwritten
lettering.
Recently artificial intelligence techniques similar to those employed in robot vision
technology have been used for automatic entry of drawing into the computer. Texts are
usually entered in separate layers to enable easy revision.

1.9 OUTPUT DEVICES

A CAD system is not complete unless it can make hard copies of designs or analysis
created on the computer. Determining the best output device for a typical CIM
application is a three-step process: specifying how hard copies will be used, identifying
quality and cost criteria and selecting equipment most suitable for the application.
Hard copies are used for a variety of purposes, including shop use, file storage,
reports and presentations. Design iterations can be reduced by making hard copies at
crucial stages and distributing them to key personnel for review. Documents and
drawings are required

54
Computer Hardware

for archival purposes, to be used in proposals, reports, as well as illustrations.

Quality of the hard copy depends on the resolution of the hard copy unit. Speed and
frequency of operation of hard copy equipment are also of importance.
1.9.1 PLOTTERS
Plotters are classified based several factors. Depending on the maximum size of the
drawing plotters are designated as A0, A1, A2, A3 and A4. There are plotters
capable of creating drawings larger than A0 size. Generally plotters plot drawings
on cut sheets. Some special plotters are capable of creating drawings on rolls also.
Drawings are created through a series of short vectors which requires movement to
the pen in X and Y direction. Plotters can be classified on the basis of their
construction. A flat bed plotter has the pen moving on a flat surface on which the
drawing paper is fixed. The linear movements in the X and Y direction generate the
required drawing. In the case of a drum plotter, the paper is wound around on a
cylindrical drum. The pen holder is attached to a moving slide.
The co-ordinated motion generated by the rotation of the drum and linear
movement draws the pictures on the paper. In the third type, i.e. the pinch roller
plotter, the paper is tightly held between two sets of rollers. One roller in each pair
has a rough surface and the linear motion to the paper in one direction is imparted
by the rotation of the roller. The movement in the other direction is through a linear
motion imparted to the pen holder.
Plotters can also classify as pen plotters and electrostatic plotters. Pen plotters use
1, 4, 8 or more different color pens. The drawings thus can be made in several
colors. Pencil plotters are also available. Electrostatic plotters are faster but there is
no color variety. They are also cheaper.
Plotters have high resolution which is specified by dots/mm. The pen speed
and pen pressure are programmable. Various line thicknesses can be obtained by
using pens of different tip sizes. Generally fibre tip pens are used.
Pen plotters are slow and shading is difficult. Pen plotters also require more
maintenance and the ink or fibre tip or ball point pens should be changed frequently
to keep line quality high.
Inkjet plotters are the ones that are now commonly used. These are available in
color or monochrome versions. These are fast, reliable and more accurate than pen
plotters. Figure 1.19 shows a plotter.

Fig. 1.19 Plotter

55
 CAD/CAM

1 .9.2 PRINTERS
Several types of printers are available:
(i) Impact printers: They use small hammers or print heads containing small pins to
strike a ribbon to form dot matrix images. Colors are introduced through the use
of multiple ribbons or single ribbons with different color bands. Color intensity is
fixed and creating shades is almost impossible. Because of the low resolution,
copy quality is poor. Impact printers are suitable for high speed, low cost, high
volume hard copies.

(ii) Inkjet printer: Inkjet printers produce images by propelling fine droplets of ink
on to the medium to be printed. Droplets can be generated in continuous streams
or pulses. Some of the droplets get charged and are returned to the reservoir,
while uncharged droplets attach to the printing surface to form graphics. The
laser jet printers are capable of giving good quality color prints with shading at
reasonable cost.

(iii) Laser printer: Laser printer is one of the most widely used output devices. This
type combines high speed with high resolution and the quality of output is very
fine.

56
DETAIL EXPLANTION SOME TOPICS
What is CAD?
 

CAD if often defined in a variety of ways and includes a large range of activities. Very
broadly it can be said to be the integration of computer science (or software)
techniques in engineering design. At one end when we talk of modeling, iIt
encompasses the following:

 Use of computers (hardware & software) for designing products

 Numerical method, optimizations etc.

 2D/3D drafting

 3D modeling for visualization

 Modeling curves, surfaces, solids, mechanism, assemblies, etc.

The models thus developed are first visualized on display monitors using avariety of
techniques including wire frame displa, shaded image display, hidden surface
removed display and so on. Once the designer is satisfied, these models are then
used for various types of analysis / applications. Thus, at the other end it includes a
number of analysis activities. These could be:

 Stress (or deflection) analysis, i.e. numerical methods meant for estimating
the chedule of an artifact with respect to these parameters. It includes tools
like the Finite Element Method (FEM).

 Simulation of actual use

 Optimization

 Other applications like

o CAD/CAM integration

o Process planning

These are activities which normally use models developed using one or more of the
techniques mentioned above. These activities are often included in other umbrellas
like CAM or CAE. A term often used is Cax to include this broad set of activities. They
all use CAD models and often the kind of application they have to be used ina
determines the kind of amodel to be developed. Hence, in this course  I cover them
under the umbrella of CAD. In this course we will strive to give an overview of
chedule techniques followed by some applications, specifically CAM.

57
Thus there are three aspects to CAD.

 Modeling
 Display/ Visualization
 Applications
 

MODELING  

Modelling typically includes a set of activities like

 Defining objects
 Defining relation between objects
 Defining properties of objects
 Defining the orientations of the objects in suitable co-ordinate systems
 Modification of existing definition (editing)

The figure below explains what a typical CAD model would need to define, what kind
of entities need to be defined and what relationships exist between them.

At the highest level we have the volume which is defined by (or “delimited by”) a set
of surfaces. These surfaces can be either planar or curved / warped. A planar surface
can be bounded by a set of curves. A curved surface can be seen as a net of curves.
These curves are typically a succession of curve chedule which define the complete
the curve. The curve segment is defined using a set of end points / control points
which govern the nature of the curve. Thus a relation ship is defined between entities
at each level.

58
Once such a relationship is defined, a geometric model of the artifact is available. In
any design there might be manysuch artifacts. One then has to define properties of
each of these artifacts and define a relationship between them. The properties and
the relationships needed are dependant on the application the model is to be used
for subsequently. But one common application that all models have to go through is
visualization of the model (s).

DISPLAY / VISUALIZATION
 

Displaying the model requires the following:

 Mapping objects onto screen coordinates: Models are typically made in a

model coordinate system. This could be the world coordinate system, or a
coordinate system local to the object. These coordinate systems are typically
three dimensional in nature. To display the object on a 2D screen, the object
coordinates need to be mapped on to the 2D coordinate system of the screen.
This requires two steps:
o Viewing transformations: The coordinates of the object are
transformed in a manner as if one is looking at the object through the
screen. This coordinate system is referred to as the viewing coordinate
system.
o Projections: The object in the viewing coordinate system is then
projected onto the two dimensional plane of the screen.
 Surface display or shading / rendering: In displaying the objects on the
screen one often likes to get a shaded display of the object and get a good
feel of the three dimensional shape of the object. This requires special
techniques to render the surface based on its shape, lighting conditions and
its texture.
 Hidden line removal when multiple surfaces are displayed: In order to get a
proper feel of the three dimensional shape of an object, one often desires that
the lines / surfaces which are not visible should not be displayed. This is
referred to as hidden line / surface removal.

Once a model is visualized on the screen and approved by the conceptual designer, it
has to go through a number of analysis. Some of the kinds of usage this model might
have to go through are the following:

 Estimating stresses / strains / deflections in the objects under various static

loading conditions
 Estimating the same under dynamic loading conditions
 Visualizing how a set of objects connected together would move when subject
to external loading. This leads to a whole set of activities under simulation.
These activities would vary depend upon the application the object is to be
subject to.
 Optimizing the objects for
 Developing 2D engineering drawings of the object
 Developing a process plan of the object
 Manufacturing the object using NC / CNC machines and generating the
programs for these machines so as to manufacture these objects.

59
Having given the overview of the kind of chedule that can come under the
umbrella of CAD the uses these CAD models can be put to, I know highlight what
aspects of these would be covered in this course. Needless to say, all these activities
would be well beyond the scope of one single course. Therefore this course, which is
targeted to give an overview of CAD and its applications would include the following:

1. An overview of the hardware systems used in CAD

2. 2D and 3D transformations used to shift between coordinate systems
3. Projection transformation used to get the object in screen coordinate systems
4. Modeling of curves and surfaces
5. Modeling of solids

Hardware and Software Requirements of CAD

VIDEO DISPLAY DEVICES

Typically, the primary output device in a graphics system is a video monitor(Fig.below).

The operation of most video monitor is based on the standard cathode-ray tube(CRT)
design.

 Refresh Cathode-Ray Tubes

 Raster-Scan Displays
 Random-Scan Displays
 Color CRT Monitors
 Flat-Panel Displays

Refresh Cathode-Ray Tubes

Fig.below illustrates the basic operation of a CRT. A beam of electrons (cathode rays),
emitted by an electron gun, passes through focusing and deflection systems that direct the
beam towards specified position on the phosphor-coated screen. The phosphor then emits
a small spot of light at each position contacted by the electron beam. Because the light
emitted by the phosphor fades very rapidly, some method is needed for maintaining the
screen picture. One way to keep the phosphor glowing is to redraw the picture repeatedly
by quickly directing the electron beam back over the same points. This type of display is
called a refresh CRT.

60
The primary components of an electron gun in a CRT are the heated metal cathode and a
control grid (fig.below). Heat is supplied to the cathode by directing a current through a
coil of wire, called the filament, inside the cylindrical cathode structure. This causes
electrons to be “boiled off” the hot cathode surface. In the vacuum inside the CRT
envelope, negatively charged electrons are then accelerated toward the phosphor coating
by a high positive voltage. The accelerating voltage can be generated with a positively
charged metal coating on the in side of the CRT envelope near the phosphor screen, or an
accelerating anode can be used, a in fig below . Sometimes the electron gun is built to
contain the accelerating anode and focusing system within the same unit.

Spots of light are produced on the screen by the transfer of the CRT beam energy to the
phosphor. When the electrons in the beam collide wit the phosphor coating , they are
stopped and there are stopped and their kinetic energy is absorbed by the phosphor. Part
of the beam energy s converted by friction into heat energy, and the remainder causes
electron in the phosphor atoms to move up to higher quantum-energy levels. After a short
time, the “excited” phosphor electrons begin dropping back to their stable ground state,
giving up their extra energy as small quantums of light energy. What we see on the
screen is the combined effect of all the electrons light emissions: a glowing spot that
quickly fades after all the excited phosphor electrons have returned to their ground
energy level. The frequency ( or color ) of the light emitted by the phosphor is
proportional to the energy difference between the excited quantum state and the ground
state.

Different kinds of phosphor are available for use in a CRT. Besides color, a major
difference between phosphors is their persistence: how long they continue to emit light
( that is, have excited electrons returning to the ground state ) after the CRT beam is
removed. Persistence is defined as the time it take the emitted light from the screen to
decay to one-tenth of its original intensity. Lower-persistence phosphors require higher
refresh rates to maintain a picture on the screen without flicker. A phosphor with low
persistence is useful for animation ; a high-persistence phosphor is useful for displaying
highly complex, static pictures. Although some phosphor have a persistence greater than
1 second, graphics monitor are usually constructed with a persistence in the range from
10 to 60 microseconds

Raster-Scan Displays

In a raster- scan system, the electron beam is swept across the screen, one row at a time
from top to bottom. As the electron beam moves across each row, the beam intensity is
turned on and off to create a pattern of illuminated spots. Picture definition is stored in
memory area called the refresh buffer or frame buffer. This memory area holds the set
of intensity values for all the screen points. Stored intensity values are then retrieved

61
from the refresh buffer and “ painted” on the screen one row (scan line) at a time
(fig.below). Each screen point is referred to as a pixel or pel (shortened forms of picture
element).

Refreshing on raster-scan displays is carried out at the rate of 60 to 80 frames per second,
although some systems are designed for higher refresh rates. Sometimes, refresh rates are
described in units of cycles per second, or Hertz (Hz), where a cycle corresponds to one
frame. At the end of each scan line, the electron beam returns to the left side of the screen
to begin displaying the next scan line. The return to the left of the screen, after refreshing
each scan line, is called the horizontal retrace of the electron beam. And at the end of
each frame (displayed in 1/80th to 1/60th of a second), the electron beam returns (vertical
retrace)to the top left corner of the screen to begin the next frame.

On some raster-scan systems (and in TV sets), each frame is displayed in two passes
using an interlaced refresh procedure. In the first pass, the beam sweeps across every
other scan line from top to bottom. Then after the vertical retrace, the beam sweeps out
the remaining scan lines(fig.below). Interlacing of the scan lines in this way allows us to
see the entire screen displayed in one-half the time it would have taken to sweep across
all the lines at once from top to bottom.

Random-Scan Displays

62
Random scan monitors draw a picture one line at a time and for this reason are also
referred to as vector displays (or stroke-writing or calligraphic displays).The
component lines of a picture can be drawn and refreshed by a random-scan system in any
specified order .

Refresh rate on a random-scan system depends on the number of lines to be displayed .

Picture definition is now stored as a set of line-drawing commands in an area of memory
referred to as the refresh display file. Sometimes the refresh display file is called the
display list, display program, or simply the refresh buffer. To display a specified
picture, the system cycles through the set of commands in the display file, drawing each
component line in turn. After all line- drawing commands have been processed, the
system cycles back to the first line command in the list. Random-scan displays are
designed to draw al the component lines of a picture 30 to 60times each second.

Color CRT Monitors

The beam penetration method for displaying color pictures has been used with random-
scan monitors. Two layers of phosphor, usually red and green, are coated on to theinside
of the CRT screen, and the displayed color depends on how far the electron beam
penetrates into the phosphor layers.

Shadow-mask methods are commonly used in raster-scan systems (including color TV)
because they produce a much wider range of color than the beam penetration method. A
shadow-mask CRT has three phosphor color dots at each pixel position. One phosphor
dot emits a red light, another emits a green light, and the third emits a blue light. This
type of CRT has three electron guns, one for each color dot, and a shadow- mask grid just
behind the phosphor –coated screen.Fig.below illustrates the delta-delta shadow-mask
method, commonly used in color CRT systems. The three electron beam are deflected
and focused as a group onto the shadow mask, which contains a series of holes aligned
with the phosphor-dot patterns. When the three beams pass through a hole in the shadow
mask, they activate a dot triangle, which appears as a small color spot the screen the
phosphor dots in the triangles are arranged so that each electron beam can activate only

63
its corresponding color dot when it passes through the shadow mask.

Flat-Panel Displays

The term flat–panel displays refers to a class of video devices that have reduced volume,
weight, and power requirements compared to a CRT. A significant feature of flat-panel
displayed is that they are thinner than CRTs, and we can hang themon walls or wear them
on our wrists.

We can separate flat-panel displays into two categories: emissive displays and
nonemissive displays. The emissive displays (or emitters) are devices that displays, and
light-emitting diodes are examples of emissive displays. Nonemissive displays( or
nonemitters) use optical effects to convert sunlight or light from some other source into
graphics patterns. The most important example of a nonemissive flat-panel display is a
liquid- crystal device.

Plasma panels, also called gas discharge displays, are constructed by filling the region
between two glass plates with a mixture of gases that usually include neon. A series of
vertical conducting ribbons is placed on one glass panel, and a set of horizontal ribbons is
built into the other glass panel (fig.below). Firing voltages applied to a pair of horizontal

64
and vertical conductors cause the gas at the intersection of the of two conductors to break
down into a glowing plasma of electrons and ions. Picture definition is stored in a refresh
buffer, and the firing voltages are applied to refresh the pixel positions ( at the
intersections of the conductors) 60 times per second.

Another type of emissive device is the light-emitting diode (LED). A matrix of diodes is
arranged to form the pixel positions in the display, and picture chedule is stored in
refresh buffer. As in scan- line refreshing of a CRT, information is read from the refresh
buffer and converted to voltage levels that are applied to the diodes to produce the light
patterns in the display.

Liquid- crystal displays (LCDs) are commonly used in systems, such as calculators
(fig.below) and portable, laptop computers (fig.below). These nonemissive devices
produce a picture by passing polarized light from the surrounding or from an internal
light source through a liquid- crystal material that can be aligned to either block or
transmit the light.

The term liquid crystal refers to the fact that these compounds have a crystalline
arrangement of molecules, yet they flow like a liquid . Flat-panel displays commonly use
nematic (threadlike) liquid-crystal compounds that tend to keep the long axes of the rod-
shaped molecules aligned. A flat-panel display can then be constructed with a nematic
liquid crystal, as demonstrated in fig. below. Two glass plates, each containing a light
polarizer at right angles to the other palate, sandwich the liquid-crystal material. Rows of
horizontal transparent conductors are built into one glass plate, and columns of vertical
conductors are put into the other plate. The intersection of two conductors defines a pixel
position. Normally, the molecules are aligned as shown in the “on state”of fig.below.
Polarized light passing through the material is twisted so that it witll pass through the
opposite polarizer. The light is reflected back to the viewer. To turn off the pixel, we
apply voltage to the two intersecting conductors to align the molecules so that the light is
not twisted. This type of flat-panel device is referred to as a passive matrix LCD. Picture
definition are stored in a refresh buffer, and the screen is refreshed at the rate of 60
frames per second, as in the emissive devices. Back lighting is also commonly applied
using solid-state electronic devices, so that the system is not completely dependent on
outside light sources. Colors can be displayed by using different materials or dyes and by
placing a triad of color pixels at each screen location. Another method for constructing
LCDs is to place a transistor at each pixel location, using thin-film transistor technology.

The transistors are used to control the voltage at pixel locations and to prevent charge
from gradually leaking out of the liquid-crystal cells. These devices are called active-
matrix displays.

65
INPUT DEVICES

Various devices are available for data input on graphics workstations. Most systems have
a keyboard and one or more additional devices specially designed for interactive input.
These include a mouse, trackball, spaceball, joystick, digitizers, dials, and button boxes.
Some other input devices used in particular applications are data gloves, touch panels,
image scanners, and voice systems.

Keyboards
An alphanumeric keyboard on a graphics system is used primarily as device for entering
text strings. The keyboard is an efficient device for inputting such nongraphic data as
picture labels associated with a graphics display. Keyboards can also be provided with
features to facilitate entry of screen coordinates, menu selections, or graphics functions.

Mouse
A mouse is small hand-held box used to position the screen cursor. Wheels or rollers on
the bottom of the mouse can be used to record the amount and direction of movement.
Another method for detecting mouse motion is with an optical sensor,. For these systems,
the mouse is moved over a special mouse pad that has a grid of horizontal and vertical
lines. The optical sensor detects movement across the lines in the grid.
Since a mouse can be picked up and put down at another position without change in
cursor movement, it is used for making relative changes in the position of the screen
cursor. One, two, or three buttons are usually included on the top of the mouse for
signaling the execution of some operation, such as recording cursor position or invoking
a function.

Joysticks
A joystick consists of a small, vertical lever (called the stick) mounted on a base that is
used to steer the screen cursor around. Most joysticks select screen positions with actual
stick movement; others respond to pressure on the stick. Figure below shows a movable
joystick. Some joysticks are mounted on a keyboard; others function as stand-alone units.

66
Digitizers
A common device for drawing, painting, or interactively selecting coordinate positions
on an object is a digitizer. These devices can be used to input coordinate values in either
a two-dimensional or a three-dimensional space. Typically, a digitizer is used to scan
over a drawing or object and to input a set of discrete coordinate positions, which can be
joined with straight-line segments to approximate the curve or surface shapes.

67
One type of digitizer is the graphics tablet (also referred to as a data tablet), which is
used to input two-dimensional coordinates by activating a hand cursor or stylus at
selected positions on a flat surface. A hand cursor contains cross hairs for sighting
positions, while a stylus is a pencil-shaped device that is pointed at positions on the
tablet. Figures below show examples of desktop and floor-model tablets, using hand
cursors that are available with 2, 4, or 16 buttons. Examples of stylus input with a tablet
are shown in Figs. Below. The artist’s digitizing system in Fig. below uses
electromagnetic resonance to detect the three-dimensional position of the stylus. This
allows an artist to produce different brush strokes with different pressures on the tablet
surface. Tablet size varies from 12 by 12 inches for desktop models to 44 by 60 inches or
larger for floor models. Graphics tablets provide a highly accurate method for selecting
coordinate positions, with an accuracy that varies from about 0.2 mm on desktop models
to about 0.05 mm or less on larger models.

68
Many graphics tablets are constructed with a rectangular grid of wires embedded in the
tablet surface. Electromagnetic pulses are generated in sequence along the wires, and an
electric signal is induced in a wire coil in an activated stylus or hand cursor to record a
tablet position. Depending on the technology, either signal strength, coded pulses, or
phase shifts can be used to determine the position on the tablet.

69
70
HARD-COPY DEVICES

We can obtain hard-copy output for our images in several formats. Eg: Dot matrix
printer, laser printer & inkjet printer are commonly used.

Drafting layouts and other drawings are typically generated with ink-jet or pen plotters. A
pen plotter has one or more pens mounted on a carriage, or crossbar, that spans a sheet of
paper. Pens with varying colors and widths are used to produce a variety of shadings and
line styles. Wet-ink, ball-point, and felt-tip pens are all possible choices for use with a
pen plotter. Plotter paper can lie flat or be rolled onto a drum or belt. Crossbars can be
either moveable or stationary, while the pen moves back and forth along the bar. Either
clamps, a vacuum, or an electrostatic charge hold the paper in position. An example of a
table-top flatbed pen plotter is given in Figure below, and a larger, rollfeed pen

71
plottershown in Fig.below

72
PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT CYCLE
Industries have to continuously upgrade their products as well as introduce new products
in the market in order to retain as well as to increase their market share. The product
development is the responsibility of the research and development (R&D) department of
a manufacturing company. When a product is initially introduced the sales volume will
be low. If the product is good and satisfies the customers, the sales will pick up.
Sometimes, if there are any problems in the product the company will have to make
changes or improvements in the product which is a very expensive proposition. If the
defect is serious enough the company may have to recall an entire batch of products at
enormous cost and loss of goodwill. The sales and service department usually takes care
of attending to the customers’ problems. That is why manufacturers of automobiles,
entertainment electronic goods, fast moving consumer goods like washing machines and
refrigerators etc have elaborate sales and service network.

The sales volume will pick up gradually and peak after some time. The product will
continue to sell for some time. The sales will then start gradually declining owing to
availability of better products in the market. It is time for the company to introduce a new
and improved product in the market as well as to retire the old product. The companies
will usually advice the customers that the old product will be further supported by the
sales and service department only for a limited period of time.

73
The cycle through which a product goes through from development to retirement is called
the product life cycle. The variation of the sales volume during the life cycle of a product
is graphically shown in Fig.2.1.

P E AK S ALE S

Sale s Vo lu m e

PRODUCT
IN TR O D U C T IO N

R E TIR E M E N T

Life of a Product
Fig. 1.20 Variation of the Sales Volume Vs Life of a Product

The product development cycle starts with developing the product concept, evolving
the design, engineering the product, manufacturing the part, marketing and servicing.
This is shown in Fig. 1.20. The idea of a product may come from a patent, suggestion of
the customers, feedback of the sales and service department, market research carried out
by the marketing department or from the R&D department itself. The next stage is the
conceptualization of the product. The cost at which the product could be sold in the
market is decided and the overall design in terms of shape, functional specifications,
ergonomics, aesthetics etc are considered in detail and finalized at this stage. The work of
product development is then taken to the next stage by the design department who
carefully designs each assembly and each component of the assembly. Detailed design
analysis and optimization is carried out at this stage. A design may have several variants.
For example, a passenger car may have what is called a stripped down version with the
bare minimum options and luxury versions with several add on functionalities. Between
these two extreme versions, there will be a number of models or variants to meet the
needs of customers with different paying capacities. In a similar way, a satellite launch
vehicle may be designed for different payloads. A fighter aircraft may have different
versions. A refrigerator will have to be marketed with different capacities. The design
department creates these designs through a top down approach or a bottom up approach.
In top down approach, the entire assembly is designed first and individual designs are
done latter. In bottom up approach, the component design is done first and the product is
realized by assembling the components suitably. The design also will involve preparation
of detail drawings

74
Engineering the product consists of process planning, tool design, facility design,
capacity planning, quality assurance activities, procurement, assembly planning, etc.
Marketing department will have the responsibility of carrying out appropriate product
launch activities as well as planning the sales and service network, advertising and
training of sales and service personnel.

Concept

Service Design

Marketing Planning

Manufacture

Fig. 1.21 Product Development Cycle

In actual practice product development activities form a spiral as shown in Fig. 2.3.
The product goes through a series of continuous refinement and improvements, additions
etc. A typical example is a software package improved versions of which are released as
new versions at periodic intervals. The feedback from the marketing and services leads to
improvements in design and/or evolution of new designs. As an example, the reader is
advised to make a study of the evolution of the various models of aircraft or passenger
cars over the last five decades.

This is how most of the present products have been evolved over the period. One can
evidently realize it by comparing a 1928 model T Ford car with the current jelly bean
shaped cars. However, the design evolution however does not stop at any stage and is a
continuous process.

Similarly one can observe the vast improvements that have taken place in the design
of entertainment electronic goods, computers, aircrafts and even domestic appliances like
refrigerators. Often an altogether new concept may make a design obsolete. Songs were
recorded at different times on discs, tapes, cassettes and CD-ROMS. Correspondingly, the
design of the music player has also undergone radical changes from the old gramophone
record player to the present MP3 player. It is interesting to note the rate of obsolescence
of technology in music players.

75
 M a nufacture

Q ua lity C on tro l
M a nufacture
P lan ning M a rke tin g

Q u a lity C on tro l
M a nu fa c tu r e M a rke tin g
P lan ning S e rvice
D esign
M a rke tin g
P lan nin g S e rvice
D esign

S e rvice
D e sign
C o n ce p t

Fig. 1.22 Product Development Spiral

QUESTIONS
1. Describe the principal features and list the major specifications of a personal
computer.
2. Sketch and describe the layout of the mother board of a Pentium PC.
3. How does a mainframe computer differ from a PC?

4. What are the output interfaces available on a PC? How do they differ from each
other?

5. Describe the advantages of a local area network in a design environment?

6. What are the salient features of a UNIX based design workstation?

7. What are the principal subsystems of a graphics engine?

8. List the major specifications of a design workstation.

9. Describe the principle of working of a CRT.

10. How is a line displayed on a graphics monitor?

11. What is the function of a frame buffer?

12. What is the advantage of a mouse as an input device?

76
 UNIT-II
PRINCIPLES OF COMPUTER
GRAPHICS

77
2.0 INTRODUCTION
Traditionally drawings are prepared on plane drawing sheets. This has several limitations.
The sketches have to be made only in two dimensions. Though the depth can be
represented by pictorial projections like isometric and perspective projections, the
projections have to be necessarily reduced to two dimensions.
Use of computer graphics has opened up tremendous possibilities for the designer.
Some of them are listed below:
• The object is represented by its geometric model in three dimensions (X, Y and
Z).
• The mathematical representation reduces creation of views like orthographic,
isometric, axonometric or perspective projections into simple viewing
transformations.

• Though the size of the screen is limited, there is no need to scale the drawings.

• Drawings can be made very accurate.

• The geometric models can be represented in color and can be viewed from any
angle.

• Sections can be automatically created.

• The associativity ensures that any change made in one of the related views will
automatically reflect in other views.

• Revision and revision control are easy.

• Drawings (geometric models) can be modified easily.

• More important than all, drawings can be reused conveniently.

• Storage and retrieval of drawings are easy.

78
Modern computer graphics displays are simple in construction. They consist of basically
three components.
i. Monitor
ii. Digital Memory or Frame Buffer

iii. Display Controller

Most of the computer graphics displays use raster CRT which is a matrix of discrete
cells each of which can be made bright. A graphic entity like line or circle is represented
as a series of “points or dots” on the screen. Therefore, it is called as a point plotting
device.
The video display screen is divided into very small rectangular elements called a
picture element or pixel. This happens to be the smallest addressable screen element.
Graphic images are formed by setting suitable intensity and color to the pixels which
compose the image. Depending upon the resolution screens may have varying number of
pixels. For example, an SVGA monitor with a resolution of 1024 x 768 will have 1024
pixels in every row (X — direction) and 768 pixels in every column (Y-direction).
Monitors of larger size will have resolution of 1024 x 1024 or more. A raster scan system
displays the image on a CRT in a certain fixed sequence.

The refresh rate is the number of complete images or frames scanned per second. In
the case of interlaced refresh cycle odd numbered raster lines are refreshed during 1/60 th
of a second. Even numbered raster lines are refreshed during the next 1/60 th of a second.
In non-interlaced displays, all lines are refreshed in 1/60 th of a second. The quality of
non-interlaced display is hence, superior. These systems, however, require expensive
frame buffer memory and display controller.

2.1 GRAPHIC PRIMITIVES

A drawing is created by an assembly of points, lines, arcs, circles. For example, drawing
shown in Fig 2.1 consists of several entities. In computer graphics also drawings are
created in a similar manner. Each of these is called an entity. The drawing entities that a
user may find in a typical CAD package include :
point
line
construction line, multi-line, polyline
circle
spline
arc
ellipse
polygon
rectangle

79
 CIRCLE LINE
ARC

LINE

LINE

LINE

Fig. 2.1 A Simple Drawing

The fundamental principles of generation of some of these entities are discussed
below :

2.1.1 POINT PLOTTING

The frame buffer display is an example of a point plotting device. The smallest unit
accepted by such displays is a single pixel. To construct a useful picture on a point
plotting device, a picture must be built out of several hundreds of pixels.

80
81
2.1.2 DRAWING OF LINES
Straight line segments are used a great deal in computer generated pictures. The
following criteria have been stipulated for line drawing displays :
i. Lines should appear straight
ii. Lines should terminate accurately

iii. Lines should have constant density

iv. Line density should be independent of length and angle

v. Line should be drawn rapidly

The process of turning on the pixels for a line segment is called vector generation. If
the end points of the line segment are known, there are several schemes for selecting the
pixels between the end pixels. One method of generating a line segment is a symmetrical
digital differential analyzer (DDA).

2.1.2.1 DDA ALGORITHM

The digital differential analyzer generates lines from their differential equations. The
DDA works on the principle that X and Y are simultaneously incremented by small steps
proportional to the first derivatives of X and Y. In the case of a straight line the first
derivatives are constant and are proportional to DX and DY, where D is a small quantity

82
 In the real world of limited precision displays, addressable pixels only must be
generated. This can be done by rounding to the next integer after each incremental step.
After rounding, a pixel is displayed at the resultant X and Y locations. An alternative to
rounding is the use of arithmetic overflow. X and Y are kept in registers that have integer
and fractional parts. The incrementing values which are less than unity are repeatedly
added to the fractional part and whenever the result overflows the corresponding integer
part is incremented. The integer parts of X and Y are used to plot the line. This would
normally have the effect of truncating. The DDA is therefore initialized by adding 0.5 in
each of the fractional parts to achieve true rounding.

The symmetrical DDA generates reasonably accurate lines since a displayed pixel is
never away from a true line by half the pixel unit. A Pascal procedure for a simple DDA
is given below :
Procedure DDA (X1, Y1, X2, Y2 : integer) ;
length : var ;
I : integer;
X, Y, X-incr, Y-incr : real ;
begin
length : = abs (X2– X1) ;
if abs (Y2–Y1) < length then length: = abs (Y2–Y1);
X — incr : = (X2 – X1) /length ;
Y — incr : = (Y2 – Y1) /length ;
X : = X1 + 0.5 ; Y = Y1 + 0.5 ;
for I : = 1 to length do
begin
plot ( ched (X) ; ched(Y) ;
X : = X + X — incr ;
Y : = Y + Y — incr ;
end;
end.

1) example
To draw a straight line from connecting two points (2, 7) and (15, 10)
X1 = 2, X2 = 15 abs(X2 – X1) = 13
Y1 = 7, Y2 = 10 abs(Y2 – Y1) = 3
Principles of Comp

Length = 13

83
 1
X incr = X2–X1  3 1
Length 13

Y incr = Y2–Y1  3  0.23

Length 13
Initial values of X and Y are
X = 2.5 Y = 7.5
The X and Y are tabulated in Table 2.1 and Fig. 2.2 shows a plot of the line.
Table 2.1 Pixel Values

X Y ched (X) ched (Y)

2.5 7.50 2 7
3.5 7.73 3 7
4.5 7.96 4 7
5.5 8.19 5 8
6.5 8.42 6 8
7.5 8.65 7 8
8.5 8.88 8 8
9.5 9.11 9 9
10.5 9.34 10 9
11.5 9.57 11 9
12.5 9.80 12 9
13.5 10.23 13 10
14.5 10.46 14 10
15.5 10.69 15 10

10

9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Fig. 2.2 Plotting a Line

84
It can be noted that lines drawn on a raster display may have a jagged or staircase
appearance unless the lines are vertical or horizontal. This is because the points that are
plotted must be pixel grid points and many of these may not lie on the actual line.
2.3. DRAWING OF CIRCLES
Circle is another important entity like line. Several circle drawing algorithms have been
described in literature. A simple procedure for drawing a circle is described in this
section.
This procedure calculates points on the circle centred about the origin and then adds
co-ordinates of the centre (X ,Y ) to the X and Y values respectively.
Program mcircle;
var xc, yc, radius :
integer; ($I GRAPH.P)
Procedure dcircle
(xc, yc,
radius: integer) ;
var
dtheta,
cdtheta, sdtheta,
x, y,
xtemp: real ;
z: integer ;
begin
dtheta : = 1/radius ;
cdtheta: = cos(dtheta) ;
sdtheta: = sin(dtheta) ;
x: = radius;
y: = 0;

for z: 0 to 45 do
begin
plot (round (xc + x), round (yc + y),
1); plot (round (xc – x), round (yc +
y), 1); plot (round (xc + x), round (yc
– y), 1); plot (round (xc – x), round
(yc – y), 1); plot (round (xc + y),
round (yc + x), 1); plot (round (xc –
y), round (yc + x), 1); plot (round (xc
+ y), round (yc – x), 1); plot (round
(xc – y), round (yc – x), 1);
xtemp: = x

85
x : = (x* cdtheta – y*sdtheta) ; y : =
(y*cdtheta + x*sdtheta) ;
end ;

end ;

begin
writln(enter xc,yc,radius);
readln(xc);
readln(yc);
readln(radius);
clrscr;
graphcolormode;
palette(3);
dcircle(xc,yc,radius)
end of a circle.

2.4. BRESENHAM’S CIRCLE ALGORITHM

Bresenham’s algorithm enables the selection of optimum raster locations to represent a
straight line. In this algorithm either pixels along X or Y directions are incremented by
one unit depending upon the slope of the line. The increment in the other direction is
determined by examining the error or distance between actual line location and the
nearest grid locations.

The principle of Bresenham’s algorithm can be explained with the aid of Fig 3.3 a. If
the slope of the line (in the first octant) is more than ½, the pixel point in the Y direction
is shifted by one. Thus lines L1 and L2 passes through pixel (0,0). For line L2 slope is
greater than ½ ; hence the pixel point is (1,1) whereas for L1 the slope is less than ½ and
hence (1,0) is the pixel point.
Bresenham’s algorithm selects optimum raster locations with minimum computation.
To accomplish this, the algorithm always increments by one unit in either X or Y
depending upon the slope of the line. The increment in the other variable either zero or
one is determined by examining the distance (error) between the actual line location and
the nearest grid location. Only the sign of this error needs be examined.
Consider the line of slope m = 0.4 and passing through (0,0) in Fig 2.3 (a). The error
team e is initialized to –1/2. The next raster point can be determined by adding the slope
(m) to the error term.
i.e. e=e+m
e = – 0.5 + 0.4 = – 0.1

86
Since e is negative, the line will pass below the middle of the pixel. Hence the pixel is at
the same horizontal level i.e., (0,1). For the next location X is incremented to 2. Error e =
-0.1 + 0.4 = 0.3. Since e is positive the line passes above the middle of the raster line.
Hence the location of pixel is (2,1). Before examining the next pixel location the error
term has to be re-initialized as its value is positive. Re-initialization is done by
subtracting one from the current e value. Hence e = 0.3 — 1 = -0.7. Adding the slope 0.4
we get e = -0.3. Table 3.2 shows the computed values and the location of pixels. A plot of
the pixel location is shown in Fig. 2.3 (b).

Table 2.2 Calculation of Pixel Position

X Error Y Remarks
0 – 0 .5 0 initial pixel
1 – 0.5 + 0 .4 = – 0 .1 0
2 – 0.1 + 0 .4 = 0 .3 1
0 .3 – 1 = – 0 .7 reinitialize the error by
3 – 0 .7 + 0 .4 = – 0 .3 1 subtracting one
4 – 0.3 + 0 .4 = 0 .1 2
0.1 – = – 0 .9
– 0.9 + 0 .4 = – 0 .5 2
5 – 0.5 + 0 .4 = – 0 .1 2
6

L2

0,1 1,1

L1
0
(Slope <0.5)
0 1 2 3

0,0 1,0

Fig. 2.3 (a) Location of Pixels Using Fig. 2.3 (b) Pixels for Line of
Bresenham Algorithm Slope, m = 0.4

The speed of the Bresenham’s algorithm can be increased by using integer arithmetic
and eliminating division to determine slope.
The pseudo code and a C-program for implementing Bresenham’s algorithm are given
below:

Pseudo code for Bresenham’s line-drawing algorithm

Given a line from x1, y1 to x2, y2 ...
dx is the difference between the x components of end points
dy is the difference between the y components of end points
ix is the absolute value of dx iy is the dy plotx
absolute value of dy inc is the larger of dx, is x1

87
 ploty is y1 (the beginning of line)
x starts at 0
y starts at 0
plot a pixel at plotx, ploty increment x
using ix increment y using iy plot is
false
if x is greater than inc plot is true
decrement x using inc increment plotx if dx is
positive decrement plotx id dx is negative
if y is greater than inc plot is true
decrement y using inc increment ploty if dy is
positive decrement ploty if dy is negative
if plot is true, plot a pixel at plotx, ploty increment i.
Program in Turbo-C to draw a line
# include <stdio. H>
# include <graphics. H>

# include <stdlb. H>

void draw line (int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2), void main
(void)
{
draw line (100, 100, 50, 50) ;
}
void draw line (int x1, int y1, int x2 m int y2)
{
int dx, dy, inc, ix, iy, x, y, plot, plotx, ploty, I ;

88
int gd, gm ; gd = DETECT ;
initgraph (&gd, &gm, “ “) ;
dx = x1 – x2 ;
dy = y1 – y2 ;
ix = abs (dx) ;
iy = abs (dy) ;
inc = max (ix, iy) ;
x=y=0;
plot x = x1 ;
plot y = y1 ;
for (I = 0 ; I <inc ; I ++)
{
x + = ix ; y
+ iy ; plot
= 0 if (x >
inc)
{
plot = 1 ;
x – = inc ;
if (dx < 0)
plot x – = 1 ;
else
plotx + = 1 ;
}
if (y > inc)
{
plot = 1 ;
y – = inc ;
if (dy)
ploty – = 1 ;
else
ploty + = 1 ;
}

if (plot)

putpixel (plotx, ploty, 1)

Br
else
es
} en
getch ( ) ; ha
closegrap m’
h(); s

89
circle algorithm
An efficient algorithm for generating a circle has been developed by J. Bresenham.
Values of a circle centred at the origin are computed in the sector X = 0 to X = R /2
where R is the radius of the circle. The symmetry of the circle is used to obtain the
pixels corresponding to other sectors.

Bresenham’s circle algorithm can be explained as follows:

Consider an origin-centred circle. The algorithm begins at X = 0 and Y = R. In
the first quadrant of the circle, Y is a monotonically decreasing function of X.
Referring to Fig. 3.4, (Xi, Yi) is a point on the circle. For clockwise generation of
the circle there are only three possible selections of the next pixel, which represents
the circle. These positions are also shown in Fig. 3.4. The algorithm is designed to
choose the pixel which minimizes the square of the distance between one of these
pixels and the true circle, i.e., the minimum of
H = [ (Xi + 1) 2 + (Yi)2 – R 2]
V = [ (Xi ) 2 + ( Yi – 1) 2 – R 2 ]
D = [ ( Xi + 1) 2 + ( Yi – 1 ) 2 – R 2 ]

Xi, Yi Xi+1, Yi

D
V

Xi, Yi-1 Xi+1, Yi-1

Fig. 2.4 First Quadrant Pixel Position

A flow chart to obtain the pixel values for representing a circle is given in Fig. 2.5. It
is sufficient to obtain the pixel values for 1/8th of a circle, the remaining obtained by
symmetry.
A program which implements Bresenham’s algorithm follows.
Include <stdio.h>
include <graphics.h>

90
Void draw circle (int xc, int yc, int y) ;
Void symmetry (int x, int y, int xc, int
yc) ; double ratio ;
Void main (void)
{
draw circle (300, 150, 50) ;
}
int d, x ; int
gd, gm ;
gd = DETECT ;
initgraph (&gd, &gm, “
“) ; d = 3 — 2 * y ;
ratio =
1.5 x =
0;
while (x < y)
{
symmetry (x, y, xc,
yc) ; if (d < 0)
d+=4*x+6
; else
{
d + = 4 * (X – Y) +
10 ; y - :
}
x++ ;
if (x = = y)
symmetry (x, y, xc, yc) ;
}
getch ( ) ;
closegraph
();
}
void symmetry (int x, int y, int xc, int yc)
{
int x start, x end, x out ;
int y start, y end, y out ;
x start = x * ratio
x end = (x + 1) * ratio
; y start = y * ratio ;

91
 y end = (y + 1) * ratio
for (x out = x start ; x out < x end ; ++ x out)
{
put pixel (x out + xc, y + yc, 1 ) ;
put pixel (x out + xc, –y + yc,
1) ;

3
put pixel (-x out + xc, –y + yc, 1) ;
put pixel (-x out + xc, y + yc,
1) ;
}
(y out = y start ; y out < y end ; ++y out)
{
put pixel (y out + xc, x + yc, 1 ) ;
put pixel (y out + xc, –x + yc,
1) ;
put pixel (-y out + xc, –x + yc, 2) ;
put pixel (-y out + xc, x + yc,
1) ;
}
Start

X =0,Y = R
= 2(1 —R)
Lim it=0

Plot(X,Y)

Yes Yes
Y<= Lim it End

No

<0 Yes

No
=2 +2Y –1
Yes
<0
Yes No
= 2 – 2X– 1 No =< 0

X=X+1
Y=Y–1
–0 = + 2X –2Y+2
X=X+1
= + 2X+ 1
Y=Y –1
= –2Y + 1

Fig. 2.5 Flow Chart to Determine Pixel Values

92
Example of bresenham’s algorithm
Consider a circle with centre at the origin and radius equal to 10 units. Because of
symmetry only the first octant is considered here.
X=0
Y = 10
I = 2 (1–10) = –
18 LIMIT = 0
PLOT (0, 10)
Y1 > LIMIT
CONTINUE I < 0
GOTO 2
2) = 2 (–18) + 2 (10) –1 = –17 < 0 GOTO 10 10
X=0+1=1
I = –17 + 2 + 1 = –
14 GOTO 1
1 PLOT (1, 10)
Yi > LIMIT CONTINUE
I<0
= 2 (–14) + 2 (10) –1
= –9 < 0 GOTO
10 X = 1 + 1

ii = –14 + 2 (2) + 1
= –9
GOTO 1
PLOT (2, 10)
The procedure is to be continued till the required point is reached. The results are
given in Table 2.3 and are plotted in Fig. 2.6.

Table 2.3 Pixel Values for Circle

i X Y Plot
-18 0 10 0, 10
-15 -17 1 10 1, 10
-10 -11 2 10 2, 10
- 3 -1 3 10 3, 10
-14 13 4 9 4, 9
- 3 -11 5 9 5, 9
- 3 3 6 8 6, 8
- 1 5 7 7 7, 7
9
8 Y7 6
5

93
 4
3
2
1
0

0123456789X

Fig. 2.6 Plot of First Octant of a Circle

2.5 ELLIPSE
The ellipse is a variation of a circle. Stretching a circle in one direction produces an
ellipse. The polar equations for an ellipse with centre at XC, YC are:
X = XC + a * cos (θ)
Y = YC + b * sin (θ)

The above equations can be used to plot an ellipse in a manner similar to that of
generating a circle.

94
 2.6 2-D Geometric Transformation
2.6.0 BASIC TRANSFORMATION

Animation are produced by moving the ‘camera’ or the objects in a scene along
animation paths. Changes in orientation, size and shape are accomplished with
geometric transformations that alter the coordinate descriptions of the objects. The
basic geometric transformations are translation, rotation, and scaling. Other
transformations that are often applied to objects include reflection and shear.

2.6.1 Use of transformations in CAD

In mathematics, “Transformation” is the elementary term used for a variety of

operation such as rotation, translation, scaling, reflection, shearing etc. CAD is used
throughout the engineering process from conceptual design and layout, through
detailed engineering and analysis of components to definition of manufacturing
methods. Every aspect of modeling in CAD is dependent on the transformation to
view model from different directions we need to perform rotation operation. To move
an object to a different location translation operation is done. Similarly Scaling
operation is done to resize the object.

2.6.2 Coordinate Systems

In CAD three types of coordinate systems are needed in order to input, store and
display model geometry and graphics. These are the Model Coordinate System
(MCS), the World Coordinate System (WCS) and the Screen Coordinate System
(SCS).
Model Coordinate System
 The MCS is defined as the reference space of the model with respect to which all the
model geometrical data is stored. The origin of MCS can be arbitrary chosen by the
user.

 
 

95
World Coordinate System
As discussed above every object have its own MCS relative to which its geometrical
data is stored. Incase of multiple objects in the same working space then there is
need of a World Coordinate System which relates each MCS to each other with
respect to the orientation of the WCS. It can be seen by the picture shown below.

 
Screen Coordinate System
In contrast to the MCS and WCS the Screen Coordinate System is defined as a two
dimensional device-dependent coordinate system whose origin is usually located at
the lower left corner of the graphics display as shown in the picture below. A
transformation operation from MCS coordinates to SCS coordinates is performed by
the software before displaying the model views and graphics.

96
2.6.3 Viewing Transformations

As discussed that the objects are modeled in WCS, before these object descriptions
can be projected  to the view plane, they must be transferred to viewing coordinate
system. The view plane or the projection plane, is set up perpendicular to the
viewing zv axis. The World coordinate positions in the scene are transformed to
viewing  coordinates, then viewing coordinates are projected onto the view plane.
The transformation sequence to align WCS with Viewing Coordinate System is.
1. Translate the view reference point to the origin of the world coordinate system.
2. Apply rotations to align xv, yv, and zv with the world xw, yw and zw axes,
respectively.

2.7 TRANSLATION

A translation is applied to an object by repositioning it along a straight line path from

one coordinate location to another. We translate a two-dimensional point by adding
translation distances, tx and ty, to the original coordinate position (x,y) to move the
point to a new position (x’,y’)

The translation distance pair (tx, ty) is called translation vector or shift vector
 
Matrix representation of translation

This allows us to write the two-dimensional translation equations in the matrix form:

97
2.8 ROTATION

A two-dimensional rotation is applied to an object by repositioning it along a circular path in the x-

y plane. When we generate a rotation we get a rotation angle (θ) and the position about which the
object is rotated (xr , yr) this is known as rotation point or pivot point. The transformation can also
be described as a rotation about rotation axis that is perpendicular to x-y plane and passes through
the pivot point. Positive values for the rotation angle define counter-clockwise rotations about the
pivot point and the negative values rotate objects in the clockwise direction.
Suppose the pivot point be at origin, to understand the relationship between angular and coordinate
points of original and transformed position lets look at the figure below:

Here,          r  - constant distance of the point from the origin.

                Φ  - original angular position of the point from the horizontal
                θ   - rotation angle
we can express the transformation by the following equations

we know the coordinate of x and y in polar form

on expanding and equating we get

The same equations we can write in matrix form as

Where the rotation matrix R is

Hence it is

98
2.9 SCALING

Scaling is a kind of transformation in which the size of an object is changed. Remember the change
change in shape. This kind of transformation can be carried out for polygons by multiplying each co
the scaling factor. Sx and Sy which in turn produces new coordinate of (x,y) as (x’,y’). The equation

or

here S represents the scaling matrix.

NOTE: If the values of scaling factor are greater than 1 then the object is enlarged and if it is less t
the object. Keeping value as 1 does not changes the object.
 

Uniform Scaling: To achieve uniform scaling the values of scaling factor must be kept equal.
Differential Scaling: Unequal or Differential scaling is produce incases when values for scaling fac

As per usual phenomenon of scaling an object moves closer to origin when the values of scaling fac
prevent object from moving or changing its position while is scaling we can use a point that is woul
while scaling which is commonly referred as fixed point (xf yf).

99
2.10 REFLECTION

Reflection is nothing more than a rotation of the object by 180o. In case of reflection the image formed is on the oppo
of the reflective medium with the same size. Therefore we use the identity matrix with positive and negative signs ac
to the situation respectively.

The reflection about the x-axis can be shown as:

The reflection about the y-axis can be shown as:

2.10.1 REFLECTION ABOUT A ORIGIN

When both the x and y coordinates are flipped then the reflection produced is relative to an axis that is perpendicular
plane and that passes through the coordinate origin. This transformation is referred as a reflection relative to coordin
origin and can be represented using the matrix below.

2.10.2 REFLECTION ABOUT AN ARBITRARY LINE

Reflection about any line y= mx + c can be accomplished with a combination of translate-rotate-reflect transformatio
Steps are as follows
1. Translate the working coordinate system (WCS) so that the line passes through the origin.
2. Rotate the WCS such that one of the coordinate axis lies onto the line.
3. Reflect about the aligned axis
4. Restore the WCS back by using the inverse rotation and translation transformation.
 

100
2.10.3 REFLECTION ABOUT AN ARBITRARY POINT

As seen in the example above, to reflect any point about an arbitrary point P (x,y) can be accomplished by translate-
transformation i.e. the origin is first translated to the the arbitrary point and then the reflection is taken about the or
finally the origin is translated back to its original position.
The whole process can be visualized using the animation below.

 
 
 

101
2.11 HOMOGENEOUS COORDINATES

We have seen that basic transformations can be expressed in matrix form. But many
graphic application involve sequences of geometric transformations. Hence we need
a general form of matrix to represent such  transformations. This can be expressed
as:

Where        P and P’  - represent the row vectors.

                        T1   - is a 2 by 2 array containing multiplicative factors.
                        T2    - is a 2 element row matrix containing translation terms.

We can combine multiplicative and translational terms for 2D geometric

transformations into a single matrix representation by expanding the 2 by 2 matrix
representations to 3 by 3 matrices. This allows us to express all transformation
equations as matrix multiplications, providing that we also expand the matrix
representations for coordinate positions. To express any 2D transformations as a
matrix multiplication, we represent each Cartesian coordinate position (x,y) with the
homogeneous coordinate triple (xh,yh,h),
such that

Thus, a general homogeneous coordinate representation can also be written as (h.x,

h.y, h). For 2D geometric transformations, we can choose the homogeneous
parameter h to any non-zero value. Thus, there is an infinite number of equivalent
homogeneous representations for each coordinate point (x,y). A convenient choice is
simply to h=1. Each 2D position is then represented with homogeneous coordinates
(x,y,1). Other values for parameter h are needed, for eg, in matrix formulations of
3D viewing transformations.

Expressing positions in homogeneous coordinates allows us to represent all

geometric transformation equations as matrix multiplications. Coordinates are
represented with three element row vectors and transformation operations are
written as 3 by 3 matrices.

For Translation, we have

102
or
 

Similarly for Rotation transformation, we have

or

Finally for Scaling transformation, we have

or

103
 2.12 2-D Composite Transformation

2.12.1 INTRODUCTION

With the matrix representations of the transformations, we can set up a matrix for
any sequence of transformations as a composite transformation matrix by calculating
the matrix product of the individual transformations.

If two successive transformations T1 and T2 are applied to a coordinate position P,

the final transformed location P’ is calculated as:

Where

104
2.12.2 TRANSLATION

In translation, an object is displayed a given distance and direction from its original position. If the displacement i

given by the vector the new object point P’(x’,y’) can be found by applying the transformation Tv
to P(x,y)

where

and

105
2.12.3 ROTATION

A generalized rotation about an arbitrary point (a,b) can be obtained by performing

the following transformations

1. Translate the object so that the pivot-point position is moved to coordinate

origin.

2. Rotate the object about the coordinate origin.

3. Translate the object so that the pivot point is returned to its original position.

The composite matrix for this sequence is obtained as:

where,

ROTATION

106
A generalized rotation about an arbitrary point (a,b) can be obtained by performing
the following transformations

1. Translate the object so that the pivot-point position is moved to coordinate

origin.

2. Rotate the object about the coordinate origin.

3. Translate the object so that the pivot point is returned to its original position.

The composite matrix for this sequence is obtained as:

where,

107
2.12.4 SCALING

The animation illustrates a transformation sequence to produce scaling with respect

to a selected fixed position (a,b) using a scaling function that can only scale relative
to the coordinate origin.

1. Translate object so that the fixed point coincides with the coordinate origin.

2. Scale the object with respect to the coordinate origin.

3. Use the inverse translation of step 1 to return the object to its original
position.

The composite matrix for this sequence is obtained as:

where,

108
 2.13 3-D Geometric & Modeling Transformation

2.13.1 TRANSLATION

In three-dimensional homogeneous coordinate representation, when a point P is translated to P’ with

(x’,y’,z’) can be represented in matrix form as:
 

Where,

109
2.13.2 ROTATION

 
Unlike 2D, rotation in 3D is carried out around any line. The most simple rotations could be around c
positive rotations produce counter-clockwise rotations.
Rotation in term of general equation is expressed as

Where,

R = Rotation Matrix
Rotation matrix when an object is rotated about X axis can be expressed as:

 
Rotation matrix when an object is rotated about Y axis can be expressed as:

110
 
Rotation matrix when an object is rotated about Z axis can be expressed as:

2.13.3 SCALING

Scaling an object in three-dimensional is similar to scaling an object in two-

Similar to 2D scaling an object tends to change its size and repositions the o
the coordinate origin. If the transformation parameter are unequal it leads
the object by changing its dimensions. The perform uniform scaling the scal
be kept equal

i.e.

Where,

111
NOTE: A special case of scaling can be represented as reflection.

If the value of Sx, Sy or Sz be replaced by -1 it will return the reflection of t

the standard plane whose normal would be either x axis, y axis or z axis res

2.13.4 REFLECTION

In 3D-reflection the reflection takes place about a plane whereas 2D reflection it used take place abo
case of pure reflections, along basic planes, viz. X-Y plane, Y-Z plane and Z-X plane are given belo
 
Transformation matrix for a reflection through X-Y plane is:
 

 
Transformation matrix for a reflection through Y-Z plane is:

 
Transformation matrix for a reflection through Z-X plane is:

112
 2.14 3-D Projections

2.14.1 ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTION

The simplest of the Parallel projections is the orthographic projection, commonly used for engineeri
accurately show the correct or true size and shape of single plane face of an object. Orthographic p
onto one of the coordinate planes x=0, y=0, z=0.The matrix for projection onto the z plane is

Notice that the third column (the z column) is all zeros. Consequently, the effect of the transformat
coordinate of a position vector to zero.

Similarly, the matrices for projection on to x=0 and y=0 planes are

113
and

2.14.2 AXONOMETRIC PROJECTION

A single orthographic projection fails to illustrate the general three-dimensional shape of an object. Axo
overcome this limitation. An axonometric projection is constructed by manipulating the object using rota
that at least three adjacent faces are shown. The result is then projected from the center of projection at i
coordinate plane unless a face is parallel to the plane of projection, an axonometric projection does not s
However, the relative lengths of originally parallel lines remain constant, i.e., parallel lines are equally f
Foreshortening factor-it is the ratio of the projected length of a line to its true length
Types of axonometric projections —
1.Trimetric
2.Dimetric
3.Isometric
Trimetric projection is the least restrictive and isometric projection is the most restrictive
Trimetric Projection — A trimetric projection is formed by arbitrary rotations in arbitrary order, about a
axes, followed by parallel projection on to the z=0 plane. The wide variety of trimetric projections preclu
equation for these ratios
For any specific trimetric projection, the foreshortening ratios are obtained by applying transformation m
along the principal axis specifically,

114
where [U] is the matrix of unit vectors along the untransformed x, y and z axes respectively, and [T] is th
projection matrix. The foreshortening factors along the projected principal axes are then

2.15 OBLIQUE PROJECTION

oblique projections illustrate the general 3 dimensional shape of the object. However
only faces of the object parallel to the plane of projection are shown at there true
size and shape, that is angles and lengths are preserved for these faces only. In
fact ,the oblique projection of these faces is equivalent to an orthographic front view.

TYPES OF OBLIQUE PROJECTIONS

1.Cavalier

2.Cabinet

Cavalier Projection-A cavalier projection is obtained when the angle between

oblique projectors and the plane of projection is 45 degree. In a cavalier projection
the foreshortening factors for all three principal direction are equal. The resulting
figure appears too thick. A cabinet projection is used to correct this deficiency.

115
Cabinet projection- An oblique projection for which the foreshortening factor for
edges perpendicular to the plane of projection is one half is called a cabinet
projection.

2.16 STANDARD PERSPECTIVE PROJECTION

A perspective transformation is the transformation from one three space in to another three space.
transformation , in perspective transformations parallel lines converge, object size is reduced with i
the center of projection, and non uniform foreshortening of lines in the object as a function of orien
the object from the center of projection occurs. All of these effects laid the depth perception of the
the shape of the object is not preserved. Perspective drawings are characterized by perspective for
points .Perspective foreshortening is the illusion that object and lengths appear smaller as there dis
projection increases. The illusion that certain sets of parallel lines appear to meet at a point is anot
drawings. These points are called vanishing points .Principal vanishing points are formed by the app
parallel to one of the three x,y or z axis. The number of principal vanishing points is determined by
axes interested by the view plane

Perspective Anomalies

1.Perspective foreshortening- The farther an object is from the center of projection ,the smaller

2.vanishing Points- Projections of lines that are not parallel to the view plane (i.e. lines that are n
view plane normal) appear to meet at some point on the view plane. This point is called the vanish
corresponds to every set of parallel lines. Vanishing points corresponding to the three principle dire
“Principle Vanishing Points (PVPs)”. We can thus have at most three PVPs. If one or more of these a
parallel lines in that direction continue to appear parallel on the projection plane), we get 1 or 2 PV

116
Transformation Matrix for Standard Perspective Projection
 
 
View plane at

or

117
 
Similarly,

 
 

QUESTIONS

1. Explain the database structure for graphics modeling.

2. Explain the 2D transformation.
3. Write in detail about hidden surface removal.
4. Explain the 3D transformation

118
 UNIT-III

GEOMETRIC MODELING

{CURVES &SURFACES}

119
 CURVES
3.0 INTRODUCTION

A curve segment is a point bounded collection of points whose coordinates are given
by continuous, one-parameter, single-valued mathematical functions of the form.

X = x(u)      y = y(u)     z = z(u)

The parametric value of u is constrained to the interval u Є [0,1]. The curve is
bounded between two points at u=0 and the other at u=1.

Any point on the curve can be treated as a component of vector p(u). This p(u) is
u
the vector to the point x(u), y(u), z(u) and p (u) is the tangent vector to the curve
at the same point.

Here

vector components are:

and the tangent vector is:

A simple example of parametric equation of a curve would be a set of linear

parametric equations above is gives a straight line starting at Point p(0) = [a b c]
and ending at point p(1) = [(a + l) (b + m) (c + n)] where a, b, c and l, m, n are
constants. The direction cosines of the line would be proportional to l, m, n.

120
3.1 GEOMETRIC CONTINUITY CONDITIONS

An alternate method for joining two successive curve sections is to specify conditions for
geometric continuity. In This case, we only require parametric derivatives of the two
sections to be proportional to each other at their common boundary instead of equal to
each other.
Zero- order geometric continuity, described as G0 continuity, is the same as zero- order
parametric continuity. That is, the two curves sections must have the same coordinate
position at the boundary point. First order geometric continuity, or G1 continuity,
means that the parametric first derivatives are proportional at the intersection on two
successive sections. If we denote the parametric position on the curve as P(u), the
direction of the tangent vector P’(u), but not necessarily its magnitude, will be the same
for two successive curve sections at their joining point under G1 continuity. Second-
order geometric continuity, or G2 continuity, means that both the first and second
parametric derivatives of the two curve sections are proportional at their boundary. Under
G2 continuity, curvatures of two curve sections will match at the joining position.

A curve generated with geometric continuity conditions is similar to one generated with
parametric continuity, but with slight differences in curve shape. Figure below provides a
comparison of geometric and parametric continuity. With geometric continuity, the curve
is pulled toward the section with the greater tangent vector.

Figure3.1: Curves with C1 continuity

Figure 3.2: Curves with  C1 continuity

121
3.2 SPLINE SPECIFICATIONS

There are three equivalent methods for specifying a particular spline representation: (1)
We van state the set of boundary conditions that are imposed on the spline; or (2) we can
state the matrix that characterizes the spline; or (3) we can state the set of blending
functions (or basis functions) that determine how specified geometric constraints on the
curve are calculate positions along the curve path.
To illustrate these three equivalent specifications, suppose we have the following
parametric cubic polynomial representation for the x coordinate along the path of a cubic
spline section:

Boundary conditions for this curve might be set, for example, on the endpoint coordinates
x(0)and x(1) and on the parametric first derivatives at the endpoints x’(0) and x’(1).
These four boundary conditions are sufficient to determine the values of the four
coefficients ax,bx,cx and dx.

From the boundary conditions, we can obtain the matrix that characterizes this spline
curve by first rewriting Eq. above as the matrix product.

Where U is the row matrix of powers of parameter u, and C is the coefficient column
matrix. If x(0), x(1), x’(0) and x’(1) are known using the equation above we can right the
boundary conditions in matrix form and solve for the coefficient matrix C as

122
 

Where is a four-element column matrix containing the geometric constraint

values (boundary conditions) on the spline

and C is the 4-by-4 matrix of the polynomial coefficients given by

and M is the matrix of the coefficients in the equation.

The equation x=UC can now be rewritten as follows:

or as

Finally, we can expand equation above to obtain a polynomial representation for

coordinate x in terms of the geometric constraint parameters

where gk are the constraint parameters, such as the control-point coordinates and slope of
the curve at the control points, and BFk(u) are the polynomial blending functions. These
blending functions can be written in a matrix form as

where Mblend is the set of coefficients of these blending functions. The curve equation can
then be expressed as

 where B is the matrix of the input points.

In the following sections, we discuss some commonly used splines and their matrix and
blending-function specifications.

123
3.3 ALGEBRAIC AND GEOMETRIC FORMS

The Algebraic form of a parametric cubic (pc) curve segment is given by the
following three polynomials

A set of 12 constant coefficients are called algebraic coefficients. Each unique set
of algebraic coefficient determines a unique pc curve. If two similar curves occupy
different positions in space then their algebraic coefficients are different.
The same set of polynomial equation can be written in a compact for as given below:

.......................................................(1.1)

here p(u) is the position vector of any point on the curve, and a0, a1, a2, a3 are the
vector equivalents of the scalar algebraic coefficients. Again the restriction on the
parametric variable u is expressed as u Є [0,1].
The geometric form of a pc curve is more convenient way of controlling the shape of
a curve in typical modeling situations. For a space curve there are several conditions
to choose from: end points coordinates, tangents, curvature, torsion, plus any
number of conditions dependent on higher order derivatives.
Therefore by using the equation 1.1 we get:

Where p(0) and p(1) are simply calculated by substituting u with 0 and 1
u u
respectively and p (0) and p (1) are calculated by differentiating p(u) with respect
to u.
By solving this set of four equations, we can define the algebraic coefficients in terms
of the boundary conditions.

124
On substituting their value in equation 1.1 we get

From the above equation we obtain:

Thus equation 1.2 can be written as:

On dropping the function notation the final equation would look like:

This is the geometric form, and are called geometric coefficients. The F terms are
blending functions.
 This can be written in the “Standard Geometric Form” as
 This form is also the same as the Hermite Splines.

3.4 CUBIC SPLINE INTERPOLATION METHODS

This class of spline is most often used to set up paths for object motions or to provide a
representation for an existing object or drawing, but interpolation splines are also used
sometimes to design object shapes. Cubic polynomials offer a reasonable compromise
between flexibility and speed of computation. Compared to higher – order polynomials,
cubic splines require less calculations and memory and they are more stable. Compared
to lower-order polynomials, cubic splines are more flexible for modeling arbitrary curve
shapes.
Given a set of control points, cubic interpolation splines are obtained by fitting the input
points with a piecewise cubic polynomial curve that passes through every control point.
Suppose we have n+1 control points specified with coordinates

A cubic interpolation fit of these points is illustrated in figure below. We can describe the
parametric cubic polynomial that is to be fitted between each pair of control points with
the following set of equations:

125
For each of these three equations, we need to determine the values of the four coefficients
a, b, c, and d in the polynomial representation for each of the n curve sections between
the n+1 control points. We do this by setting enough boundary conditions at the “joints”
between curves sections so that we can obtain numerical values for all the coefficients. In
the following sections, we discuss common methods for setting the boundary conditions
for cubic interpolation splines.

Figure 3.3 Cubic spline interpolations

3.5 REPRESENTATION OF CURVES AND SURFACES

A curve or a surface may be described or represented by a set of equations. These
equations can be categorized into two forms:
i. Generic form
The generic form in which any generic point (x, y, z) satisfies a relationship in
implicit form in x, y, and z i.e. f(x, y, z) = 0. A single such constraint generally
describes a surface while two constraints considered together can be thought of
as a curve which is the intersection of two surfaces. This may be expressed in an
explicit form in the following manner:
x = g1(y, z)
y = g2(x, z)

z = g3(x, y)

ii. Parametric form

A parametric curve is one whose defining equations are in terms of a simple,
common independent variable known as parametric variable.
In the parametric form, the representation is done by a set of functions. A curve may
be represented by

x = x (u)
y = y (u)

126
 z = z (u)

where x, y, z are co-ordinates of the points on the curve which are functions of some
parameter u and the parametric variable is constrained in the interval. For example,
a point (x, y) is located at an angle θ from +X axis on a circle with centre at (0, 0)
and radius
= 1 can be described in parametric form as:
x = Cos θ
y = Sin θ

where θ is the parameter. Surfaces are described similarly for which x, y and z are
functions two independent parameters u and v. Parametric design is very popular in
computer aided design for a variety of reasons, which are listed below:
• Separation of variables
• Each variable is treated alike
• More degrees of freedom/control
• Parametric equations can be transformed directly
• Infinite slopes can be handled without computational breakdown
• Easy to express as vectors
• Amenable to plotting and digitizing
• Inherently bounded

3.6 DESIGN OF CURVED SHAPES

Design of curved shapes should satisfy the following requirements:
i. It should be possible to represent the shape mathematically.
ii. The modeling should involve minimum computation.

iii. It should be possible to generate a CNC program to machine the surfaces (2,
3, 4 and 5 axis machining) or to prepare a mould or die to make the part (as
in plastic injection molding or casting or automobile panel pressing).

A component can be designed using the curves and shapes which can be
mathematically described e.g. arc, circle, conics, ellipsoid, hyperbolic paraboloid,
sphere, and cone, cylinder, linear, conical — and circular swept surfaces etc.
However very often the designer starts with specifying a few points which roughly
describe the shape.
Two approaches are available to designers to model curves and surfaces in such
cases: interpolation and approximation. The interpolation essentially tries to pass a
curve on a surface called interpolant through all these points. Approximation tries to
fit a smoother curve on surface which may be close to these points but may not
actually pass through each of them. Fig. 3.4 illustrates the difference between
interpolation (a) and approximation (b).

127
 IN TE R PO LATIO N

A PPR O XIM ATION

Fig. 3.4 Interpolation and Approximation

One of the popular methods of interpolation is to use the Lagrange polynomial, which
is the unique polynomial of degree n passing through n + 1 points. However, Lagrange
polynomial is unsuitable in modeling of curves because of:
i. Large number of computations involved and
ii. Tendency for the curve to oscillate between data points when the data points are
large.
=
Another approach is to look for a polynomial of fewer degrees than W passing
through these W + 1 data points. This is done by combining polynomials of lesser degree
passing through several consecutive data points and smoothly piecing several such curve
segments together by blending. In general, the modeling of curves is done to satisfy the
following:
Axis independence
Global and local control

Smoothness of curves

Versatility

Continuity between adjoining segments of curve.

3.7 HERMITE CUBIC SPLINE

Splines are functions that are used for fitting a curve through a number of data points. A

128
cubic spline has the property that the three co-ordinate functions x (u), y (u), and z (u) are
each cubic polynomials in the variable u:
x (u) = a u3 + b u2 + c u + d
y (u) = e u3 + f u2 + g u + h
z (u) = j u3 + k u2 + l u + m

Whereas parametric curves are generally considered to be defined over an infinite

range of parameter values of u, it is always necessary to limit these to a finite interval
when modeling shapes on a computer. The domain u is, therefore taken as 0 < u < = 1 in
the discussion that follows:
A spline passes through two end points and satisfies differentiality condition at these
end points. These four conditions require a polynomial degree of at least 3. The
derivations of cubic splines for x, y and z are similar. The difference will be only in the
end point co-ordinates and derivatives at the end points. Therefore only the derivation of
x(u) is considered here.

Let x(0), x(1), x’(0) and x’(1) are the end points and the derivatives at the end points
respectively.
Since x(u) = au3 + bu2 + cu + d, we get
x (0) = d
x (1) = a + b + c + d
x’(0) = c
x’(1) = 3a + 2b + c
The above equations can be solved to obtain the four equations given below:
a = 2X(0) – 2X(1) + X’(0) + X’(1)
b = –3X(0) + 3X(1) – 2X’(0) – X’(1)

X’(0
c = )
d = X(0)
(or)

a 2 −2 1 −1 x(0)
x(1
b −3 3 −2 −1 )
c = 0 0 1 0 x’(0)
x’(1
d 1 0 0 0 )

The coefficients of cubic spline polynomials y(u) and z(u) are similarly obtained by
replacing x data by y and z data.

129
 In a vectorial form the parametric cubic curve can be expressed as:
P(u) = au3 + bu2 + cu + d
where u∈ (0,1)
P(u) = [u3 u2 u 1] [ a b c d]T
u 1] and A = [a b c
Let U = [u u d]T
3 2

P = UA

Curves are defined by interpolating points and tangents at these points. The
parametric cubic curve can be designed using the four vectors P(0), P(1), P’(0) and P’(1).
Each one of these vectors has three components.
P0 = d
P1 = a + b + c + d
P’(0) = c
P’(1) = 3a + 2b + c
P = (2u3 –3u2 + 1)P0+ (–2u3 + 3u2 )P1+ (u3– 2u2+u) P’0+ (u3– u2)
P’1 Let F1 = 2u3 – 3u2 + 1
F2 = -2u3 + 3u2
F3 = u3 – 2u2 + u
F4 = u3 – u2
then P = F1 P0 + F2 P1 + F3 P’ + F4 P’
Let F = [ F1 F2 F3 F4 ] and B = [ P0 P1 P’0
P’1] then P = F B
F1 , F2 , F3 , F4 , are called blending function or Hermite polynomial basis functions. B
is the matrix of geometric coefficients. F is the blending function matrix. The blending
function matrix F can be written as the product of two matrices.
F = UM
Where

2 −2 1 1
−3 3 −2 −1

M = 0 0 1 0

1 0 0 0

where M is called universal transformation matrix.

UM
Therefore P =B
P = UA
Hence A = MB

130
 and conversely
B = M–1 A

Where
0 0 0 1
1 1 1 1
–1
M = 0 0 1 0

3 2 1 0
For a given set of end points P 0 and P1 and slopes P’0 and P’1 several sets of curves
can be generated by varying the magnitude of the tangent vectors. (unit tangent vector t =
Pu / |Pu| ).
Figure 6.28 shows a cubic spline connecting four points. There are several other
formulations of cubic splines. Ferguson used cubic polynomials for curve and surface
design in aircrafts. However, these methods generally suffer from the fact that they do not
allow the user to change the smoothness of the curve.

X’(0)

X(0)
X(1)

X’(1)
Fig. 3.5 Cubic Spline

131
3.8 BEZIER CURVES
Bezier curves, developed by P.Bezier at Ranault Automobile Company and P. de
Casteljau at Citreon, France are used for curve and surface design of automobile panels.
A Bezier curve is blended at the joints and is completely defined by four consecutive
points (X0, Y0), (X1,y1), (X2,Y2), (X3,Y3). The curve passes only through the first and
fourth point. The two intermediate points are used to define the slope of the curve at the
end points. If X0, X1, X2 and X3 are the X- co-ordinates of the control points, it is
assumed that :
i. The curve passes through the end points X0 and X3
ii. The slope at the points are:

X’(0) = 3(X1 – X0)

X’(1) = 3(X3– X2)

Using these properties, the coefficients of Bezier curve for x term can be expressed as
:
a −1 3 −3 1 LX0O
MX1 P
b 3 −6 3 0 M P
c = −3 3 0 0 MX2P
M P
d 1 0 0 0 NX3Q
The cubic polynomial x(t) in the Bezier form can be expressed as :

−1 3 −3 1 LX0O
M P
3 −6 3 0 MX1P
xt = (u 3 u 2 u1 ) −3 3 0 0 MX2P
 M P
X3
1 0 0 0 N Q
The advantages of Bezier curve over cubic spline is that the direction of the curve at
the joints can be defined and changed simply by specifying the position of the second and
third data points. Changing a control point not only affects the shape of the curve near the
control point but has an influence throughout the curve. This lack of local control is a
major weakness of Bezier curve. Fig. 3.6 shows Bezier cubic segments for two sets of
values of X.

132
 X3 X
X1 2

X
X1 4
X1
X4

X3
Fig. 3.6 Bezier Curve

The Bezier cubic segment discussed above is a special case of the more general
Bezier polynomial curve segment
3
u
P  = ∑Pi , Bi ,3( u)
i0

where u ∈ [0,1]
With blending functions: Bi,n (u) = C(n,i) ui (1 –
u)n-I where n is the binomial coefficient
n! ( n
C n i ,= −1)!
I!
and p(u) are the control points and there are n+1 of them defining the vertices of the
characteristic polygon.

3.9 β-SPLINES
This form of cubic segments uses a third set of basis functions different from the types
discussed earlier. A cubic β-spline curve is a special case of spline curve. The equation
for this curve can be written as:
n

P (u) = ∑ P I N I, k (u)
i=1

u ∈ [0, (n– k + 2)]

This generates what is known as piecewise polynomial. The N(u) blending functions
are defined recursively as :
N (u) = 1 if ti < u < ti+1
= 0 otherwise
N u  = u —tN , K u  t — uN , K u

133
  
t1 —t t1 —t
The resulting parametric polynomials are of degree (k — 1). The t are called knot
values. For an open curve there are
ti = 0 if I < k
I ∈ [0, n +
ti = I – k +1 if k ≤ I ≤ n k]
ti = n – k + 2 if I > n
The blending functions confine the effects of a control point movement to the
immediate locale. Thus the curve change shape is local and not global as it is for Bezier
curves.
x
1 4 1 0 i−2
x
−3 0 3 0 i−1
2 3
x(u) = (1 u u u ) 1/6 3 −6 3 0 xi
x
−1 3 −3 1 i1

When the control points are distinct, this curve is continuous in slope and in curvature
between successive segments but it does not pass through any of the intermediate control
points. The cubic β-spline has the advantage that the control points may be moved
without affecting slope and curvature continuity and only four spans of the overall curve
will be affected by the change. Moreover, by allowing two control points to coincide it is
possible to create a curvature discontinuity. A slope discontinuity, similarly, can be
introduced by choosing three successive control points to be coincident.
It is possible to represent complex curve shapes by considering composite curves
constructed from individual segments, in the case of cubic spline, Bezier and B-spline
techniques.

134
3.10 NURBS AND β-SPLINES
Two important surface representation schemes exist that extend the control of shape
beyond movement of control vertices. These are NURBS (Non Uniform Rational β-
Splines) and β-splines. In the case of NURBS a local vertex is extended to a four
dimensional co-ordinate, the extra parameter being a weight that allows a subtle form of
control which is different in effect to moving a control vertex. In the simplest form of β-
spline control two global parameters (bias and tension) are introduced which affect the
whole curve.

3.10.1 NURBS
A non-uniform β-spline curve is defined on a knot vector where the interior knot spans
are not equal. A rational β-spline is defined by a set of four dimensional control points.
P = (Wi Xi , Wi Yi , Wi Zi , Wi )
The perspective map of such a curve in three dimensional space is called a rational β-
spline curve.
N w
[ PN ( u)]
P(u) = H ∑ i I , k
i0

n
P(u) = H ∑ i
P W N I, K u 
i0

n n u 
= ∑P W i i,K u  ∑W i,K
i0 i0

PR u
= ∑ n
i i, K  
i 0

Wi associated with each control point is called a weight and can be viewed as an z = Z (u, v)
extra shape parameter. Wi affects the curve only locally and can be interpreted
geometrically as a coupling factor. The curve is pulled towards a control point if W wh
increases. ere
X,
3.10.2 β- SPLINES
Y
β- splines are obtained from β-splines by introducing two new degrees of freedom:
an
bias and tension. These can be applied uniformly or non-uniformly.
d
Z
3.11 REPRESENTATION OF SURFACES are
sui
A surface can be defined as the locus of points which satisfy a constraint equation in tab
the form of F(X, Y, Z) = 0. In parametric form a surface may be represented as le
x = X (u, v) fu
y = Y (u, v) nct
io

135
ns of two parameters u and v. For example, the parametric representation of the
surface of a sphere whose centre is at the origin of co-ordinates and of radius R is
= R sin φ cos
x = X ( φ) θ
= R sin φ sin
y = Y ( φ) θ
z = Z ( φ) = R cos φ

3.12 DESIGN OF SURFACES

The design of surfaces may be based on quadrics like ellipsoid, hyperboloid, cone,
hyperbolic cylinder, parabolic cylinder, elliptic cylinder and elliptic paraboloid. A
surface may be generated by sweeping a pattern curve along a spline curve. The
swept surface may also be linear, conical linear or circular swept surface.

3.13 PARAMETRIC DESIGN OF SURFACES

Parametric surfaces may be defined in one of the following methods:
i. In terms of points of data (positions, tangents, normals)
ii. In terms of data on a number of space curves lying in these surfaces.

Array of data points which may be regarded as defining a series of curves in one
parameter direction which in turn are interpolated or approximated in the direction of the
other parameter to generate the surface. Fig. 3.7 shows the parameter curves on a surface
patch defined by a rectangular array of data points.

136
 Fig 3.7 A Surface Patch

3.14 BICUBIC POLYNOMIAL SURFACE PATCHES

A bicubic polynomial surface can be represented in the form:

v
!
r = uu u aij
v

where aij (I, j = 0, 1, 2, 3) is the 4×4 matrix of vector

coefficients. A general representation of bicubic surface patch
is:
r = R (u, v) = U M A M VT
Where M is the basis matrix
U = [1 u u2 u3]
a
A = ij

137
 V = [1 v v2 v3]
For Coon’s patch, the basis function M is identical to that of cubic spline segment.

1 0 0 0
0 1 0 0
M = −3 3 − 2 −1

2 −2 1 1

The vector coefficients for Coon’s patches are given by

R(0,0) R(0,1) R(0,0) R(0,1)

A = R(1,0) R(1,1) R(1,0) R(1,1)

R(0,0) R(0,1) R(0,0) R(0,1)

R(1,0) R(1,1) R(1,1) R(1,1)

The position and derivative data on two adjacent corners effectively define not only
the edge curve which joins them but also the cross slope at each point on the edge. This
makes it possible to combine two or more patches with continuity of position and slope.

3.15 BEZIER BICUBIC SURFACE PATCHES

The Bezier bicubic surface patch uses the basis matrix:

1 0 0 0
−3 3 0 0
M = −3 6 3 0

−1 3 −1 1
The vector coefficients are given by a 4 × 4 matrix of position vectors for sixteen
points forming a characteristic polyhedron. Fig. 6.31 shows the characteristic polyhedron
for a Bezier surface. The four corner points R (0,0), R (3,0), R (3,3) and R (0,3) lie at the
corners of the surface patch itself whereas remaining points do not lie on the patch. The
four points along each edge of the polyhedron define the four edge curves of the patch.
The four interior points determine the cross derivatives at the corner and cross slopes
along the nearest edges to them.

138
3.16 CUBIC B-SPLINE SURFACES
The basis function for a cubic B-spline surface is the same as that of cubic B-spline curve.
As in the case of B-spline curve, none of the control points forming the characteristic
polyhedron lies on the surface.
Composite surfaces can be obtained by combining several surface patches. Table 3.1
gives the properties of the surfaces generated by the common methods.

Table 3.1 Properties of Surfaces Created by Different Methods

Method Property

Coon’s patch Slope and position continuity

Bezier Bicubic patch Position continuity
Uniform B-spline Second order continuity

The surfaces patches described above cover a rectangular domain in u-v space. There
are also methods proposed for interpolation on triangular and pentagonal domains.

3.17 SURFACE MODELING IN COMMERCIAL DRAFTING AND

MODELING SOFTWARE
Surface types available for geometric modeling range from simple planes to complex
sculptured surfaces. These surfaces are usually represented on the workstation terminal
as a set of ruled lines. However, computer recognizes these lines as continuous
surfaces. Users select surface types from a menu to model individual details or fully
envelope parts. Some of the features of surface modeling packages are given below:

139
 3) SURFACE MODELING COMMANDS
There are a number of commands to create a surface model
i. 3-D face: The different faces of an object can be modeled using this command.
The X,Y,Z co-ordinates of each vertex are input one after another to model a face
and each of the faces is defined one after another in this manner.
ii. P face: The P-face command produces a general polygon mesh of a arbitrary
topology. Using this command, it is possible to avoid defining a single vertex
several times as is done in 3-D face command. The user defines all vertices and
then defines the faces in terms of the vertices.

iii. Rulesurf: This command creates a polygon representing the ruled surface between
two curves. Figure 3.8 shows an example of ruled surfaces.

Fig3.8 Ruled Surface

iv. Tabsurf: A polygon mesh representing general tabulated mesh defined by a path
curve and a direction vector (generatrix) is created by this command. Fig. 3.9
shows a typical surface created by this command.

Fig. 3.9 Examples of Tabulated Surface

140
 v. Revsurf: A surface of revolution is created by rotating a path curve or profile
about an axis. The rotation can be through 360 degrees or part of it.
vi. Edgesurf: This command constructs a Coon’s surface patch using four adjoining
curved edges, an example of edgesurf commands is shown in Fig3.10.

Fig. 3.10 Example of Edge Surface

3.17.2 SURFACE MODELING FACILITIES AVAILABLE IN AN ADVANCED MODELER

An advanced surface modeler helps to design complex sculptured surfaces easily. They
provide a number of tools for model creation, shape control and visualization.
i. Model creation features for curves and surfaces:
• Accurate fitting of unevenly spaced points
• Control over tangency, curvature and inflection
• Capability of one surface on to another
• Projection of one surface on to another
• Offset curves
• Planar and ruled surfaces
• Surfaces of revolution
• Lofting
• Sweeping
• Blending
• Surface created from 3-D digitized points
• Interpolation of surfaces
• Offset surfaces
• Split and merging of surfaces

141
 4) Shape control of surfaces:
Advanced surface modeling softwares make it easy to effect changes in design
and shape. They provide what is called variational constraint based shape control.
Shape control can be effected through dimensional or geometric constraints and
can have tangent associativity. Surface can also be controlled by equations.
Advanced energy based shape control helps to:
• fair curves
• achieve higher order edge/tangency control

• introduce local bulges or inflections

• shape curves locally to fit a specific point

iii. Visualization:
Surface models have visualization tools for shading, hidden line elimination,
creation of perspective views and evaluated surface displays.

5) UNDERSTANDING CURVE AND SURFACE DESIGN

Judicious design of curves and surfaces will make a product visually pleasing. The
interactive approach for the design of curves and surfaces is briefly described below:

3.18.1 DESIGN OF CURVES

A curve is drawn through two or more defining points called control points. Every point
on a curve has a position, (X, Y and Z co-ordinates), a tangent and a curvature. The
tangent determines the direction of the curve at any given point. The internal points their
tangents are created and maintained by the design software.
In Fig3.11 a curve is shown to be created using the defining points 1, 2, 3 and 4. The
curve passes through the end points 1 and 4 and the direction of the curve and shape of
the curve are decided by the tangents and the position of control points 2 and 3. By
changing the position of control points, the shape can be changed interactively. The
curvature at each point is a measure of how rapidly the curve is changing the direction.
General curves have a different curvature value at every point. A curvature plot can be
used to evaluate a curve. Fig. 3.12 shows a curvature plot.

142
 2
END POINT 2 TANGENT @ 2

END POINT 1 4

TANGENT @ 1
3

Fig3.11 Curve Design

C urve

R egion of low
C urvature
R egion of high
C urvature

Fig. 3.12 Curvature Plot

A complex curve required for a product design is usually a continuous combination of

several curve segments. There are three measures of curve continuity. The terms C 0, C1
and C2 continuity levels are used to describe how curves relate to each other. C 0
continuity occurs when two C1 curves meet at their end points but may not share same
tangency or curvature. C1 continuity occurs when two curves have the same tangent at the
matched end points. C2 continuity is obtained when two C1 curves have the same
curvature at the end point i.e. they have a smooth transition from one curve to another.
Fig. 3.13 shows examples for C0,C1 and C2 continuity.
TANGENT
TOCURVE1
TANGENTTO CURVE2
0
CURVE2 M E E T IN G C C o n tin u ity
P O IN T

CURVE1

M E E T IN G
CURVE1 P O IN T
CURVE2
1
C C o n tin u ity

M E E T IN G
P O IN T

2
C C o n tin u ity

Fig. 3.13 C0, C1 and C2 Continuity

143
3.18.2 SURFACES
Aesthetic curves are the building blocks for pleasing surfaces which are the key to create
good products. The curves that define a surface are called boundary curves. While
creating surfaces, surface singularities must be avoided. Fig. 3.14 shows how singularity
was avoided by over building the top surface and trimming it with a curve on surface.
Avoidance of singularity is important to create a surface design which has good
manufacturability.
S IN G U L A R
P O IN T

S u rfa c e w ith a S in g u la r p o in t r e m o v e d w ith

s in g u la r p o in t c u r v e o n s u rfa c e a n d
trim m in g a fte rw a r d s

Fig. 3.14 Avoiding Singularity

Surfaces have two sides -—inside as well as outside. Surface normals are
helpful to clearly distinguish the orientation of the surfaces. There can be different
surface types:
i. Rectangular: This type of surface is characterized by four boundary curves.
(Fig. 3.15)

Fig. 3.15 Rectangular Surface

144
 iriangular: A surface defined by three boundary curves (Fig. 3.16)
6)

Fig. 3.16 Triangular Surface

i-sided: The surface defined by an arbitrary number of curves (Fig. 3.17)

7)
edge 1

edge 5
edge 2

edge 4

edge 3

Fig. 3.17 N-sided Surface

iv. Sweep: A surface defined by moving a set of profile curves smoothly along one or
two guide curves (Fig. 3.18)

PR O FILE C U R VE

PA TH C U R VE
PA TH C U R VE 1
PR O FILE C U R VE
PA TH C U R VE 2

Fig. 3.18 Sweep Surface

145
 vadius fillet: A blend surface between two sets of surfaces (Fig. 3.19)
8)

F IL L E T

Fig. 3.19 Fillet Surface

BLEND CURVE 1

BLEND
CURVE 2
BLEND

Fig. 3.20 Blend

vi. Blend: This is a special form of sweep. The guide curves are two curves on
surface. The blend allows user to blend the surfaces together or make a
variable fillet from their defined curves. This type of fillet (Fig. 3.20)needs a
curve on each surface for construction.
vii. Offset: An offset surface is created by offsetting a surface at a distance from
an existing surface. (Fig. 3.21)
OFFSET

OFFSET SURFACE

ORIGINAL SURFACE

Fig. 3.21 Offset Surface

146
3.18.3 EXAMPLES OF OPERATIONS ON SURFACES
Creating a model requires facilities for local modification of surfaces. These facilities are
described in the following section:
i. Trimming surfaces
A trim is a portion of a surface that can have different attributes. A trimmed
surface can be created from an existing surface by specifying a set of curves that
partition the original surfaces. Fig. 3.22 shows a trimming operation on a surface.
CURVEONSURFACE CURVEONSURFACE

Fig. 3.22 Trimming

9)ilending two surfaces

It is often necessary to blend two curved surface. An example is illustrated in Fig.
3.23.
a. Create a surface (shown with patches).
b. Create a curve outline using curve on surface (COS) tool.

c. Project the curve on to the surface and trim the surface.

d. Create one more cross sectional curve for the flare.

e. Create the flare surface.

f. Blend the two surfaces.

BLEND

Fig. 3.23 Flare

147
 iii. Creating a lens hollow on a camera surface
Figure 3.24 shows the surface camera body. It is desired to create a lens hollow.
This requires the creation of surfaces that blend smoothly from the main body of
the camera into the lens aperture. This can be achieved by creating four curves.
An ellipse represents the outer surface of the lens hollow. A circle is to define the
geometry of the lens holder. The shape of the connecting surface is defined by
two hollow curves. The ellipse and the circle are split at four points. Curves are
created the joining the four points on the ellipse and the circle. The tangents are
adjusted to make the curves meet the circle and ellipse smoothly. A smooth
surface is then created using surface tools.

Hollow
Curve

Fig. 3.24 Creation of a Lens Hollow on a Camera Body

iv. Creating a insert for view finder

A cut out on the camera surface is to be created to locate the view finder. Fig.
3.25 shows the camera body. The cut out is created by a curve on surface
(COS) tool.

C u rv e o n s u rfa c e

Fig. 3.25 Creating a Cut Out Using a Curve on Surface Tool

148
3.18.4 CURVE ON SURFACE (Fig3.26)
Curve on a surface (COS) is a special kind of curve. This can be defined by a set of
points which are constrained to lie on a surface. COS are very useful in conceptual design
because of their use in trimming a surface to blend it with another surface. A COS can be
created by:
Projecting a curve on to a surface.
Cutting a planar section through a surface.
Specifying points on a surface through which the curve has to pass through.

Curveon
s u r fa c e

Fig. 3.26 Curve on Surface

3.18.5 MEASURES OF SMOOTHNESS OF SURFACES

As in the case of curves, smoothness of the boundaries of two surfaces can be ensured by
three parameters:
• C0 continuity means that two surfaces share a common boundary.
• C1 continuity. In this case the two surfaces blend tangentially across the shared
boundary curve.

• C2 continuity ensures that the boundary of two surfaces have a curvature

continuity in addition to position and tangent continuity.
F
ig. 6.53 illustrates the three measures of continuity of surfaces. It can be seen that C2
continuity condition yields smoother surfaces.

Fig. 3.27 (Contd.)

149
 Fig. 3.28 Smoothness of Surfaces

3THER FEATURES USEFUL FOR CONCEPTUAL DESIGN

10)
In addition to the sketching facilities, additional features are available to enhance design
capabilities:

6
i. Photo rendering -—Rendering facilitates the evaluation of the model and better
communication of design ideas,
ii. Surfaces can be evaluated by accurate reflections, highlights and shadows.
Materials can be applied in the rendering process. Material properties usually
available include transparency, brightness and intensity as well as the basic color
definition of hue, saturation and brightness.

3.20 DATA TRANSFER TO OTHER SOFTWARES

Once the conceptual design is completed, model data can be transferred to other design
softwares directly or using neutral files. Many CAID packages provide direct translators to
CAD packages like CATIA, Unigraphics, I-DEAS etc.

3.21 BEZIER SURFACES

Two set of orthogonal Bezier curves can be used to design an object surface by specifying by an
input mesh of control points. The parametric vector function for the Bezier surface is formed as the
Cartesian product of Bezier blending functions:

with Pj,k specifying the location of a point in the array of (m +1) by (n + 1) control points.
Figure 3.29 below illustrates two Bezier surface plots. The control points are connected by dashed
lines, and the solid lines show curves of constant u and constant . Each curve of constant u is
plotted by varying over the interval from 0 to 1, with u fixed at one of the values in this unit
interval. Curves of
constant are plotted similarly.

150
.

Figure 3.29: Bezier surfaces

Bezier surfaces have the same properties as Bezier curves, and they provide a convenient method
for interactive design applications. For each surface patch, we can select a mesh of control points
in the xy “ground” plane, then we choose elevations above the ground plane for the z-coordinate
values of the control points. Patches can then be pieced together using the boundary constraints.

Figure 2 below illustrates a surface formed with two Bezier sections. As with curves, a smooth
transition from one section to the other is assured by establishing both zero and first order
continuity. Zero-order continuity is obtained by matching control points at the boundary. First-
order continuity is obtained by choosing control points along a straight line across the boundary
and by maintaining a constant ratio of collinear line segments for each set of specified control
points across section boundaries.

Figure 3.30: Two adjacent Bezier patches with C1 continuity

151
3.22 B-SPLINE SURFACES

Formulation of a B-spline surface is similar to that for B-splines. We can obtain a vector point
function over a B-spline surface using the Cartesian product of B-spline blending functions in the
form

where vector values for pk1,k2 specify positions of (n1 + 1) by (n2 + 1) control points.

B-Spline surfaces exhibit the same properties as those of their component B-spline curves. A
surface can be constructed from selected values for parameters d1 and d2 (which determine the
polynomial degrees to be used) and from the specified knot vectors in the two directions.

3.23 QUADRIC SURFACES

A frequently used class of objects is the quadric surfaces,

which are described with second -—degree equations (quadratics). They include spheres,
ellipsoids, tori, paraboloids, and hyperboloids. Quadric surfaces, particularly spheres and
ellipsoids, are common elements of graphics scenes, and they are often available in graphics
packages as primitives from which more complex objects can be constructed.

Sphere
In Cartesian coordinates, a spherical surface with radius r centered on the coordinate origin is
defined as the set of points (x, y, z) that satisfy the equation

We can also describe the spherical surface in parametric form, using latitude and longitude
angles Figure below:

152
 The parametric representation in Equ. Below provide a symmetric range for the angular
parameters and alternatively, we could write the parametric equations using standard
spherical coordinates, where angle is specified as the colatitudes fig. below. Then is
defined over the range , and is often taken in the range . We could
also set up the representation using parameters u and v defined over the range from 0 to 1 by
substituting and .

Ellipsoid
An ellipsoidal surface can be described as an extension of a spherical surface where the radii
in three mutually perpendicular directions can have different values fig. below. The Cartesian
representation for points over the surface of an ellipsoid centered on the origin is

And a parametric representation for the ellipsoid in terms of the latitude angle and the
longitude angle in fig. below

153
 Torus
A torus is a doughnut-shaped object, as shown in fig. below. It can be generated by rotating a
circle or other conic about a specified axis. The Cartesian representation for points over the
surface of a torus can be written in the form.

Where r is any given offset value. Parametric representations for a torus are similar to those
for an ellipse, except that angle extends over 3600.using latitude and longitude angles
and , we can describe the torus surface as the set of points that satisfy

154
 QUESTIONS:
1escribe briefly the following methods of surface modeling with a few application examples:
11)
i. Revsurf
ii. Tabcyl

iii. Bicubic surface

iv. Bezier surface

2.Suggest the procedure that you will adopt to create the following surface geometries:

v. The surfaces of the vanes and inner projections of the shroud of a mixed flow impeller.
vi. The surface of a propeller.

xercises
12)
i Create an assembly of a reduction gearbox and prepare geometric models of individual
components.
ii Create a surface model of a mouse.

iii Create a solid model of a bracket and extract plan, elevation, end view and a sectional
view, with dimensions.

iv Create a frame type structure in C.I and extract mass properties.

reate a solid model and generate a STEP file. Write a program to extract all flat surfaces and
holes. Study typical consumer durable products like electric iron, coffee percolator, water heater
etc. and analyze the impact of shape design on their sales appeal. Study the shape of a
passenger car and analyze how the blending of various surfaces of body panels is done.
Compare the measures of continuity of curves and surfaces.
13)
5tudy typical consumer durable products like electric iron, coffee percolator, water heater etc.
and analyze the impact of shape design on their sales appeal.
14)
6tudy the shape of a passenger car and analyze how the blending of various surfaces of body
panels is done.
15)
7. Compare the measures of continuity of curves and surfaces.
8. Explain the hermit cubic curve.
9. Explain the Bezier surface.

155
 UNIT-IV
DRAFTING AND MODELING SYSTEMS

156
 4EFINATION: Drafting is one of the first computer applications used by
many users. It refers to the engineering model is communicated for manufacturing
or any other application.

4ASIC FACILITIES IN AUTOCAD

The release 2000 screen is shown in fig1. This has the familiar windows
look and feel, in terms of the various buttons and an easier interface. It has set of
dropdown windows for various menu options. From among them:

New: This allows for starting a new drawing.

Open: This allows opening an old drawing for editing.

Save: Allows saving the current drawing.

Save as: Allows saving the current drawing with new name.

Export: Allows for exporting the current drawing into other format. Suitable for
other programs such as….3D studio.

Eg:-

BMP: Device-independent bit map.

DWG: AutoCAD drawing file.

DWF: AutoCAD drawing web format.

DXF: AutoCAD R14 drawing inter change.

4CREEN DISPLAY

From fig1.the status line is the bottom most line. On the right side a
column is displayed for providing the possible menu selections. The column can be
removed from the screen if necessary by changing the option in the AutoCAD set
up. At the bottom a command area is provided which is generally designed for three
lines. Rest screen is designed as the drawing area.

157
MENU

AutoCAD is a completely menu driven system. Also no. of menu commands

available are many.

Direct command entry.

Through the side bar menu.
Through the pop-up window from the menu bar.
Through the button bars located in any portion of the screen.(fig2)

PLANING FOR A DRAWING

This is carried out by set up operations.

UNITS:

This lets us set up the units in which the AutoCAD would have to work. It would
be working in default co-ordinates called as drawing units. This is achieved by using “units”
command. [fig3]

It offers following types of units.

Scientific.
Decimal.
Engineering.
Architectural.
Fractional.

CO-ORDINATE SYSTEM:

It generally uses the rectangular Cartesian co-ordinate system which follows right
hand rule. It also uses rectangular co-ordinate system designed as x, y, & z axis. Co-ordinates
can be imputed into the system in a no of ways by direct input of co-ordinate values in their
respective order.

COMMAND: LINE<LR>

FROM POINT: 3.5, 12.0<LR>

CR: Carriage return.

Fig: 4 show the co-ordinate being given in absolute system.

158
LIMITS:

It is normally necessary to specify the limits of the drawing that one is about to use.
The actual size of drawing would have to be specified using limit command.

Limits establishes the size of the drawing and the associated drawing guide such as
grids, rullers etc……in proper format.

However, limits check option is kept on, and then AutoCAD would not allow
you to specify any point beyond the limits.

GRID:

Working on a plane drawing area s difficult since there is no means for the user to
understand or correlate the relative position or straightness of the various objects or entities
made in the drawing. The grid command controls the display of a grid of alignment to assist
the placement of objects in the drawing.

SNAP:

The resolution of the cursor can be effectively controlled by using SNAP command.
When the cursor is moving in the drawing area, it moves in increments of the snap spacing
value specified. This is useful for inputting data through the digester or mouse.

Functional key: F9

ORTHO:

It allows to control “orthogonal” drawing mode. As a result all lines and traces drawn
while this mode is on are constrained to be horizontal or vertical.

Functional key: F8

HELP:
AutoCAD provides complete help at any point of working in the program.

OBJECT PROPERTIES:

LINE TYPE:

AutoCAD allows the user to draw various types of lines in the drawing. To change the
line type of existing object, use the “CHANGE “command. To control large line type use
“LAYER” command. It can also load line type definitions from a library file.

159
4ASIC GEOMETRIC COMMANDS
The various entities that can be used for making an AutoCAD drawing in 2D are:
 POINT
 LINE

 ARC

 CIRCLE

 ELLIPSE

 POLYGON

 POLYLINE

 DOUGH NUT

 SKETCH

 TEXT

 BLOCK

160
161
 POINT:

It is used to specify a point or a node in the drawing for any given purpose. It is also
used as NODE in object snap option.

It is also possible to specify the co-ordinates in incremental format as the distance

from the current cursor position in the drawing area. The distance is specified by using the
“@” parameter before the actual value.

COMMAND: POINT<CR>

Co-ordinates of point: @34.5, 12.0<CR>

LINE:

It allows you to draw straight line. You can specify the desired end points using
either 2D or 3D co-ordinates. To erase the latest line segment without exiting the line
command enters
“U”.

Lines may be constrained to horizontal or vertical by the “ORTHO” command. The

close option uses the start point of the first line in the current line command.

CIRCLE:

It is used to draw a full circle. We can specify a circle in many ways. For specifying
the circle we need at least two values.
 Centre point and radius.
 Centre point and diameter.

 2p\3p\ttr methods.

ARC:
It enables to draw an arc as specified by following methods.
 Three points on the arc.
 Start point, centre and end point.

 Start, centre and included angle.

 Start, centre and length of chord.

 Start, end and radius.

 Start, end and included angle.

 Start, end and direction of start.

162
 The arc is always drawn in counter clock wise direction. Depending on the
data available it is necessary to plan carefully the sequence in which the data is
specified.

163
4.AYERS
A layer is basically one which contains some information which can be geometric or alpha-
numeric. The reason of distributes all the information present in the drawing into various
layers is that at any given time some of the layers can be deleted from the view(off) or can be
made visible(on). This helps in organizing the information in a drawing. Thus each layer may
be considered as a transparent sheet having some information.
 Each layer has a name which can be up to 31 characters.
 Default layer name given by AutoCAD is 0.

 A layer could be ON or OFF. When a layer is ON the information present in it

would be visible on screen.

 layer is either “current or inactive”.

 If the current layer is ON then the information being entered would be visible on screen.

 Each layer has a colour associated with it. The colour of individual
information can be altered by using “CHANGE” command or by using “COLOR”
command.

164
DISPLAY CONTROL COMMAND

165
ZOOM:

Zoom is used to change the scale of display. This can be used to magnify a part of the
drawing to any higher scale of or closely observing some file details in the drawing. There
are no. of options available within zoom.

SCALE<X>: A numeric zoom factor. A value less than 1 zoom out and greater than 1 zoom
in.

ALL : Zoom out to original drawing limits.

DYNAMIC: Graphically selects any portion of the drawing as your next screen view.

CENTRE : Pick a centre and picture top and bottom by selecting two end points of height.

EXTENTS: Shows everything in the file.

LEFT : Pick a lower left corner and a height of how much drawing information you want to

Display to fill up the screen.

PREVIOUS: Restores the last zoom setting.

Choosing the dynamic option displays all the drawing up to limits in a small
window. So that the entire drawing is visible in the display screen. The current visible
window would be shown in rectangular linked to the cursor.

PAN:

It allows you to move the display window in any direction without changing the
display magnification. This means the display being seen is through a window in an opaque
sheet covering the drawing limits.

OBJECT SNAP:

By selecting the OSNAP option the system would be able to automatically

calculate the tangent point in the region selected. The various OSANP options are as
follows…..

CENTRE: center or arc or circle

ENDPOINT: closest end point if line/arc etc….

INSERTION: insertion point of text/block etc…

INTERSECTION: intersection of lines/arcs/circles etc…

MIDPOINT: midpoint of lines/arcs/circles etc…

NEAREST: nearest point on line/arc/circle.

166
NODE: nearest point entity.

PERPENDICULAR: perpendicular to line/arc/circle.

QUADRANT: quadrant point of arc or circle.

TANGENT: tangent to arc or circle.

TEXT HANDLING:

AutoCAD provides a large range of text entering capabilities including various

fonts and other text handling features.

4DITING A DRAWING

Editing capabilities are the most useful part of AutoCAD to export the
productivity potential, making use of the already existing objects in the drawing.

ARRAY: places multiple copies of objects with a single command.

BREAK: cuts existing objects and /or erase portions of objects.

CHANGE: Changes spatial properties of some objects.

COPY: makes copies of objects.

ERASE: Allows selecting objects in the drawing file and erasing them.

MIRROR: creates a mirror image.

MOVE: picks up existing objects and puts them in another location of drawing.

ROTATE: Turns existing object to any angular position.

SCALE: Scales object up or down to your specification.

MOVE:

It is used to move one or more existing drawing entities from one location to another
location. You can draw the object into position on the screen by giving base point and second
point. The selected objects will follow the movements of the screen crosshair.

OBJECT: the default selects a set by picking individual objects.

WINDOW: objects are completely inside a window drawn by the cursor control
device.
LAST: uses only the last object created.
CROSSING: works like a window, it also includes any object which is partially within
the
167
Window.

168
REMOVE: it removes any objects that are accidentally selected by any of the object.

ADD: used o adding when the remove option is specified.

MULTIPLE: allows multiple objects in close proximity.

PREVIOUS: adds the entire previous selection list to the current selection list.

UNDO: undo the last selection operation.

SELECT ALL: selects all objects in drawing.

WINDOW POLYGON: Here, rectangular window is replaced by polygon of as many

vertices as

Required.

CROSSING POLYGON: similar to the window polygon except that the polygon here is not

Would be selected.

COPY:

This command is used to duplicate one or more existing drawing entities at another
location without erasing original. You can drag the object into position on the screen. The
selected object will follow the movements of the screen cross hairs.

To make multiple copies, respond to the base point prompt with „M‟. when you have made
required number of copies give a null response to the second point prompt to come out of the
copy command.

CHAMFER:

It creates a bevel between two intersecting lines at a given distance from their
intersection. It can also trim the lines from the bevel edge and connect the trimmed ends with
a new line of TRIMMODE variable is set to 1. Chamfer can only be applied between line
segments and not any other objects.

FILLET:

It connects two lines, arcs, or circles with a smooth curve of specified radius. It
adjusts the length of the original line or arcs so they end exactly on the fillet arc. The fillet
valve specified remains in force until it is altered by another valve. If the fillet radius is „0‟
then two lines will meet exactly at a point which is normally used to make a sharp corner.

Filleting can also be done to two circles, a line and a circle, a line and an arc and a
circle and an arc.

169
170
OFFSET:

This command constructs an entity parallel to another entity at either a specified

point. You can OFFSET a line, arc, circle or polygon. Offset lines are parallel, while the
offset circles and arcs make concentric circles. Once object is selected it is highlighter on the
screen.

Side to offset:

Through point:

The selected object will be de highlighted and the “select object to offset”.

ARRAY:
It makes multiple copies of selected objects in a rectangular or polar pattern.

For a rectangular array you are asked for the no. of columns & rows and the spacing
between them. The array is built along a base line defined by the current snap rotation angle
set by the “SNAP ROTATE” command.

For polar array a centre point needs to be supplied. Following this, you must supply
two of following…
 The number of items in the array.
 The number of degrees to fill

 The angle between items in the array.

4IMENSIONING

After creating the various views of the model or after preparing the drawing it is
necessary to add dimensions at the appropriate places. AutoCAD provides semi automatic
dimensions. As a result once dimensions is created. AutoCAD gives great control over the
way dimensions may appear in the drawing. The dimension familiars are as follows…
 Linear
 Diameter

 Radial

 Angular

 Ordinate

 Leader

 Aligned

171
172
4D- MODELING
Creates 3D polygon mesh objects in common geometric shapes that can be hidden, shaded, or
rendered.

Command entry: 3d

Enter an option

[Box/Cone/DIsh/DOme/Mesh/Pyramid/Sphere/Torus/Wedge]:

1.BOX

Creates a 3D box polygon mesh.

Specify corner point of box:

Specify length of box: Specify a distance

Specify width of box or [Cube]: Specify a distance or enter C

Width

Specifies the width of the box.

Enter a distance or specify a point relative to the corner point of the box

173
 .

Specify height of box: Specify a distance

Specify rotation angle of box about the Z axis or [Reference]: Specify an angle or enter r

Rotation Angle Rotates the box about the first corner specified. If you enter 0, the box
remains orthogonal to the current X and Y axes.

Reference Aligns the box with other objects in the drawing or relative to an angle you
specify. The base point for the rotation is the first corner of the box.Specify the reference
angle <0>:
Specify a point, enter an angle, or press Enter

You can define a reference angle by specifying two points or an angle from the X axis on the
XY plane. For example, you can rotate the box to align two specified points on the box with a
point on another object. After defining a reference angle, specify a point for the reference
angle to align with. The box then rotates around the first corner relative to the angle of
rotation specified for the reference angle.

If you enter 0 as a reference angle, the new angle alone determines the rotation

of the box.

Specify the new angle: Specify a point or enter an angle

To specify the new angle of rotation, specify a point relative to the base point. The base point
for the rotation is the first corner of the box. The box rotates by the angle between the
reference angle and the new angle.

If you want to align the box with another object, specify two points on the target object to

define the new angle of rotation for the box. If the reference angle of rotation is 0, the box
rotates the angular distance entered relative to the first corner of the box.

174
175
2.CUBE

Creates a cube using the length for the width and height of the box.

Specify rotation angle of box about the Z axis or [Reference]: Specify an angle or enter r

Rotation Angle Rotates the cube about the first corner of the box. If you enter 0, the box
remains orthogonal to the current X and Y axes.

Reference Aligns the box with other objects in the drawing or relative to an angle you
specify. The base point for the rotation is the first corner of the box.

Specify the reference angle <0>: Specify a point, enter an angle, or press Enter

You can define a reference angle by specifying two points or an angle from the X axis on the
XY plane. For example, you can rotate the box to align two specified points on the box with a
point on another object.

After defining a reference angle, specify a point for the reference angle to align with. The box
then rotates around the first corner relative to the angle of rotation specified

for the reference angle. If you enter 0 as a reference angle, the new angle alone determines
the rotation of the box.

176
Specify the new angle: Specify a point or enter an angle

To specify the new angle of rotation, specify a point relative to the base point. The base point
for the rotation is the first corner of the box. The box rotates the angular distance between the
reference angle and the new angle. If you want to align the box with another object, specify
two points on the target object to define the new angle of rotation for the box. If the reference
angle of rotation is 0, the box rotates the angular distance entered relative to the first corner
point of the box.

3.CONE
Creates a cone-shaped polygon mesh.

Specify center point for base of cone: Specify a point (1)

Specify radius for base of cone or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d

Radius for Base

Defines the base of the cone by its radius.

Specify radius for top of cone or [Diameter] <0>: Specify a distance, enter d, or press Enter

177
Radius for Top Defines the top of the cone by its radius. A value of 0

produces a cone. A value greater than 0 produces a truncated cone.

Specify height of cone: Specify a distance

Enter number of segments for surface of cone <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press
Enter

Diameter for Top Defines the top of the cone by its diameter. A value of 0 produces a cone.
A value greater than 0 produces a truncated cone.

Specify diameter for top of cone <0>: Specify a distance or press

Enter Specify height of cone: Specify a distance

Enter number of segments for surface of cone <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press
Enter

Diameter for Base

Defines the base of the cone by its diameter.

Specify diameter for base of cone: Specify a distance

Specify radius for top of cone or [Diameter] <0>: Specify a distance, enter d, or press Enter

Radius for Top Defines the top of the cone by its radius. A value of 0

produces a cone. A value greater than 0 produces a truncated cone.

Specify height of cone: Specify a distance

Enter number of segments for surface of cone <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press
Enter

178
179
Diameter for Top Defines the top of the cone by its diameter. A value of 0 produces a cone.
A value greater than 0 produces a truncated cone.

Specify diameter for top of cone <0>: Specify a distance

Specify height of cone: Specify a distance

Enter number of segments for surface of cone <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press
Enter

4.PYRAMID

Creates a pyramid or a tetrahedron.

Specify first corner point for base of pyramid: Specify a point (1)

Specify second corner point for base of pyramid: Specify a point (2)

Specify third corner point for base of pyramid: Specify a point (3)

Specify fourth corner point for base of pyramid or [Tetrahedron]: Specify a point (4) or enter
t

Fourth Corner Point

Defines the fourth corner point of the base of a pyramid.

Specify apex point of pyramid or [Ridge/Top]: Specify a point (5) or enter an option.

The Z value of the point specified determines the height for the pyramid'’ apex, top, or ridge
line.

180
Apex Point Defines the top of the pyramid as a point (apex).

Ridge Defines the top of the pyramid as a ridge line. The two endpoints
must lie in the same direction as the base points to prevent a self-
intersecting wireframe.

Specify first ridge end point of pyramid: Specify a point (1)

Specify second ridge end point of pyramid: Specify a point (2)

Top Defines the top of the pyramid as a rectangle. If the top points cross,
they create a self-intersecting polygon mesh.

Specify first corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a point

Specify second corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a point

Specify third corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a point

Specify fourth corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a point

181
4.SOLID
16) MODEL BASED ASSEMBLY DESIGN
Once components are created as solid models, assembly software enables the designer to
create a complete software mock up of the product. Assembly software is an interactive
tool for creating and manipulating large mechanical assemblies. This software helps to
position a part relative to the other using intuitive positing and mating relationships
which define the design intent. Design changes to any part navigate through the entire
assembly, dynamically updating part and subassembly positions. Positioning
relationships include face-to-face and edge-to-edge commands making it easy to specify
mating, alignment, and offset, and insertion, parallel and angular relationships among
parts.
A top down approach is used in assembly design. The design leader can layout and
plan assembly and create a product structure for the entire team. The product structure is
associative to assembly geometry and remains accessible to the project team. Outline
geometry and spatial envelopes to a subassembly or part can be defined and included in
the hierarchy.
As and when the design team details designs of parts these designs are included in the
assembly in the place of spatial envelopes. The design gradually growns in complexity
while maintaining the spatial constraints defined earlier. Throughout the design process,
multiple users can access the assembly design. The design and data management
capabilities of the assembly software provides a design check out and referencing system
for multiple users. Changes can be communicated not only to members of the design
team but also to other product assemblies which use them.
Assembly design software provides other facilities too. The designer can track part
numbers, part names, revisions and versions easily. In fact, versions can be assigned
automatically as design changes. In order to create Bill of Materials (BOM), BOM
attributes can be added to part or assembly. When parts are revised, the assemblies which
use these parts are modified automatically. When assembly or parts within assembly
change associated drawings created by the drafting software are automatically updated.
Assembly design software is a powerful tool for design evaluation. Since parts are
designed in solid models the design can carry out checks for interference between mating
parts and subassemblies. It is also possible to animate kinematic assemblies to evaluate
how mechanisms work. Since variational geometry is used, the designer can vary the
dimensions of the links to study the impact of design changes and articulate the
mechanism in real time.

Assembly level mass and inertial properties can also be calculated. The rendering
capabilities available in the modeling package enable true to life presentation of the
assembly to management, marketing, manufacturing, purchase and other downstream
users for review. Their feedback will be useful to avoid costly design changes at the end
of product development cycle.

182
4OLID
17) MODEL BASED DRAFTING
The drafting process creates production drawings. When solid model based design is
followed, the production drawings can be generated from the solid model itself. Some
drafting systems allow either a single user or dual user. In the single user mode, the entire
design/ drafting job is done by a single designer by creating a design with solid or
assembly modeler and documenting that model using the drafting module. Bi-directional
associativity helps to make changes to the solid model by incorporating a change in the
detail drawing. The dual user approach is suitable for organizations where design and
drafting tasks are carried out by separate persons. This mode of work enables the
draftsman to begin his work even before the designer completes his design. Concurrent
associativity allows the drawing to be updated while maintaining design change control
with the design engineer. Drafting module provides the following additional facilities
also:
(i) Set up and create associative single or multiple cross sections through parts with
automatic cross hatching
(ii) Associative detail views can be added

(iii) Make first angle or third angle projections, isometric, auxiliary or true projections

(iv) Multiple view of one or more drawings can be placed on one drawing or multiple
drawings

(v) Automatic removal or display of hidden line by dashed lines

(vi) Border, title block or the necessary drawing format can be added

(vii) Different layers for different parts of the drawing can be specified.

Many solid modeling packages provide exhaustive symbol libraries or facilities to

create symbols which expedite detailing of drawings. A variety of dimensioning
techniques are available. Dimensioning can be automatic or a dynamic navigation style
with user interaction can be adopted. In the latter, as the draftsman traverses the drawing,
the geometry entities are highlighted. Appropriate icons are displayed next to the curser
that represent the dimensions. These dimensions can be added simply by picking with the
cursor. Dimensioning supports ANSI, ISO, DIN, BIS and JIS. Geometric dimensioning
and
tolerancing methods are also available in the package. Provision for adding text or
annotations in different languages is also available. Another facility available is the
associative cross hatching facility with ability to recognize internal holes and islands.
Another feature of a drafting module is the dynamic Bill of Materials that
automatically updates when changes are made to the drawing. This ensures that BOM
accurately reflects the data of the drawing.
In addition to the above the drafting module includes integrated drawing management
183
capabilities. Some of these capabilities are listed below:
(i) Lists the solid model associated with the part drawing
(ii) Lists all drawings associated with a model

(iii) Searches for a drawing by name, number or the draftsman

(iv) Stores the drawings in libraries

(v) Retrieve drawings

(vi) Tracks drawing stage (in-design, check, released etc)

(vii) Tracks revisions and versions

(viii) Compiles total time spent on a drawing

(ix) Tracks drawings read from STEP, IGES and DXF files

(x) Creates of engineering change order

(xi) Provides project configurations

Drafting modules associated with solid modeling packages can also be used for stand
alone drafting. The features of a drafting package are discussed in a subsequent section in
this chapter.

4OLID
18) MODEL BASED MECHANISM DESIGN
Solid model based kinematic analysis can be used to determine complex motions of
mechanisms. A mechanical design software is used for this purpose. Mechanism models
are defined directly on the assembly model geometry. Rigid models are defined directly
on the assembly model geometry. Rigid bodies are automatically understood and joints
and constraints are defined simply by selecting appropriate locations on the assembly.
Motions of mechanisms and loads are defined using a forms based user interface and can
be defined by mathematical expressions or sketches. All solid geometry and inertia
properties can be accessed from the assembly design. Mechanism design capabilities
include the following :

Joint definition
Revolve
Universal
Planar

184
 General (screw, rack & pinion)
Ball
Translational
Cylindrical

Constraints
Ground
Spring/damper
Coupler
Gears

Motions
Rotational about revolute or cylindrical joint
Translation along a cylindrical or transitional joint

Loads
Rotational and translational forces
Gravity
Torque
Velocity
Acceleration

Functions
Ability to display several simultaneous functions
Functions defined by mathematical expressions
Transformations to manipulate functions
Geometry checking to determine the validity of mechanisms
Once joints, constraints and functions have been defined the mechanism can be
solved using an internal solver. Some of the capabilities of a typical mechanism solver
are given below:
(i) Analysis of open and closed loop mechanisms
(ii) Shaded animation

(iii) Determination of position, velocity and acceleration of all bodies

(iv) Automatic solid model based interference checking

(v) Joint, inertia and spring forces are automatically calculated

(vi) Relative position, velocity and acceleration between any two arbitrary points can
be obtained

185
 (vii) Plotting facilities are available

This kinematic analysis module as an add on to solid modeling packages also will
have facility to preprocess data to be used in an advanced kinematic analysis package like
ADAMS or DADS.

4INITE
19) ELEMENT MODELING FROM SOLID MODELS
Optimization of designs require detailed analysis to determine stresses, deflection, natural
frequencies, mode shapes, temperature distribution, heat flow rates etc. Finite element
technique is used to carry out these analysis is to create a finite element model. The solid
model geometry can be used directly to create the FE model.
Automatic mesh generation and application of loads and boundary conditions can
also be carried out while creating the finite element model.
It is often necessary to modify design geometry to create an effective finite element
model. Automatic mesh generation can be done either through free meshing or adaptive
meshing. A comprehensive library of finite elements is available in the software. The
elements will be linear or parabolic. Shell, solid, beam, rod, spring, damper, mass and
gap are some of the elements available for the purpose of modeling. A FE modeling
software provides extensive capabilities to define loading and boundary conditions to
correctly simulate the environment that a part will be subjected in operation.
Loads can be:
• Structural loads
• Heat transfer loads

Physical and material properties can be obtained from the material database of the
solid model. Facilities for mode checking and model optimization are also available.
The optimized model can be solved by any one of the analysis package like ANSYS,
NISA, ABAQUS or NASTRAN. Finite element modeling, analysis, simulation and
optimization are discussed in the next chapter.

4ENERATIVE
20) CNC MACHINING BASED ON SOLID MODELING
The geometry of solid models can serve as the basis for generating CNC codes for
manufacturing the component. Solid modeling based generative machining software
helps to:

(i) evolve stock model

(ii) capture manufacturing planning

(iii) design the tooling

186
 (iv) develop feature driven machining programs

Solid modeling based machining software encompasses the complete machining

environment. The tool paths generated by it avoid grouping of parts, avoid collision with
clamps and optimize motion.
Thus solid modeling technique helps in
(i) conceptualize the design
(ii) provide interface to analysis

(iii) generate NC tool paths

A number of software packages are available now for modeling. Important among
them are:

AUTOCAD
IDEAS
PRO/ENGINEER
UNIGRAPHICS
CADDS V
CATIA
CADAM
IEMS
SOLID WORKS
SOLID EDGE
IRON CAD

4HE CONCEPTUAL DESIGN PROCESS

21)
Traditionally designers used to make 2-D or 3-D sketches as starting point of shape
designs. From these sketches, models in materials like wood, clay, sheet metal or poly-
urethane foam will be made. These models were then displayed to public or groups of
interested persons like management or customers to obtain the customer preferences or
reactions or feed back. The final design shape is then arrived at by altering the models
created incorporating engineering and manufacturing feedback. This process used to take
considerable time and constituted a significant portion of product development cycle
time.

With the emphasis on time compression in product development, the accent today is
in using the computer itself for conceptual design. Once the shape design is completed,
the model data could be transferred to the solid modeling software to complete the design

187
analysis and optimization. The software used for conceptual design is also called
computer aided industrial design (CAID) package. CAID package is a conceptual front
end of the product development process and are specifically designed to stimulate
creativity by providing a wide variety of design options. This tool can quickly create and
modify the shape, form and surface qualities of 3D models. A CAID package will have
photorealistic rendering and lighting capabilities. Several software packages offer the
CAID capabilities. Prominent among them are:

• Alias
• PTC

• SolidWorks

• SDRC

• UGS

• think3

• Raindrop Geomagic

• McNeel & Associates

A conceptual design or CAID package should have the following features:

• Integrated 2D sketching and 3D modeling
• Ease of manipulation of shape, form and texture

• Create and modify freeform bodies

• Presentation capabilities

• Data transfer to mechanical CAD for detailed design

A CAID package will have typically the capabilities like Modeling (Global
deformation, curve tools, blend tools, sweep curves, surfacing, scaling, filleting,
trimming, offsetting, stitching, aligning, smoothing etc), advanced surfacing and direct
modeling functions, sketching, evaluation tools, animation and rendering tools etc.
Styling is very important in automobile design. Automobile styling demands quality,
precision and accuracy. CAID packages specially designed for Class-A surfacing are
available. These packages incorporate advanced modeling and reverse engineering tools.
The major modules of such packages are:

188
 • Cloud point data processing
• Direct, patch based modeling

• Procedural curve based modeling

• Real time diagnostic feedback

• Dynamic surface evaluation

• CAD integration

Cloud point data can be captured by several methods. A popular method is laser
scanning. Laser scanners are fast and accurate. Mechanical scanning can also be done. A
number of scanners are available to capture cloud point data. The surfaces thus created
can be subjected to surface quality evaluation, interactive shading and surface curvature
analysis. This technique requires a model to be made in a suitable material.
It is more common to carry out the design by sketching. Using the conceptual design
software the design process is carried out in a more or less similar fashion as outlined
below:
Create an outline of the model by picking points in a window and letting the software to
connect them to form surfaces.
i. Use the curves to form the model. Create 3-D surfaces from the curves which
each surface is an area enclosed by three or more curves.
ii. Analyze the quality of the curves to identify and eliminate potential
manufacturing problems.

iii. Improve the model by editing the curves and surfaces to arrive at an aesthetically
pleasing design.

The geometry of the model can be created by:

i. A set of curves that define the geometry which acts as the frame work for the
model’s surfaces or
ii. The geometry can be created by using surfaces which are larger than what is
required and the geometry can be trimmed to suit the requirements.

A model can be created using a combination of the above techniques also.

189
4.SKETCHING THE GEOMETRY
Conceptual modeling software provides a number of facilities to create sketches.
Sketches should be made to scale and should be made with reference to an origin. The
sketching can be done in two ways.
i. Sketch orthogonal views like plan, side view, point view, rear view etc.:
In this method the different views of the object are sketched with the help of
orthogonal views as shown in Fig. 6.35. The curve design tools could be used to
outline the shape of the model, connect the curves and define the regions which
could be later used to create surfaces.

Fig. 4.6 Shape Design with Orthogonal Sketches

190
 ii. Sketch 2-D perspective or 3-D perspective:
Using the 2-D perspective option is similar to loading a sketch in the side view to
create geometry. Fig. 6.36 shows a perspective sketch. In perspective sketching
the location of the vanishing point is important. Hand drawn sketches could be
scanned and converted into TIFF or similar format and could be loaded into the
conceptual modeling software.

Fig. 4.7 Perspective Sketch

Once the sketches are loaded, the software can be used to align the sketch.

QUESTIONS
1. How do you classify modeling package?
2. Compare 2-D and 3-D wire frame models.

3. Discuss the hardware required for a PC based drafting environment

4. Study a CAD package and describe the drawing entities available.

5. What are the commands and their sequence to create 2D and 3D wire frame
models of the following components?
i. A bracket
ii. a spur gear

Discuss the use of various editing commands available in a CAD package.

10. Describe the display commands available in a drafting package.
11. How will be set the dimension variables for:

i. Aligned dimensioning
ii. Unilateral dimensioning

iii. Chain dimensioning

191
 iv. To indicate the tolerances on dimensions

12. How do you create a block?

13. How do you redefine a block in a drawing?

14. Study the symbol creation facilities available in a drafting package and create
symbols for indicating surface roughness

15. Study the various files available in a CAD package and their functions.

16. Write a short note on the advantages of customizing a software.

17. What is meant by configuring a software?

18. How does CAD help drawing office management?

19. How will you create the bill of materials from a CAD file?

20. Describe the importance of curve and surface modeling in computer aided
graphics and design.

21. What is the advantage of parametric programming in designing curves and

surfaces?

22. Compare the splines for the same control points created by B-spline and Bezier
spline techniques.
23. Draw a Bezier spline for the following control points:
(0,0), (4,3), (8,4) & (12,0)
W
24. hat is the common modeling methods available for surface design in a surface
modeling software?

192
 UNIT-V
NC, CNC MACHINE TOOLS

193
5.1 INTRODUCTION
After the Second World War, there was a big spurt in the design and development of
aerospace products like satellites, launch vehicles, civil and military aircraft etc. The
hydraulic copying and electrical program controlled machines used at that time could not
meet the manufacturing challenges posed by the complex aerospace designs. The
manufacturing engineers were therefore looking for a better way of automating the
machining operations. Numerical control (NC) was developed in early 50’s to meet the
critical requirements of aerospace Industry. Many components used in aircraft and space
vehicles are machined from solid raw materials, often involving removal of considerable
stock and requiring several hundred positioning movements of the machine tool slides.
Manual operation under these circumstances is not only tedious but also less efficient and
unproductive. Often the part after several hours of machining is liable to be rejected due
to machining errors.

Digital technology developed for communication purposes became very handy for
designers of control of machine tools. Since the information required to actuate and
control slides was coded numerically, this technology came to be known as numerical
control.

Early numerically controlled machines were fully hardwired machines as the entire
control logic was implemented in hardware. This posed several difficulties in the
operation of NC machines apart from serious limitations on reliability of operation. The
designers of NC machines achieved a major breakthrough during mid-six tees when they
could integrate a NC machine tool with a mini-computer. The technology was then
renamed as computer numerical control. The integration of computers with NC machine
tools resulted in the following advantages:

• Increase in the memory for part program processing

• Increase in capacity for storing large part programs

• Easy editing of part programs on the control console

• Realization of control logic through software

• Significant improvement in the reliability of operation of the machines

• Integration of N.C. machines in the manufacturing system as a whole.

Further developments in large scale integration resulted in the development of

microprocessors around which computers could be designed. This naturally led to the
development of CNC systems based on microprocessors. Today all CNC machines are
194
microprocessor based and both NC and CNC mean computer numerical control.

5.2 PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION OF A NUMERICAL CONTROLLED MACHINE

The CNC machine differs from a conventional manual machine in several respects. The
principle of operation of a numerical controlled machine can be explained with the help
of Fig. 5.1. The figure shows a vertical milling machine. For carrying out an operation
like end milling the spindle head is to be positioned in Z- axis and the table in X and Y
coordinate axes. The feed movement is to be realized by the individual or simultaneous
movement of X and Y axes. Thus the milling machine requires three slide movements,
which are usually referred as axes feed drives. A special feature of a CNC machine is that
a separate motor called a servomotor individually drives each axis. AC servomotors are
the preferred choice for this purpose today. DC servomotors were widely used earlier.
The slides are driven by the servomotors through re-circulating ball screw and nut
assemblies. The use of re-circulating ball screw reduces friction, backlash and wear. The
low friction reduces the torque required at the motor and the lost motion through torsional
deflection of the screw. The use of ball screws also improves the dynamic response of the
system. In some modern designs, particularly in the case of high-speed machines, linear
motors are used in the place of servomotor ball screw combination.

Z-AXIS SERVO MOTOR

COLUMN
SPINDLE MOTOR

SPINDLE HEAD
Z

TOOL
X-AXIS TABLE
SERVO
MOTOR X
Y-AXIS SERVO
MOTOR

Fig. 5.1 Sketch of a NC machine Tool

195
 In order to carry out the milling operation on the workpiece the coordinate
information (X, and Y coordinates) of the starting point and the ending point has to be
coded in the NC program. Similarly, the information regarding the direction of rotation
and speed of the spindle, use of coolant, and the feed rate is also coded suitably. The
CNC controller decodes the positioning information coded in the NC program and the
slide is moved to the programmed position at the required feed rate. Each slide is fitted
with a feedback transducer, which continuously monitors the slide position and compares
with the programmed position as well as the f chedule The feedback transducer is
mounted either on the slide or on the servomotor and measures the displacement or
position of the slide.
For example, let us assume that a hole is to be drilled at the location X = 100.0 and Y
= 150.0. The corresponding block of the program is read by the control system and the
necessary inputs are sent to the X and Y-axis servomotors. These motors drive the
respective slides to the commanded position. When the distance information from the
feedback devices equals the programmed values, the slide movement stops. The input is
then given to the Z-axis servomotor to perform the drilling operation. The system
switches on the motor driving the spindle carrying the drill and commands the Z-axis
servomotor to move at the programmed f cheduleinto the workpiece till the programmed
depth is reached. The Z-axis feedback transducer ensures the correct depth and f chedule
The drill is then withdrawn to the desired height and the machine starts the positioning
movements to the next location of the drill. This procedure thus ensures production of
accurate workpieces.
The feedback transducer used may be analog (synchro resolver) or digital (encoders).
Another classification of feedback transducer is based on their nature of measurement-
absolute or incremental. They are also classified as linear or rotary depending upon their
construction. Linear feedback devices include optical scales, inductosyn etc. Rotary
feedback devices are mounted either on the ball screw or on the motor shaft and measure
the slide position indirectly. Rotary encoders, optical scales, and synchro resolvers are the
commonly used rotary feed back devices.

The measured and the targeted positions are compared and the servo system ensures
that the correct positioning is achieved to make this error (difference between targeted
and measured positions) zero. The resolution of axis feed drive is usually one
m chedule Since positioning is done electronically, it is possible to achieve accuracy
and repeatability of the order of 5-10 micrometres even under heavy-duty cutting
conditions. Two servo loops are incorporated in feed drive -—one for the position and the
other for the feed. In addition to this, the selection of spindle speed is also under servo
control. The principle of operation of the servo system used in a CNC Machine tool is
described below.

196
5.2.1 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION OF A CNC SERVO SYSTEM
A CNC servo system works on the digital principle. In a digital system, the control signal
is in the form of electrical pulses. Figure5.2 shows a typical pulse train. A pulse train will
have a low voltage level (say 1.2 V) and higher voltage level (say 5 V). Low voltage
level is referred to as ‘O’ state and high voltage level ‘1’ state. Higher voltage may be
negative also. Different higher voltage levels may also be used for control purposes.

5
22)

1.2V

Fig. 5.2 A Typical Pulse Train

Consider the turning operation shown in Fig.5.3. The tool has to move through a
distance of 100 mm to carry out the turning operation. This distance is converted into
pulses- one pulse for each m chedule (1/1000 of a mm). For 100 mm distance, a
command signal of 10 0000 pulses is generated by the control system.

20
00
Fig. 5.3 Turning Operation ,
25
The resolution of the system can be improved by a factor called Command 00
Multiply Ratio (CMR). If the feed is 0.2 mm/rev, and the spindle rpm 1000, the or
slide velocity will be 1000 x 0.2 = 200 mm/min. If the pitch of the ball screw is 10 30
mm, the rotational speed of the Z servomotor should be 200/10 = 20 rpm. The 00
command signal (+ V) from the velocity control unit will have a magnitude pu
proportional to the speed required. Plus or minus signal denotes the rotation in lse
clockwise or anticlockwise direction which is necessary for positive and negative pe
movements of the table in any axis. r
The feed back unit is a significant element of a CNC control system. The re
feedback involves measurement of position as well as feed velocity (feed rate). In a vo
majority of cases, the encoder, which is used as the feed back device, generates lut

197
ion. The detect multiple ratio (DMR) matches the resolution of the

feedback transducer (thereby the pulses produced by the transducer) and the
pulses necessary to move the slide to the required position. The feedback encoder is
usually mounted on the rear side of the axis servomotor itself to simplify the
electrical connections. From Fig. 5.4 it can be seen that there are two servo loops in
the axis drive -—the outer loop for position and the inner loop for feed rate. The
feedback signal for the feed rate is the pulse rate or pulse frequency. The
frequency/voltage converter converts the pulse frequency into an analog voltage and
this is compared with the input signal to the motor.

TABLE
VELOCITY SERVO
CMR CONTROL MOTOR
UNIT
NUT
BALL SCREW
FLEXIBLE
COUPLING

DMR ENCODER

CMR: Command multiply ratio DMR: Detect multiply ratio

Fig. 5.4 Block Diagram of Servo Control

198
The encoder generates pulses corresponding to the rotation of the motor (which is
proportional to the table movement). The detect multiply ratio (DMR) is used to equalize
the command pulse and the pulse generated by the encoder. The pulses corresponding to
the table position are compared to (or subtracted from) the command pulse. When the
feed back pulses become equal to the command pulse, the table reaches the stipulated
position in the program.
The encoder generates the feedback pulses. Pulses are generated by allowing light to
pass through a two glass discs, one mounted on the motor shaft and rotating along with it
and a small auxiliary disc mounted in the encoder housing. A source of light is located on
one side of the disc. Interference fringes are created when the motor shaft rotates. In the
simplest case, two light receiving stations (usually solar cells) are located on the other
side (A and B) on which the light falls. The interference causes variation in the intensity
of light falling on the solar cells. This results in a cyclic change of resistance, which
could be utilized to create a pulse train using suitable electronic circuitry. The two solar
cells are so placed that the distance between them is equal to (n+1/4λ) where λ is the
pitch distance of the gratings. This is shown in Fig. 5.5.
The two solar cells then generate two pulse trains with a phase difference of
1¼wavelength. Depending on the direction of rotation, the pulses from B will precede

Main Grating

Auxiliary
C Grating
Source of
Light Detail
Solar at C
Cell
Solar
Cell A Solar
Cell B
(n+1/4)

Signal From A

Signal from B
1¼

Fig. 5.5 Feedback Using Encoder

199
or follow the signal from A. This property is used to sense the direction of movement of
the slide. This is illustrated in Fig. 5.6. When the disc rotates in the clockwise direction
the signal from A precedes the signal from B. When the rotation is in the anticlockwise
direction, the signal from B precedes that of the signal from the solar cell A.

Signal From A

Pulse Train During

Clockwise Rotation

Signal from B
1¼

Signal From A

Pulse Train During

Anticlockwise Rotation

1¼ Signal from

Fig. 5.6 Detection of Direction

200
 An overview of a 3-axis CNC system is shown in Fig.5.7. It can be seen that there are
three major subsections in the CNC system. The first section consists of AC Power unit,
programmable machine control PCB, the m chedulecabinet, operator’s panel and manual
pulse generator (MPG). The axis control and drive control PCBs have interfaces with this
section and controls the positioning as well as velocity control of the 3 axes. The spindle
speed control is also shown. The actuator section consists of servomotors and feed back
units (Encoders or linear scales). The spindle is fitted with a spindle encoder. This will be
useful in during thread cutting to enable the tool to enter in the groove created in the
previous pass in the same angular position. This will also be useful for cutting multi-start
threads as well as to monitor spindle speed. There will also be an interface for manual
pulse generator (MPG), which is used to move the slides in the manual mode.

ENCODER
X-AXIS
CONTROL
MOTOR
CONSOLE

AXIS ENCODER
CONTROL
Y-AXIS
CARD
MOTOR

ENCODER
CNC
SYSTEM Z-AXIS
MOTOR

MAIN
MAIN
SPINDLE
DRIVE
MOTOR
CARD
MAGNETICS
TACHO

Fig. 5.7 An Overview of a 3-axis CNC System

In some systems, only one encoder is used and it serves as both position and velocity
feed back unit. The encoder is mounted at the back of the servomotor (semi-closed loop
system). This is illustrated in Fig. 5.8. In other systems (closed loop system illustrated in
Fig. 5.9), separate feed back units for position and velocity are used. In this case, the
position feed back is derived from the table position and velocity feed back is obtained
from the servomotor speed. If the position feed back is obtained this way, errors due to
backlash, pitch error, ball screw compliance etc. can be eliminated.

201
 TABLE
ENCODER
SERVO
MOTOR
NUT
BALL SCREW
FLEXIBLE
COUPLING
SERVO
AMPLIFIER

TYPE A
INTERFACE COMMAND
CONTROL
CARD

BATTERY

Fig. 5.8 Semi Closed Loop System

202
CNC Machine Tools

LINEAR ENCODER TABLE

ENCODER
SERVO
MOTOR
NUT
BALL SCREW
FLEXIBLE
COMMAND COUPLING
& FEEDBACK SERVO
AMPLIFIER

TYPE B
INTERFACE
CONTROL
CARD RELAY
UNIT

BATTERY

Fig. 5.9 Closed Loop System

CNC machine tools employ AC motors (DC motors in older versions of CNC
machines), which offer infinite variation of spindle speeds over a wide range of speeds.
Digital technology is used in the modem AC drives. AC motors are capable of delivering
high power at low base speeds. The main advantages of AC motors are their ruggedness
and low cost.

5.2.2 CODING OF INFORMATION IN NC MACHINES

NC as described earlier is control by numbers. NC is control by information contained in
a part program, which is a set of coded instructions given as numbers for the automatic
control of a machine in a pre-determined sequence.
Figure 12.10 shows the machining a taper on a cylindrical component. To carry out
this operation on a CNC lathe, we write a program block as follows:
N005 G01 U20 W-50 S1200 F0.2 M08;
1200 rpm

50

Fig. 5.10 Machining a Taper

203
 The program block codes the information necessary to operate the lathe, and is given
below:
N005 Block number
G01 Linear interpolation
U20 X increment in slide movement
W-50 Z increment in slide movement
S1200 Spindle speed, 1200, rpm
F0.2 Feed, 0.2 mm/rev
M08 Coolant on
End of block
Each of the above consists of an alphabet or a word address (N, G, U, W, S etc.) and
a numeric value (005, 01, 20, -50, 1200), which represents a function or a slide
displacement position or machining data. These alphanumeric data is digitally coded
either in the ISO (International Standardization Organization) system or EIA (Electronics
Industries Association, USA) system. The symbol ’;’denotes end of the block.

5.2.3 CODING OF INFORMATION

Early NC systems coded only numeric data and they did not use any alphabetic
characters. Since all the information necessary to carry out the machining operation is
passed on to the control system through these coded numerical data, the control came to
be known as numerical control (NC).
The numeric data is usually represented in decimal format. For the purpose of the
convenience in processing in a digital computer, the data is to be converted (coded) into
binary form. A decimal number is represented in binary form as a power of 2.
To represent large number a binary coded decimal (BCD) system is employed.
Consider the 4-track coding system shown below. Rightmost track is 2 0 (least significant)
and leftmost track is 23 (most significant). For example the number 358 can be
represented as:
23 22 21 20
(2+1
0 0 1 1 3 )
(4+1
0 1 0 1 5 )
1 0 0 0 8 (8)
There are two standards for coding, one proposed by ISO (International
Standardization Organization) and the other by EIA (Electronics Industries Association
of USA). There are several other codes popular with the designers of NC systems.

204
5.3 HISTORICAL DEVELOPMENT
As mentioned in the beginning of this chapter, the need for a new technology to control
machine movement was felt during late 40’s to meet the challenges in the production of
aerospace components. The manufacture of many of these components involves several
thousands of machine movements.
A major contribution to this development was made by John Parsons who developed
a technique to machine accurate templates to manufacture helicopter blades. This
involved calculating 200 points on a curve and drilling them on a precision jig mill. He
subsequently developed in 1948 a 3- D method of machining using ball end mill on a SIP
jig bore and a De Vlieg jig mill. The successive settings of the tool were determined
using the IBM punched card reader. Parsons was later entrusted with the development of
a (NC) milling machine working on the same principle. The U S Air Force was the
funding agency for the NC development. Parsons found that card reader is too slow and
approached Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT) to develop a tape reader and
power drive for the proposed machine. The collaboration between Parsons and M I T ran
into difficulties later. U S Air force, then, awarded a contract to M I T. The
Servomechanisms Laboratory of M I T developed the first N C Machine in 1952.
Giddings and Lewis, General Electric and Bendix are the companies who took interest in
developing NC technology, in its early years.

The development of the machine hardware and the programming technique called
Automatic Positioning of Tools (APT) was undertaken almost simultaneously at MIT. It
must also be noted here that another project undertaken at that time at M I T (Whirl Wind
Project) led to development of Interactive Computer Graphics. This ultimately led to the
development of CAD technology through stages like 2-D drafting, 3-D modeling, surface
modeling, solid modeling etc. The project to develop drives resulted in the development
of DC variable speed drives. The first CNC system developed at MIT used relays.
Subsequent developments in electronics and VLSI design led to the development of
present generation CNC machines and computer aided manufacturing technology. The
efforts to integrate CAD and CAM and later all other activities connected with
manufacture resulted in the development of Computer Integrated Manufacturing. (CIM).
It can be said that the path breaking development of John Parsons is the beginning of the
CIM technology.

Presently, all the NC machines produced are computer numerical control machines,
as the NC system (or CNC system) is designed and built around one or more
microprocessors. CNC Machine tools now form a major part of output of machine tools
in advanced countries. Table 5.1 gives the status of CNC Machine tool production in
India in 2002.

205
 Table 5.1 Production of CNC Machines in India During 2002

Type of Machine Number

Lathes 732
EDM 339
Vertical Machining Centre 251
Horizontal Machining Centre 37
Other Types of machining Centres 6
Boring 12
Milling 41
Grinding 49
Gear Cutting 25
SPM 27
Bending, Folding etc. 82
Punch, Shear etc. 20
Others 34
(Courtesy: Indian Machine Tool Manufacturers Association)

5.3.1 GENERATIONS OF CNC MACHINES

Development of CNC machines closely followed the developments in computer
technology. Therefore the generations of CNC technology bear a close resemblance to
generations of digital computers.
First Generation: The control system of the first generation numerically controls
machines was built with vacuum tubes and associated devices. The system was bulky,
consumed lot of power and reliability was poor.
Second Generation: Second Generation machines were built with transistors. The
size of the control elements was reduced. However, all the functions had to be realized
through electronic circuits. The number of printed circuits boards was large. Since there
were thousands of components and connections involved, the reliability was again poor.
Third Generation: Third generation NC machines were built with integrated circuits.
The IC’s with medium scale integration improved the reliability of the system. Drive
technology also made considerable progress. Thyristor controlled DC drive become
popular during this period. Reliable and compact DC controllers were developed both for
main drives and for the control of servomotors for axes feed drive.
The various logic functions in the early NC systems (during 50’s and 60’s) were
realized through fixed circuitry and hence were called hard-wired systems. The
integration of minicomputers with NC machines that led to the development of CNC
machine tools was one of the two major significant developments during mid 60’s.
Initially minicomputers were interfaced with NC machine tools. This development helped
to introduce the much-needed flexibility. From the totally hardwired design, the design of
the NC machine tools became soft-wired. Instead of reading and executing programs
block by block it was now

206
possible to store the program in the computer memory and execute the program. Several
limitations of the NC systems could also be overcome by CNC systems. Program editing
became much easier and several NC functions could be implemented in software. The
other development was the evolution the concept of Direct Numerical Control (DNC)
technique by which several NC machine tools could be controlled from a single
computer. This technology enabled the NC user to by-pass the tape reader and control a
number of NC machine tools from a single computer. DNC system manufacturers also
introduced the concept of NC data transfer from a computer or remote station using
telecommunication wires. A detailed description of DNC systems is provided later in this
chapter.
Fourth Generation: Towards the end of 70’s the computer design underwent changes
and microprocessor came to be used as the CPU of computers. This change also
influenced the design of NC machines. The designers started developing NC systems
around microprocessors. This simplified the logic and control and design and instead of
several PCB’s in the case of NC machines, the entire control could be implemented with
just one PCB for CNC machines. Initially 8 and 16 bit microprocessors were used. Later
control systems with several processors (Multi-processing Systems) were introduced. The
reliability of the system was considerably improved. The developments in CNC systems
still continue. Today many CNC systems are based on 32 bit as well as 64 bit
microprocessors. Several personal computer based CNC systems are also available in the
market. Features available in modern CNC systems are discussed later in this chapter.

5.4 TYPES OF CNC MACHINES

Computer numerical control is applied to a variety of machines. Most of these find ready
application in aircraft, automobile and general engineering industry. Some of them are
listed below:
i. Machining Centre
• Horizontal
• Vertical

• Universal

ii. CNC Lathes

iii. CNC Turning Centres

iv. Turn-mill Centres

v. CNC Milling/Drilling Machines, Plane Milling Machines

vi. Gear Hobbing Machines

vii. Gear Shaping Machines

207
 viii. Wire Cut EDM/EDM

ix. Tube Bending

x. Electron Beam Welding

xi. Laser/Arc/Plasma Cutting

xii. Co-ordinate Measuring Machines

xiii. Grinding Machines

• Surface Grinder
• Cylindrical Grinder

• Centreless Grinder

xiv. Tool and Cutter Grinder

xv. CNC Boring and Jig Boring Machines

xvi. PCB Drilling Machines

xvii. Press Brakes

xviii. CNC Guillotines

xix. CNC Transfer Lines, SPM’s

xx. Electrochemical Milling Machines

xxi. Abrasive Water Jet Cutting Machines

xxii. Flow Forming Machines

xxiii. Roll Forming Machines

xxiv. Turret Punch Press

Brief descriptions of some of these machines are given below:

208
5.4.1 MACHINING CENTRES
Manufacture of prismatic components like gear boxes, bulkheads, frames, brackets,
casings, covers etc require milling, boring, drilling, tapping and many other related
machining operations to be performed. Before the introduction of machining centres,
these machining operations had to be carried out on different machines resulting in
considerable lead time for production. Machining centres are very important types of
CNC machine tools and are multifunction machines equipped with automatic tool
changers and are capable of carrying out milling, drilling, reaming, tapping, boring,
counter boring and allied operations without operator intervention for change of tools.
Tool changing is carried out using an automatic tool changer and is accomplished in 0.5
to 6 seconds depending upon the machine.
An indexable tool magazine, which can store several tools, characterizes a machining
centre. The tool magazine may carry 16 to 100 tools depending upon its capacity. An
automatic tool changer (ATC) is provided to pick up the programmed tool from the tool
magazine and mount it on the spindle. The removed tool is put back into the magazine
and the ATC picks up the next tool. The ATC is thus ready with the tool for the next
operation and awaits the current operation to be over to replace the tool.
Machining centres are often provided with two or more work tables called pallets. In
a 2-pallet machine while the job on one pallet is being machined, the operator can set up
the next job on the free pallet. The automatic pallet changer (APC) then moves away the
pallet with the finished job from the working zone and moves the other pallet with the
new workpiece to the working zone. The machining operation on the new workpiece
begins with a lapse of only a few minutes.
The operator can now unload the finished job from the first pallet and set up a new
workpiece on it without interruption of the machining operations.
There are machining centres with six, eight or more pallets. Workpieces can be set up
in all pallets and the machine can be programmed to accept a new pallet when work on
the previous pallet is completed. The workpieces may be different and may require
different part programs. The supervisory computer will do the selection of the right
program. Thus the two major sources of non-productive time (tool change and setting up
the workpiece) are reduced to very low values. This enables machining centres to have
high productivity as well as considerable reduction in the lead-time of production of
complex components. This also reduces work in process (WIP) appreciably.
Machining centres are classified according to the spindle configuration as:
a. Horizontal spindle machining centres
b. Vertical spindle machining centres
c. Universal machining centres

209
 5.4.1 Horizontal Spindle Machining Centres

Horizontal spindle machining centres are generally single spindle machines with
automatic tool changers. Some exceptions are machines with turret type tool magazine,
combination horizontal/vertical spindles etc. Horizontal spindle machining centres are
generally bed type machines with the structural configuration as shown in Fig5.11

Fig. 5.11 Horizontal Machining Centre (Courtesy: AMS)

210
In this type of machining X-axis table or column provides traverse and spindle head
provides Y-axis traverse. The saddle or column, or headstock or spindle head provides
the Z-axis traverse. The axes of machining centre are also shown in Fig. 12.11. These
machines are invariably used with a rotary indexing table to facilitate multiphase
machining at different angles in a single setup. The axis of rotary table is parallel to Y-
axis and is called ‘B’ axis.

The rotation of the table can be used for machining contours on surfaces of
workpieces located on the rotary table, if CNC control is available for B-axis. The
provision of B-axis enables the machining of all the four sides of the component in one
set up. Use of modular fixtures on horizontal machining centers permits machining of
more or more components in one set up, thereby increasing productivity and reducing
machining cost. Table5.2 gives the specifications of a typical horizontal machining
centre.

Table 5.2 Specifications of a typical Horizontal Machining Centre

Traverses
Saddle -—longitudinal X-axis 800 mm
Spindle head-vertical Y-axis 700 mm
Column-cross Z axis 800 mm
Feeds
Rapid traverse all axes 12000 mm/min
Feed rate all axes 1-4000 mm/min
Spindle
Spindle taper BT 50
Speed Infinitely variable
Range 20-4000 rpm
Power 15 kW (AC)
Automatic Tool Changer (A T C)
Tool capacity 32 (nos)
Maximum tool diameter 100 mm
Maximum tool length 400 mm
Tool changing time 4 sec
Tool selection Random bi-directional
Accuracies: (Japanese Industrial Standard)
Positioning accuracy +/– 0.005
Repeatability +/– 0.0025
Index table (1)
Position accuracy +/– 3 sec
Repeatability +/– 2 sec
Automatic Pallet changer
No. of pallets 2 nos
Pallet changing time 40 sec

211
 The present day trend is to build the machines with traveling column construction
with all the movements behind the tool so that the work module is independent of the
basic machine. This enables choice of work holders to suit the user’s requirements and
also enables the use of machining centre in NC transfer lines.

5.4.1.2 Vertical Spindle Machining Centres

Figure 5.12 shows a typical vertical spindle machining centre

Fig. 12.12 Vertical Spindle Machining Centre (Courtesy: AMS)

212
 Vertical spindle machining centres are also bed type machines with:
1. Single spindle and automatic tool changers
2. Multi spindle with turret head (Turret machining centres) X-
axis traverse provided by table or column

Y-axis traverse provided by the saddle or the column or ram

Z-axis traverse provided by the headstock
Vertical spindle machines are not suitable for large widths as this increases the throat
distance. For very large widths horizontal spindle configuration or bridge type
configuration (double column planer type) is used. Table 12.3 gives specifications of a
typical vertical machining centre.

Table 5.3 Specifications of a Vertical Machining Centre

Effective table area (mm) : 550 x 1400
Loading capacity of table (kg) : 1500
Travels (mm)
X-axis : 1000
Y-axis : 550
Z-axis : 550
Distance (mm) from spindle to table surface : 200 -—750
Distance (mm) from spindle centre to column front face : 590
Rapid traverse (m/min) : 15
Feed rate (mm/min) : 1 -—4000
Spindle diameter (mm) : 100
Spindle nose taper : JIS -—6101 -—No: 50
Spindle speed (rpm) : 20 -—4000
Spindle drive motor (kW) : AC 7.5
30 min rating (kW) : 10
Automatic tool changer:
No. of tools : 40
Max.tool weight (kg) : 15
Max.tool dimensions (mm) : 120 x L400
Tool selection : Random Memory
(Bi-directional)
Machine weight (kg) : 7800

5.4.1.3 Universal Machining Centres

These are similar to horizontal machining centres but with the spindle axis capable of
tilting from horizontal to the vertical position continuously under computer control. This
constitutes the fifth axis of the machine. In some cases tilting of the table instead of the
spindle provides the movement. Such machines facilitate access to the top surface of
workpiece mounted on a horizontal machining centre so that all the five sides of a

213
component can be machined in a single set up. The fifth axis facility is essential for
machining of some components, which require the cutter axis to be perpendicular to the
surface being machined. Machining centres can be easily integrated into a flexible work
cell. Provision of bi-directional random memory tool magazines, automatic tool offset
measurement, magazine changers, advanced tool management techniques, tool breakage
detection techniques, rail guided work transport, palletizing stations, in-process gauging,
devices for automatic workpiece loading and unloading etc., are useful options to
improve productivity and to realize flexibility in operation and to achieve unmanned
operation of machining centres.

5.4.1.4 Recent Advances in Machining Centres

Some of the recent technological developments in machining centres are described
below:

214
 i. Vector Spindle Drive
Vector drive optimizes the slip angle between the rotor and the
stator of the spindle motor to double the low speed torque and
acceleration resulting in a fast and most powerful spindle. Fig.
12.13 shows typical torque speed characteristics of vector control
drive.
ii. Brushless A.C. Servomotors
A typical A.C. servomotor used in a machining center will have
32000 divisions per revolution for high accuracy. These motors
provide higher acceleration/ deceleration rates, higher power and
reliability.

POWER

TORQUE

RPM OF MOTOR

Fig. 5.13 Vector Drive

iii. Hydraulic Counterbalance

Conventional lead and chain counterweight systems used in machines are
found to cause a bouncing effect during peck drilling, shock during quick
reversals, vibration etc. These affect the quality of the surface finish of the
component. Hydraulic counterbalance eliminates the bounce, reduces the z-axis
inertia to half and provide a smooth and fast Z-axis response.
iv. Spindle Cooling
With the introduction of high speed spindles, considerable amount of heat is
generated at the spindle and this heat unless removed will cause thermal distortion
to the spindle head. Spindle cooling has therefore become very critical. Several
innovative techniques are used to remove the heat generated in the spindle. A
common method adopted is to circulate refrigerated oil to the bearings. In another
design, cool air is drawn from the rear of the machine and is allowed to exit at
the top of the spindle, thereby effecting cooling through natural heat convection.

215
 v. Electronic Spindle Orientation
Spindle orientation is important for smoother and faster tool change. Electronic
orientation used in the machining centres provides reliable and trouble free
operation and enables reduction in tool changing time.
vi. High Speed Machining Centres
High-speed machining centres have spindle speeds ranging 12 000- 50 000 rpm.
These machines are usually designed with hybrid (ceramic) bearings, oil mist
lubrication and water or oil cooling of spindles for maintaining constant
temperature. Dynamic feed drives with low friction ball screws and linear roller
guide ways are some of the special features of these machines. These machines
are fitted with control systems, which feature processors and intelligent control
strategies that provide extremely rapid response and precise traverse. Some of the
features include advanced look-ahead, various methods of spline interpolation
and full compensation for lag errors.
Two significant aspects of high speed machining centres are high rapid traverse rates
and high spindle speeds. Figure 5.14 compares the rapid traverse rates and spindle speeds
of conventional machining centres and high speed machining centres. The total
machining time can be significantly reduced with high speed machining.

MACHINING TIME
RAPID TRAVERSE RATE

SPINDLE SPEED PRODUCTIVITY

CONVENTIONAL HIGH SPEED

MACHINING MACHINING

Fig. 5.14 Comparison of High Speed and Conventional Machining Centres

216
5URNING
23) CENTRES / CNC LATHES
CNC lathes are widely used in making components with axisymmetric geometry. These
are generally machined with 2-axis control. (Z-axis parallel to the spindle and X-axis
perpendicular to spindle axis). A CNC lathe is shown in Fig. 5.15. Some CNC lathes
have an additional Y-axis. CNC lathes are usually designed with a slant bed for easy
removal of chips, at the same time maintaining the rigidity of a closed box structure. A
chip conveyor (either magnetic or mechanical) is usually provided for easy chip disposal.
The control console is located on the front on top side. The spindle is driven usually by
an infinitely variable speed AC drive through a set of V-belts or poly belts. The high
power series motors employed provide almost constant power for a large portion of the
speed range. High-speed machines usually have integral rotor spindles. AC servomotors
drive the X and Z slides usually. Sliding doors (sometimes automatic) with bulletproof
glass windows are provided for safety and visibility of the machining zone. Hydraulic
chucks are provided for clamping the workpieces. CNC lathes, being high-speed
machines require special highly accurate and well-balanced chucks. Tools are mounted in
indexable turrets which can hold 8, 12 or 16 tools.

Fig. 5.15 CNC Lathe (Courtesy: ACE)

217
 A tool is called in the part program by the number of the pocket in which it is held.
For example T06 means the tool in the 6 th pocket. Tool stations are indexed using a
Geneva mechanism powered electrically or hydraulically. An encoder or a similar device
is used to index the turret. A curvic coupling is used to ensure high accuracy in indexing-
usually 2 to 3 seconds of an arc. Both axial tools (boring tools, Internal grooving tools,
internal threading tools, drills, face grooving tools, taps, dies etc) and radial tools
(external turning, facing, threading, grooving, cut off etc) are mounted on the turret. It is
a good practice not to mount axial tools in adjacent pockets. Tools, which are used more
often, are provided in more than one pocket so that if the tool life of one tool is over the,
other tool can take over the machining work without interruption to facilitate tool change
or indexing of inserts. Short tool holders are recommended for better rigidity. A variety
of adaptors are provided to mount different tools. Tool length offset must be measured
and
input in the memory of the machine. Some machines will have an automatic tool length
offset measuring device, usually mounted on the headstock.
CNC lathes and turning centres are used for chuck work and shaft work. These are
classified as:
(i) Horizontal machines and
(ii) Vertical Machines

The horizontal machines are further classified as:

(i) Chucking machines
(ii) Universal machines

In chucking machines short workpieces held only in the chuck are machined.
Examples of such components are gear blanks, flanges, pump impellers, bearing races
etc. Universal machines have a tailstock, which supports long workpieces like shafts at
their ends.
i. Chucking Machines
Chucking machines usually have shorter beds and a single saddle with
hexagonal, octagonal, disc or drum type turret, which accommodates both ID and
OD tools and two independent saddles with separate turrets. Many of the present
day chuckers offer optional swing-in-tail-stock to facilitate shaft work. During
normal working as a chucker, the tailstock is swung away from the work area.
Chucking machines are fitted with additional sub-spindle to carry out both first
and second operation in the same set up. These spindles will have synchronized
drives to enable transfer of work from one spindle to another. In some machines
the sub-spindle is fixed and work transfer is achieved with the aid of two turrets.
Chucking machines are often fitted with bar feeding mechanisms. Twin spindle
chuckers ensure high productivity. These are used for workpieces, which are to
be finished in two end operations. The first operation is performed on the first
spindle and the second operation on the second spindle. These will have an

218
 automatic work transfer system, which transfers the workpiece from one spindle
to another. The advantage of these machines is that they ensure a continuous
supply of parts for assembly operations. A typical example of a workpiece suited
for such machines is the impeller of a centrifugal pump.

ii. Universal lathes

Universal lathes are suitable for both chucking and for bar work. They are often
fitted with steady rest and follower rest to accurately machine slender
components. 4-axis machines have two turrets; each mounted on an independent
slide and facilitates simultaneous machining with two tools.
Some lathes have rotating tools in the turrets to facilitate off-axis machining such as
drilling, milling, reaming, tapping, boring etc. These machines have in addition to the
conventional X and Z-axes, CNC control of the spindle rotation i.e. C-axis. Such
machines are known as turning centres. Turning centres eliminate the need for separate
setting for milling, drilling and allied operations. Turning centres enable the components
to be finished in one set up thereby reducing lead time and improving the accuracy of
machined parts. An automatic tool changer (ATC) can be used with CNC lathes also
using the Block tooling system of Sandvik or Multiflex tooling system of Widia. CNC
turning centres have rotating tools on the turret. With these tools operations like off-
centre drilling, milling (keyway or slot milling), tapping etc. can be done on workpieces
after turning. A servomotor is provided on the tool turret to drive the live tools.
This requires an additional axis called C-axis (spindle orientation control). Some
machines will have special main drive, which will also serve the function of C-axis drive.
Flexible turning centres are fitted with gantry loading and unloading devices, software
and hardware for in-process and post-process metrology, automatic tool changers,
automatic tool offset measuring devices, automatic offset correction, tool magazines,
automatic chuck changers, chuck jaw changers etc., This type of machines use cartridge
type tools which facilitate automatic tool change. Flexible turning centres easily get
integrated in a CIM set up.

219
 Productivity of CNC turning centres could be increased by attaching a gantry device
for unloading and loading of components. Another approach is to use a robot for loading
and unloading the component. Fig. 5.16 shows a typical robotic loading device.
Fig. 5.16 Loading a Part Using a Robot (Courtesy- Kuka Robots)

220
iii. Tooling and Turret slide
The present trend is to have a single heavy disc type turret capable of
accommodating both external and internal working tools. Some machines have two
independent slides with one turret on each slide, one for external working tools and
the other for internal tools. This arrangement will need 4-axis CNC. External and
Internal machining can be carried out simultaneously. Alternatively both slides can
be fitted with turrets carrying external turning tools to facilitate simultaneously
machining of steps of the shafts from either direction

5.4.2.1 Vertical CNC Lathes (Turn Mill Centres)

Vertical CNC lathes are widely used for machining heavy components. Figure 5.17
shows a typical vertical CNC lathe. Some of these machines can also be used for milling
operations. Such machines are sometimes known as turn mill centres. This type of
machines is very popular in aerospace industries where components of large diameters
need to be turned, drilled and milled. The machine shown in Fig.5.17 has five axes-four
longitudinal axes and one rotary axis.
5.4.2.2 Multitasking Machines
Multitasking is a recent concept in CNC machines. Multitasking machines incorporate
several processes in a single work center. For example, if a component requires milling,
turning and grinding, a multitasking machine can be designed to carry out all these
operations.
Multitasking machines eliminate this need thereby increasing the integrity of the part.
Another advantage of multitasking is the possibility of cost reduction because of
reduction in set ups, eliminating the need for several fixtures.

X Z

Fig. 5.17 CNC Turn Mill Centre

221
Table 5.4 gives typical specifications of a CNC Turning Centre. Table 5.5 gives typical
specifications of CNC Lathe.
Table 5.4 Specifications of a Typical CNC Turning Centre

Capacity
Swing over bed 580 mm
Max turning dia (chucking) 550 mm
Max turning length 529/1030/1530 mm
Max turning dia (shaft) 400 mm
Type of the bed slant bed
Spindle
Spindle nose/bore A2-8 / dia 80
Speeds
Spindle speed 10-3000
Type of the drive A C drive
Feed Drive
Feed range (Both axes) 1 – 30 000 mm/min
Rapid traverse -—x axis 30 m /min
Rapid traverse -—z axis 30 m / min
Resolution 0.001 mm
Tailstock
Tailstock quill dia/stroke 90/80 mm
Type of the centre MT4
Turret
Turret indexing positions 12
Turning tool shank size 25 x 25 mm
Max shank dia for drilling and boring tools in turret 4 nos
Driven tools 4 nos
Motors
Main motor AC 20 kW
Coolant motor 0.35 kW
Hydraulic pump motor 1.5 kW

Table 5.5 Specifications of a CNC Lathe

Maximum swing over cross slide, mm 170
Maximum swing over longitudinal slide, mm 310
Maximum turning length, mm 250
Main spindle motor, kW 8.5
Main spindle torque, Nm 75

Spindle speeds, rpm 50-5000

Spindle nose A2-8
Travel, mm X 200, Z630
Feed, mm/min 1-30000 mm/min
Rapid traverse, mm/min 30 m/min
Type of tool turret Bi-directional
No. of tools 8

222
5NC24)DRILLING AND MILLING MACHINES
CNC drilling and milling machines are used for production drilling of holes at different
co-ordinate positions in workpieces with automatic cycles consisting of X-Y positioning,
rapid approach of tool to workpiece, drilling with required feed rate to the required depth
and rapid retraction of tool or various types of milling operations. The automatic cycle is
controlled by the CNC system.

5.4.4 CNC GRINDING MACHINES

The grinding process is unique compared to other machining processes in that there is a
very heavy “tool” (wheel) wear and that the process is very sensitive to process
parameters like grinding pressure, speed and feed rates and flow of coolant etc. CNC has
been successfully applied to all types of grinding machines. The workpiece size control is
achieved by some method of automatic wheel wear compensation included in the
grinding cycle or through an interactive in-process gauging system which is interfaced
with the wheel in-feed drive. CNC can be used either to regulate the machine slides to
generate a workpiece or to dress the wheel to the required shape to enable plunge
grinding.

5.4.4.1 Surface Grinding

In horizontal spindle reciprocating table surface grinding machines, CNC is applied only
to the wheel head slide (Y-axis), as the most critical operation in these machines is the
depth control. Conventional hydraulic drives are retained for feed and longitudinal
traverse. In some machines the cross feed is replaced by an electric drive with a timer
circuit or open loop control for feed. A closed loop control on the cross feed axis can be
used directly to generate contours in the Y-Z plane while reciprocating the table in the
longitudinal axis or to contour-dress the wheel for plunge grinding. In some cases the
longitudinal traverse of the table is also provided with an electric drive. Table5.6 gives
specification of a typical surface grinding machine.
Table 5.6 Specifications of Typical Surface Grinding Machine
Technical Specifications:
Hydraulic pump motor 1.5 kW
Maximum size of workpiece, (mm) 650×400
Maximum height of workpiece, (mm) 405
Table size (including the guards), (mm) 1885×470
Contd....

223
 Average table speed, (m/min) 0 -—30
Automatic cross feed on the table reversal, (mm) 0 -—20
Grinding wheel diameter, (mm) 300 × 50
Spindle speed, (rpm) 1450 -—2900
Automatic vertical feed on table or saddle reversal, (mm) 0.005 -—0.025
Installed power, (kW) 11

5.4.4.2 Cylindrical Grinding

In many cases CNC is provided only for wheel head slide to control diameters. In some
cases CNC is provided for longitudinal traverse and wheel head traverse (2-axis) to control
length of shoulders and diameter steps. Workpiece size is achieved by dressing the wheel
with reference to fixed dressing point or by use of an interactive size control unit. Such
machines can generate solids of revolution involving tapers, circular arcs and curved
surfaces. Similar controls are available for internal grinders. Table 5.7 gives specifications
of typical cylindrical grinding machines.
Figure 12.18 shows the schematic arrangement of a CNC grinding machine. X-axis is
the in-feed direction of the grinding wheel. The longitudinal traverse of the grinding
wheel is the Z-axis. The spindle rotation is the S1 axis. If the grinding wheel rpm is
programmable, it provides the S2 axis. Swiveling of the wheel head is B-axis. Swiveling
axis for dressing the wheel is the A-axis. C-axis is also provided on some machines.
Figure shows only X, Z and S1 axes.

Table 5.7 Specifications of a Typical Cylindrical Grinding Machine

Job accommodation
Height of centres 180 mm
Grinding dia min/max 20/300 mm
Distance between centres 1000 mm
Work head
Barrel taper MT5
Barrel actuation
Forward/reverse Hydraulic

Table
Type of drive AC
Feed rate 0.01 -—12 m/min
Rapid traverse 12 mm / min
Wheel Head slide
In-feed stroke 300 mm
Type of drive AC

Rapid traverse 6/6min

Feed rate 0.01 -—6000 mm/min

224
 Configuration Right hand angular wheel
/ straight wheel
Approach angle 30 deg / 0 deg
Size of wheel max 750 mm
Wheel peripheral speed 45 m/min
Wheel head power 17.5 kW
Type of drive AC

Spindle Head

Grinding
X Wheel
Wheel
S1 Head

Tailstock

Fig. 5.18 Cylindrical Grinding Machine

5.4.4.3 Tool and Cutter Grinders

CNC has been applied to complex tool and cutter grinders involving as many as eight
axes. The control system working in an interactive mode with the part program residing
in the memory leads the operator step by step reducing the programming effort to the
absolute minimum.

5.4.4.4 Profile Grinders

CNC has been used to advantage even on optical profile grinders. The control system has
linear, circular and helical interpolation to generate complex contours, and has provision

225
to dress the wheel and to compensate for wheel wear. Optics serves for tool setting,
positioning the workpiece, checking wheel dressing and inspection of workpiece without
removing it from the fixture.

5.4.5 ELECTRICAL DISCHARGE MACHINING

Electric discharge machine is an important machine in tool rooms. There are several
types of electric discharge machines, which are fitted with computer numerical control.

5.4.5.1 Ram Type EDM

In this type of machine the electrode has to have the same size and shape of the
counterpart of the workpiece being machined. Servo control is used to maintain the gap
between the electrode and the workpiece.

5.4.5.2 Orbital EDM

In this type of machines, the electrode is in the form of a ball-ended cutter and spins
about its own axis. The relative position of the electrode and workpiece is regulated by a
3-axis CNC system to generate any three dimensional surface.

5.4.5.3 Wire EDM

Wire cut EDM is an indispensable machine in tool rooms. This is used to make dies for
blanking and piercing. The special feature of wire EDM is that the electrode is in the
form of a thin wire of about 0.2 mm in dia. A small hole is drilled into the workpiece and
the wire electrode is threaded through the workpiece onto a take-up roll. The movements
of the work table through computer numerical control in X and Y directions enable
cutting the component to the required shapes. In some cases where a relief is required for
the die or the punch being machined, a 3-axis NC is used to tilt the wire axis relative to
workpiece surface in the required direction. The direction of tilt varies with the contour
and is controlled by the third axis of the CNC. Some of the latest wire EDM machines
have the automatic drilling and self threading facility.

5.4.6 TURRET PUNCH PRESS

CNC has become very popular with punching and nibbling machine used for sheet metal
work. Many of these machines are equipped with a turret head. Such machines are called
turret punch presses. This machine is widely used in press shops. Main application of the
turret punch press is to cut various types of holes/openings in sheet metal for
manufacturing machine frames or control cabinets out of sheet metal. Modular tooling
systems available simplify tooling. Interactive programming facilities are available with
the machine controls. Off line programming and simulation are adopted to utilize the
machine fully and to obtain correct workpiece. Some of the turret punch presses have an
additional plasma arc or a laser cutting head to generate contoured patterns. Some of the
latest machines have automatic work handling, automatic tool change and automatic

226
measuring systems interfaced with the machine. CNC has also been applied to other
forming machines such as plate bending, tube bending, flow turning and stretch forming
as well. Table 5.8 gives specifications of a typical CNC Turret Punch Press.

Table 5.8 Specifications of a Typical Turret Punch Press

Sheet size with one reposition 2040 x 1540 mm

Axis speed 40 m/min
Max sheet weight 75 kg
Max material thickness (MS) 6.35 mm
Punching accuracy +/-0.13 mm
Turret layout 15 stations
Nibbling rate 180 hmp
Max hit rate @25 mm increments 180 hmp
Ram stroke 25 mm
Minimum material thickness 0.8 mm
Press motor 4.5 kW
Axis drive AC servo
Clutch Air combination
Brake Air combination
Weight 8100 kg
Regrinding life of punch 10 mm

5.4.7 GEAR CUTTING MACHINES

CNC has been introduced to automate various types of gear cutting machines.
• Gear Hobbing Machines
• Gear Shaping Machines

• Gear Grinders

• Bevel Gear Generators

CNC enables elimination of change gears in gear cutting machines. The relative
rotary and translation movements of the tool and the workpiece are controlled by CNC
systems and can be easily programmed through keyboard of CNC system to facilitate
quick setting up of the machine. CNC gear cutting machines employ the concept of an
electronic gearbox. CNC increases both the productivity and accuracy of gear cutting
machine appreciably.

Three to six-axis control is very common in CNC gear hobbing machines. Many
CNC gear hobbing machines incorporate direct hob drives, automatic hob shift, quick-

227
change hobs, and automatic hob head swiveling. High-speed hob spindles make effective
use of multi-start TiN coated, carbide coated or carbide insert hobs. Table 12.9 gives
specifications of a typical Gear Hobbing Machine.
Use of CNC in gear shaping machine eliminates the need for change gears. CNC
control is provided for the axial movement of cutter head slide, radial movement of
column slide, rotary movement of cutter spindle and rotary movement of worktable.

Table 5.9 Specifications of a Typical Gear Hobbing Machine

Max dia of workpiece 200 mm

Max module in steel 6m25)
Max axial travel 250 mm 6/120
Min/max no. of teeth
Working range 215/60 mm
Dia of work table/bore 220 (max): 20 (min)
Distance between hob and work axis Max 150 mm
dia. of hob 220 mm
Max length of hob Max hob 170 mm
shift Max helix angle 45 deg

Speeds and feeds

Hob speed 120-500 rpm
Work speed 50 rpm
Axial feed 1-3000 mm/min
Radial feed 1-3000 mm/min
Tangential feed 1-540 mm/min
Hob swiveling 1-500 deg/min
CNC system 6xes CNC control system, Sinumerik
3GA with electronic Gear box for
synchronization

Power 26)
Main motor 12.5 kW

228
5.4.8 CNC PRESS BRAKES
A press brake is basically a sheet bending machine. This machine finds extensive use in
fabrication of control panels, enclosures etc. Provision of CNC increases the productivity
and significantly improves the quality of the final product. CNC systems of press brakes
provide interactive help for programming. A tool library is also provided. Simulation
capability in the programming software helps in the development of correct programs.

5.4.9 SPECIAL PURPOSE CNC MACHINES

Many SPM’s are now designed with computer numerical control to provide the necessary
flexibility to the machine. A typical example is a moving column SPM that is designed
for boring and reaming operations. Under the guidance of CNC the tool is positioned at a
desired point or the tool is made to follow any contour for machining operations. Switch
over from one type of machining operations to other is completely automatic through the
provision of Automatic Tool Changer (ATC). The column traverse and fixed table
module contribute to higher transfer efficiency and flexibility in line production. Hence
these CNC special purpose machines can be integrated with other machine tools into
flexible manufacturing line for greater flexibility in producing a variety of totally finished
components. Table5.10 gives specification of a moving column SPM. CNC is also used
in transfer lines today

229
Table 5.10 Specifications of Moving Column SPM

Traverse
Saddle X-axis 630 mm
Spindle head Y axis 400 mm
Column Z axis 500 mm
Feeds
Rapid traverse all axes 14000 mm/min
Feed rate all axes 14000 mm/min (step less)
Spindle
Spindle Taper BT 50
Speed Infinitely variable
Range 120-3000 rpm
Power 7.5 kW
Type of motor Variable Speed AC
Spindle thrust 1000 kg
Automatic Tool Changer (ATC)
Tool capacity 12 (nos)
Maximum tool diameter 100 mm
Maximum tool length 270 mm
Tool changing time 8 sec
Tool Selection Random bi-directional
Accuracies: (JIS)
Positioning accuracy +/– 0.012
Repeatability +/– 0.006
Hydraulic power pack
Motor power 3.7 kW
CNC system SINUMERIK 3M
Power requirement 35 KVA

5.4.10 Other CNC Machines/ Accessories

CNC is used to control several other machines. Some of them are:
i. Horizontal / Vertical boring machines
ii. Jig boring and jig grinding machines

iii. Plano millers

iv. Co-ordinate measuring machines

v. CNC welding machines

230
 vi. Assembly machines
vii. Printed circuit board drilling machines

viii. CNC forming machines

• Tube bending machines

• Plate bending machines

• Stretch forming machines

• Flow forming machines

ix. Tool handling systems

x. Work handling systems

xi. Cleaning and washing stations

xii. Heat treatment equipment

xiii. Packaging equipment

xiv. Electron beam welding machine

xv. Fettling machines

xvi. CNC press brakes

xvii. Laser cutting machines

xviii. Water jet cutting machines.

5.4.11 USE OF CNC MACHINES AS INSPECTION MACHINES

Since CNC machine slides are fitted with feedback devices, they can also be used for post
process metrology. Many of the present day machines are fitted with touch trigger
probes, which can be used for inspection of workpiece and for setting the tool offsets. On
machining centres the probe can be stored in one of the pockets of the tool magazine. The
probe is inserted into the spindle under program control and then can be used like a co-
ordinate measuring machine to inspect the component being machined.

231
 The probe can be used to compensate for fixture offsets, thermal deformations etc. A
similar probe located at a fixed reference point can be used to set the offsets of the tools
located in the spindle. Such probes are also used on turning machines to set the tool
offsets and for monitoring the size of the workpiece.

5.FEATURES OF CNC SYSTEMS

27)
The brain of a CNC machine is the control system. This is designed around one or more
of the advanced microprocessors. Because of the advancement in the hardware
technology, CNC systems are highly reliable with a very high mean time between
failures. Several control systems, which are dedicated to different families of machines,
are available today. Each model will have several variations to cater to the various
requirements of machine tool builders and users. Several new CNC systems are fitted
with PC based CNC systems too. A CNC system can be fitted to machine tools in order
to effect control over several machine functions. In order to perform these functions, a CNC
system is characterized by a number of features. These functions can be broadly classified as
follows:
i. Control system features
ii. Memory features

iii. Programming features

iv. PLC features

v. Diagnostic features

5.5.1 CONTROL SYSTEM FEATURES

These features provide information about the characteristics of the CNC system and its
capabilities. Important features are given below:

5echnology
28) of System
Currently two types of architectures are being used in CNC systems
(i) Single microprocessor based systems
(ii) Multi microprocessor based systems (Multiprocessor systems)

Single microprocessor architecture: In this type of system a 16, 32 or 64 bit

microprocessor is used.
Multiprocessor architecture: This type of the architecture is widely used in many
CNC systems today. The control functions are carried out by a set of microprocessors,
each doing an assigned task. This concept helps to implement various functions faster.
Both hardware and software structures are modular thereby enhancing the flexibility of
the system.

232
5.5.1.2 Executive Program
The executive program contains the intelligence needed to carry out different tasks in
CNC system. The executive program is resident usually in EPROM/Bubble memory.

5.5.1.3 Other System Features

Other features of CNC system are:
• C R T display and alphanumeric keyboard
• Manual data input (M D I) and operator programming

• System resolution, ex: 0.1 m, 0.5 m, 1 m or 10 m

• Feed and rapid traverse rates

• Spindle Speeds -—directly programmable or through S codes

• Modes of operation like M D I, Single step, Auto etc.

• Operating controls like Jog, f cheduleand spindle speed override, axis select
switch, edit, reference, dry run, test mode

5.5.1.4 Axis Calibration

This is a very useful feature for obtaining higher positioning accuracy. The error in the
pitch of the lead screw can be compensated with this feature.
5.5.1.5 Reversal Error (Backlash) Compensation
Backlash is due to the play between the screw and nut. Backlash will cause lost
motion when the slides are reversed. Even pre-loaded ball screws may develop
backlash in the course of time. This feature effects automatic compensation every
time the slide is reversed. Error due to backlash in the lead screw can thus be
minimized.

5.5.1.6 Pitch Error Compensation

There are several classes of accuracy for ball screws. There will always be some
error from pitch to pitch, however accurate the screw may be. Pitch error will cause
error in positioning as well as thread cutting. Hence there is a need to compensate
pitch error. The positioning errors that might arise due to error in pitch are
compensated through software.

5.5.1.7 Tool Nose Radius Compensation

The radius of the tool will introduce positioning errors in contouring. This error is

233
compensated by the tool nose radius compensation function.

5.5.1.8 Machine Setup Data (MSD)

MSD or machine tool parameters indicate the machine tool characteristics,
specifications and functions. The contents of each parameter should be set
according to the parameter list annexed to the machine. The end user must not
change the contents on the parameters. The OEM can use one standard control on
several machine sizes and/or types.

Entering machine parameters: These are three methods of entering machine

parameters.

i. Setting through parameter CD-ROM-each block contains a machine set up data

code to identify the machine parameter followed by data for that parameter.
ii. Setting data through MDI -—the machine data can be input through the operator’s
control panel by following the procedure for the control system.
iii. Setting data in EPROM’s -—machine parameters can be entered in the erasable
programmable read only memories. The data is permanently stored in specific
locations in the memory chip. To enter the set up data in EPROM, an EPROM
programmer is necessary.

12.5.2 MEMORY
FEATURES

Design Application Features

Executive storage EPROM Non- volatile and widely used
Part program storage Dynamic RAM Semi conductor memory
CMOS RAM Fast access and volatile
Bubble memory Nonvolatile, slower than semi-
conductor memory
Machine constant EPROM Nonvolatile and can be field
programmed. Needs battery back up
Memory (parameter) CMOS RAM Intermediate working
Scratch pad RAM MOS RAM
Static RAM area
Off-line data storage Magnetic digital
cassette
Magnetic disc
Floppy disc
Hard disc
CD-ROM

234
5.PROGRAMMING
29) FEATURES
Some standard programming features include:
• Absolute/Incremental programming
• Decimal point programming

• Diameter/Radius Programming

• Linear, circular and helical interpolation

• Multiple part program storage

• Sequence number search

• Feed/min or feed/rev Programming

• Dwell programming (In block containing dwell code, there is no slide movement)

• Tool length and diameter compensation -—The control has a storage area (tool
buffer) for making modification to the program due to errors in tool setting length
and diameters

• Position preset.

5.5.3.1 Subroutine Programming / Macro Programming

Repetitive operations can be written as subroutines and main program can call these
subroutines. An example of subroutine is dressing program for a grinding wheel. The

advantage of using this subroutine is that it eliminates the need for rewriting a repetitive
operation, thereby saving the memory space.
5.5.3.2 Parametric Programming
Parameters are freely assigned by the control for the purpose of arithmetic calculation in
a part program. Trigonometric operations are also possible with R parameters.

5.5.3.3 Canned Cycles (Fixed Cycles)

This is a powerful control feature intended to shorten the length of the part program
thereby conserving memory space. Canned cycles are single block multi pass fixed
cycles.
Examples: Canned cycles for rough turning and peck drilling in CNC Lathes. Canned
cycles for drilling, boring and tapping in machining centres.

235
5.5.4 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER
Programmable logic controller is a software oriented machine interface between the CNC
system and machine tool functions such as miscellaneous functions (coolant on / off,
pallet operation, spindle speed functions (M00, M01, M03, M04, etc) and tool functions).
Signals from CNC to PLC are on /off type. The programmable logic controllers available
today are microprocessor-based units, which are integrated into the CNC system. The
programmable logic controllers have memory space to store interface programs.
Some of the common P L C features are listed below:
• Number of inputs and outputs 24, 32, 48 etc., (Both analog and digital)
• Memory capacity 4 k, 8 k etc.

• High-speed microprocessor to execute sequence program processing time of the

order of milliseconds

• Software timers and counters

• Data exchange between CNC and PLC

5.5.5 DIAGNOSTIC FEATURES

The CNC systems have diagnostics features for faults or error conditions. Diagnostics are
software programs, which check the functioning of the CNC system at various levels.
The control system manufacturer gives detailed use and applications of these diagnostic
programs. Diagnostics can be grouped as follows:
i. Real time diagnostics
ii. On-line diagnostics

iii. Off-line diagnostics

Real Time Diagnostics:

D C power supply voltages, low voltage and real time clock are monitored. In case of
failure of any one of these, control system automatically assumes the emergency stop
conditions and shuts down the drives.
On-line Diagnostics:
On-line diagnostics are active during machine operation. Diagnostic messages are
either readable from C R T screen or from LED Indicators. Program diagnostics detect
programming errors. (Syntax, Parity etc.)
Off-line Diagnostics:
It is provided in the form of a CD-ROM or ROM board (PCB). Following a
malfunction, the off-line diagnostic programs are to be loaded which check the different
areas of the system and respond with error codes / error description on C R T Display.
Diagnostics are very powerful features of CNC systems. To be productive, the system
236
should have a low MTTR (Mean Time to Repair).
Remote Diagnostics:
It is now possible to send diagnostic programs through Internet to check the errors in
CNC Machines. This enables manufacturers to locate faults even if the machine is located
in a remote place in another country.

5.5.6 SOME FEATURES OF MODERN CNC SYSTEMS

(i) Advanced hardware architecture: Custom built very large scale integrated
circuits (VLSI) which can handle several functions in a single chip are used in
modern CNC systems. This way, the benefits of reduced component count and
improved reliability are realized.
(ii) Software modularity: Each function is written as a discrete module -—(structured
programming). Additional software features can be added at any time to upgrade
the control without affecting the software.

(iii) Adaptive control: Reduces the production time by maximizing the utilization of
the machine tool. It acts on measurement taken from external sensors (In-process
measurement) and modifies the cutting conditions suitably.

(iv) Conversational programming: The system featuring conversational programming

are termed “user friendly” since they are designed with the operator in mind. One
example of such a friendly feature is graphic display. With this feature, the
operator can create the part drawing on screen and simulate the tool paths in the
preparatory phase (Prior to machining). The operator can program in complete
safety and be sure that nothing is omitted. The operator can also check the
correctness of the part program on graphic display.

(v) Programming flexibility: In addition to conversational part programming

language, high level language commands like IF-THEN ELSE, GO TO etc., can
be used to extend the program’s power. Higher mathematical functions can be
used to calculate square roots, trigonometric functions etc.

(vi) DNC link. This is discussed separately in detail later.

(vii) Colour graphics: This provides visual interface between the operator and CNC.
Part cross sections can be highlighted. Operating instructions and warning
display can be colour coded for more clarity.
(viii) Machine interface: A high-level language like C is used for programming the
machine logic in PC (example: GE 2000 MC). In AB8600, high-level language
SIPROM (System Interface-Programming) is used.

(ix) Automatic selection of cutting speeds: If we specify the tool material and work

237
 material, C N C System selects cutting speed and feed from cutting condition
technology database.

(x) Automatic selection of tools and sequencing of tools: If operation is specified,

system selects corresponding tools and sequence of tools. Systems like Mazak
Fusion 640 provides this knowledge based approach.

(xi) Optimization of machine program: This feature will be useful for components
with large number of drilling, tapping operations, or repetitive end milling tool
paths as in the case of machining of dies and molds etc.

(xii) Display of finished component: Today CNC systems offer a feature to display
the finished component together with dimensions. Sectioning and rotation of the
model of the finished part are also possible.

(xiii) Background programming: It is a common facility available in CNC systems.

The user can run, edit and simulate another program while a program is being
executed on the machine tool.

(xiv) Digital CNC: The new breed of CNC controls use digital technology. The
introduction of digital CNC has brought increased speed and precision to
machine tool builders. The PC based open architecture controls incorporate such
features like acceleration with jerk limitation, direct NURBS interpolation, use of
high level languages, execution of large CNC programs from hard disc and
increased number of zero offsets. In some of the systems the CNC and drive
amplifiers are on the some board at the digital level.

(xv) Look ahead feature: The control system scans 150 or more blocks ahead of the
block that is being executed and carries out interpolation and calculates the
acceleration and deceleration requirements in the case of generation of complex
tool paths. This helps to produce accurate profiles in high speed machining.

5.6 DIRECT NUMERICAL CONTROL (DNC)

Early NC machines used a tape reader for storing and inputting the program into the
memory of the NC machine tool. Because of the unreliability of the tape reader as well as
the low speed of operation NC engineers were searching for a suitable alternative. The
advent of CNC in mid-sixtees opened up the possibility of improving the performance of
NC machines by interfacing them with minicomputers. Yet another significant
technological development was the interfacing of several NC machines with a computer,

238
which can store the part programs and transfer them to the NC machine concerned as and
when needed. The computer is connected between the tape reader and the NC machine
thereby bypassing the tape reader. This system was therefore called as behind the tape
reader system (BTR). This development became very popular with NC machine users
because of a number of significant advantages.
i. A number of NC machines can be connected to a single computer. In many cases
a single computer can manage all the machines on a shop floor.
ii. Programs in full or in segments can be transferred to the NC machines in a
multiplexing mode.

iii. The computer can be conveniently used for program editing.

iv. Since the computer has large memories there is no limitation on the number or
size of programs stored.

v. The computer can be used for other tasks like program creation using computer
aided part program generation software as well as for operation management
tasks like production planning, scheduling etc.

With the development of CNC, DNC concept was extended to CNC machines also
mainly for part program management. The DNC computer (sometimes referred to as host
computer) could serve a number of CNC machines in shop floor. Figure 5.19 shows a
typical DNC network. The DNC computer stores all the part programs and transfers the
part programs to the CNC machines in response to the requests of the operators.

DNC COMPUTER

MACHINE 1 MACHINE 2 MACHINE 3 MACHINE 4

Fig. 5.19 DNC System

DNC systems are generally designed for 4, 8, or 16 CNC machines. However, wi

239
th the wide spread acceptance of the local area network concept, the possibility of
connecting more CNC machine in a DNC network has become a reality. The concepts
of Internet, Intranet and Extranet have further enlarged the scope of distributed
numerical control.

5BJECTIVES
30) OF DNC
DNC serves many purposes and is now considered as essential for the efficient
management of CNC machine tools in the shop floor. The main objectives of
implementing DNC are given below:
1. Upload and download CNC programs to and from machine tools
simultaneously and directly from the CNC systems.
2. Easy editing of the existing programs.

3. Eliminating the use of manual switch boxes to multiplex CNC machines.

4. Organizing and cataloguing of all programs for instant access.

5. Eliminating the need for manually punching the program at the keyboard
thereby saving considerable costly machine time.

6. Eliminating the need for paper tape in the old generation of NC machines.

7. Copy programs to and from the floppy discs and other media to the DNC
computer.

8. Compare files edited at the CNC to the original program.

9. Rename or delete or update programs or create new programs.

10. Show pictures of set ups for graphic catalogue of set up and machining
operations.

11. Providing system transaction files of all activity on the DNC computer.

12. Pass word protection at different points of the CNC system wherever the
operator could cause damage to the NC code by overwriting.

13. Tool length offsets from tool pre-setters can be transferred directly to machine
tool controls. It is also possible to connect co-ordinate measuring machines to
DNC networks.

240
 5.6.2 TYPICAL SCREEN OF A CNC SYSTEM
A typical program transfer screen for a DNC system with 4 machines is shown in Fig.
5.20. Besides send and receive, this screen has an option Close that stops the
communication in progress. The option Edit loads a file into the editor. Compare
enables the operator to see the difference between a files edited at the CNC system
against the original file sent to the machine. The option Picture enables the user to
see shop floor graphics.
5.BAR CODE OPTION
Some DNC systems provide an RS-232 bar code reader that is installed at the CNC
system which enables the user to bar code the remote requests to receive and send files at
the CNC. This eliminates typing and possible mistakes.

241
 SEND RECEIVE CLOSE EDIT FILES COMPARE PICTURE EXIT

SEND A FILE TO

COMMUNICATION STATUS WINDOW

MACHINE NAME FILE NAME STATUS SENT/RECEIVED

ACE JOBBER 94432145 SEND 68 %

DMG VMC 73241561 RECEIVE 34 %

DMG HMC 54321456 SEND 96 %

MIKRON 12356432 SEND 09 %

Fig. 5.20 Program Transfer Screen

5ILE
31)MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
A DNC system will have a file management system, which has the following features:

i. Store and display details like file name, date of creation or updating of the file, time of
creation of the file size etc.,
ii. Files can be picked by mouse or arrow keys.

iii. The facility for the use of long description will help easy recognition of the workpiece
from the program name.

iv. Files can be sorted in the ascending or descending order by date/time, size or long
description.

v. Files can be copied, moved or deleted.

242
 A typical Editor screen is shown in Fig. 5.21

FILE NAME LONG NAME SORT TAG <OFF> ACCEPT

C:\DNC\NC FILES[Use Mouse to Toggle Menu]

03450.NC 28-09-04 08:45 BRACKET

12987.NC 30-10-04 12:34 RING

675849.NC 05-12-04 14:50 BULKHEAD

214365.NC 21-02-05 11:15 SPAR

Fig. 5.21 Editor Screen

Another feature of DNC is a provision for creating a report file, which is listing of all
activities on the computer that is constantly written in the background. This is an ASCII
file, which can be exported to databases for MIS purposes.

5.6.5 INTEGRATION OF CAD/CAM SYSTEM WITH DNC

Nowadays CAD/CAM systems are widely used to generate CNC programs. The CAD/
CAM system can be linked to the DNC computer so that the programs created by the
CAD/CAM system can be transferred to the DNC computer for routing to the proper
CNC machines or for editing. A typical LAN, which includes a DNC system and a CAD/
CAM workstation, is shown in Fig. 5.22.
D NC CO MP U TER

CA D/CA M
12

Wo rkstatio ns
Chapter

CN C M achines

Fig. 5.22 CAD/CAM System in a DNC Network

243
5.6.6 DISTRIBUTED NUMERICAL CONTROL
Sometimes the abbreviation DNC is used to denote distributed numerical control. A computer network
for manufacturing may consist of a main frame computer, CAD/CAM work stations, DNC host
computer and the CNC systems connected to it. This configuration can be beneficially used for NC data
processing. Any complex calculations required for generating NC data can be transferred to the more
powerful mainframe computer. Thus the NC DATA processing is done at different hierarchical levels.
In a way many of the DNC systems to day are in fact distributed processing systems.

5.6.7 FUNCTIONS OF A DNC SYSTEM

The functions of a DNC system can be summarized as below:
i. Part Program management: Part program stored in the hard disc can be routed to
appropriate machines in the network depending upon the schedule.
ii. Shop floor editing: Program can be edited or modified to take into account design changes,
ool changes or machine changes.
iii. Shop floor graphics: The tool path simulation can be carried out on the shop floor.

iv. Data collection: The DNC computer can be used for shop floor data collection for
scheduling and monitoring.
v. Shop scheduling: Since NC program cheduleis interlinked with the schedule,
he DNC computer can be used for scheduling.
vi. Statistical Process Control (SPC): The SPC function can be integrated into the working
f the DNC computer as it can be interfaced with the shop floor data collection function.

vii. Tool offset management: Tool offset data is sent to appropriate machine by this function.

The DNC network systems are usually UNIX, Novell or Windows based. They have
multitasking capabilities and Ethernet, arcnet or token ring interfaces. They may also have
limited CAD/CAM capabilities. Efficient built-in security systems will take care of
unauthorized access.

5UNCTIONS AVAILABLE IN A TYPICAL CNC SYSTEM

32)
The functions available in a popular CNC system are listed below:
(i) Controlled axes 2, 3, 4, 5 etc.
etc
(ii) Simultaneous axes 2, 3, 4, 5 .
(iii) Max. programmable dimensions 7 digits
(iv)Linear Interpolation
(v) Multi-quadrant circular Interpolation
T
(vi) hread cutting
(vii)Rapid traverse

244
 (viii)Feed rate override

(ix) Rapid traverse override

(x) Auto acceleration and retardation

(xi) Exact stop

(xii)Dwell

(xiii)Reference point return

(xiv) Co-ordinate system setting

(xv) Decimal point input

(xvi) X axis dia./radius programming

(xvii)Radius programming

(xviii)S, T, M codes

(xix) Program number display

(xx) Program number search

(xxi) Program/subprogram

(xxii)Program format

(xxiii)Optional block skip

(xxiv) Canned cycles

(xxv) No. of offsets

(xxvi) Backlash compensation

(xxvii)Cycle start/Feed hold

(xxviii) Reset
(xxix) Manual continuous feed

245
 (xxx) Incremental feed

(xxxi) Machine lock

(xxxii) Dry run

(xxxiii) Single block

(xxxiv) Registerable programs

(xxxv) Variable tape storage length

(xxxvi) Data protect
(xxxvii) Self diagnostics

(xxxviii) Emergency stop

(xxxix) Stored stop check

(XL) PMC (programmable machine control)

(XLi) Spindle speed
( XLii) T N R C (Tool Nose Radius Compensation)
( XLiii) Custom macros

(XLiv) Run Hour/Part display.

5TANDARD CONTROLLERS
33)
There are large number of manufacturers of CNC controllers. Some of those listed below may not be in
production today.
(i) Acramatic
(ii) Aciera CNC

(iii) AEG

(iv) Allen Bradley

(v) Anilam

(vi) ASEA

(vii) Bendix
246
 (viii) Bosch, 860, 880, alpha 2, alpha 3, CC 100, CC 200, CC 300, CC 330 Bosch micro 5Z, 8Z,
PC (PG), system 5

(ix) Boehringer B1 T, B2 T

(x) Charmilles Robofill

(xi) Cincinnati

(xii) Deckel CNC 2301, contur, FP2-FP4

(xiii) DeVlieg

(xiv) Dixi NC

(xv) Emco-Turn

(xvi) ESAB NCE 301

(xvii) FANUC, 0M, 0T, 3TF, 3M, 3TF 3T, 5M, 6MB, 6MA, 7M, 7T, 9, 10, 11, 12, 15, 20, 20A,
2000, 3000, MATE L, MATE M, MATE TS

(xviii) Fidia

(xix) GE 550, 1050, 1050HL OX, 7542, CNC2000.

(xx) Gildemeister EPL, EPM(UNI), EPM(ITY), EPM(SET), EPM II (BTR) 22

(xxi) Heidenhain TNC 135, 145, 151, 155, 355, 455

(xxii) Heller Unipro 80

(xxiii) Hurco Ultimax B M C40

(xxiv) Kongsberg NC 300, NC 2000

(xxv) MAHO 432

(xxvi) Mandelli

(xxvii) Mazak M1, M2, M32, T1, T2, T3, T4, T32

247
 (xxviii) Meldas 5000

(xxix) NUM 560, 750

(xxx) Okuma OSP 330 D, OSP 2000, OSP3000, OSP5000

(xxxi) Olivetti Contour

(xxxii) Philips 432, 3300, 3353, 6600, 6652.

(xxxiii) Sinumerik Mate TG, PRIMO S, SPRINT T, SPRINT 3T, 3M, 5M, 5T, 6MA,
6TA, 6MB, 6TB, 7M, 7T, 520, 550C, 560K, 810, 820, 850

(xxxiv) Traub TX 7,TX8,TX8D

(xxxv) Toshiba

(xxxvi) Yasnac 3000

(xxxvii) Fagor
Fanuc, Sinumerik and GE-Fanuc are the most popular CNC system manufacturers
today.

5.9 SOME OF THE FEATURES AVAILABLE IN TYPICAL HIGH

END CNC SYSTEM
Recently a new generation of CNC controllers have been marketed by several
manufacturers. Some of their important features are:
(i) Automatic determination of optimum tool path: By using data that is interactively
input to define the workpiece contours artificial intelligence is employed to
determine the optimum approach point and tool path to eliminate unnecessary
tool movement. As a result, the overall machining cycle is minimized.
(ii) Feed spindle orientation: By the use of a digitally controlled AC spindle motor,
spindle orientation is fast and precise.
(iii) Automatic f cheduleoverride: Even though only one f cheduleis programmed for
a machining cycle such as a pocket milling, the optimum f chedulefor both the
in-feed direction and corner cutting is automatically determined. Also when
milling pockets, the f cheduleis automatically changed when machining with full
cutter width and when machining with partial cutter width to maintain the
optimum cutting conditions for the minimum machining time.
(iv) Simultaneous S, M and T functions: Simultaneous operation of different units,
such as the ATC and Machine table indexing, A T C and pallet changer can
performed to greatly reduce machine’s non-cutting time.
248
(v) High speed tapping: The digitally controlled spindle motor allows spindle rotation
and Z axis feed to be synchronized. This advanced design makes high speed, high
precision tapping possible without the use of the floating tap holder. This is also
referred as rigid tapping.
(vi) High speed cutting of complex contours: For complex contours that require
interpolation by extremely small increments, the faster processing of speed of the
32 or 64 bit processor results in a much higher vectorial feed rate than that of
conventional CNC systems.

249
(vii) D N C interface: The 32 or 64 bit CNC mounted on a machine can be linked with
a host computer and transmit and receive data. By DNC interface, information
can be shared.

(viii) MAP compatibility: The 32 bit CNC controllers is designed for MAP
(Manufacturing Automation Protocol) compatibility -—the international
communication standards to be used by equipment in an automated factory.

(ix) Background communication: The high speed 32 bit microprocessors can handle
communications of variety of data -—programs, parameters, tool data and
programs with a host computer simultaneously while in automatic operation.

(x) Absolute position detection: If equipped with absolute position detection

function, a machine does not have to return to the home position prior to
beginning operation. This is especially advantageous for a machining center
controlled by host computer.

(xi) Tool life management, Tool breakage detection and recovery: These functions
resident in the individual machine’s memory can be communicated with the host
computer, thereby facilitating centralized tool management.

(xii) Automatic centering: By the use of a touch sensor mounted in the spindle,
measurement of datum holes and surfaces is performed. Based on the
measurement results, the work co-ordinate system is automatically shifted and
machining begins.

(xiii) Adaptive feed rate control: By continually monitoring the load on the spindle
motor and Z- axis servo motor, optimum cutting conditions are maintained.
When an overload condition is detected, the programmed f cheduleis
automatically overridden. As the cutting load becomes smaller, the feed rate will
automatically return to the programmed value.

(xiv) Process management and program layout displays: The interconnections

between processes and subprograms and processes with commonly used tools are
indicated on these displays for convenient program restarts.

(xv) Automatic tool length measurement: Tool length can be automatically measured
and registered in memory to greatly reduce tool setting time. One setting of the
measurement cycle allows up to 13 tools to automatically processed. (This
process is semi-automatic for face mills and boring bars in that the tool must first
be manually positioned over the measurement unit).

250
 (xvi) Workpiece co-ordinates: When using a tool (such as an edge finder) to establish a
workpiece datum point, all that is required is to enter the tool radius. The
necessary calculations are performed automatically to set the workpiece zero
position. When the optional touch sensor is used the angular offset co-ordinates
can also be set. This allows high machining accuracy to be obtained even with
simple fixtures.
T
(xvii) ool path storage: The tool path storage function can be used to store in memory
the point where a tool breaks during the cutting plus the path used to retract the
cutter for servicing. This allows fast and smooth program restarting.
(xviii) Automatic cutting conditions editing: Programmed spindle speeds and feed rate
are easily altered by override keys according to actual machining conditions. By
pushing an appropriate key, the programmed cutting conditions are automatically
edited by the override amount on an individual tool basis.

(xix) Modal information display: The modal information display indicates which G,
M, S, f codes are effective. This is extremely convenient for error-free restart of
EIA / ISO programs.

(xx) Deflection compensation: Automatic compensation can be performed for the

displacement at one axis in relation to another axis used as the datum.

(xxi) Large reduction of component parts: With a 32 or 64 bit microprocessor as the

core, large capacity memory chips, customs LSI’s and other state of the art
technology used to the maximum, the number of parts is considerably smaller
then that of conventional CNC system resulting in a highly reliable and compact
design.

(xxii) Ladder circuit display: The open and close status of individual circuits are
displayed on the ladder chart on CRT display to help pinpoint the cause of
problems.

(xxiii) Optimization of cutting conditions: Several CNC systems access cutting tool
databases as well as cutting parameter databases. The interactive programming
facilities enable the operator of the machine tool to input the features of the
drawing in the CNC system. The system responds with appropriate tool selection
and cutting parameter selection. Techniques are also incorporated to optimize the
parameters.

251
 5.10 GENERAL PROGRAMMING FEATURES OF CNC
SYSTEMS
CNC systems can be classified into:
(i) CNC Systems for machining centres
(ii) CNC Systems for lathes and turning Centres

(iii) CNC Systems for special applications like Grinding Machines, EDM, Electron
beam welding etc.
There are many features in these CNC systems which are of general interest and some
of them are discussed below:

252
 Absolute and Incremental Programming: Figure 5.23 shows a plate in which 3 holes
are to be drilled. The locations of the holes are indicated in the drawing of the
component. For the purpose of programming, these dimensions should be specified with
respect to the workpiece coordinate system.
The X and Y axes are to be defined first. Figure5.23 shows the X and Y axes at a distance
of 20 mm from the edge of the plate. The coordinates of the three hole locations should
be calculated with respect to these axes.
In the case of absolute coordinate system all the coordinates should be specified with
respect to the workpiece datum. In the case of incremental system, the zero datum is a
floating one. Every coordinate is specified with respect to the previous position.
For machining the three holes the slide should be positioned under the drill spindle
successively in positions 1, 2 and 3. The reference axes are marked in the figure. Thus the
absolute co-ordinates to be used in the program will be:
Position X Y
1 40 50
2 40 100
3 120 60

100
20
30
80

3 1
120

Ø5 Workpiece
Drawing
2

160

120
40 Workpiece
Datum ( X=0, Y=0)
X
Coordinates
50
60
25

with reference
100

to workpiece
datum
Ø5
Fig. 5.23 A Plate with Holes

253
There are three ways in which the co-ordinate data are input to the machine control. They
are:

i. Absolute mode
ii. Incremental mode

iixed mode
34)
In absolute mode, all co-ordinate values are measured from a fixed datum. Referring
to Fig 12.24, W is the workpiece datum (X = 0, Z = 0). Points 1, 2, 3 and 4 have co-
ordinates.

Point X Z
1 0 0
2 20 0
3 20 – 40
–
4 30 40
(Note: In programming CNC lathes, the diameter is input instead of radius)

Tool

T
35
4
3 5

0 0
2 3

40 1

Fig 5.24 Co- ordinates in Turning

254
 In incremental mode, the co-ordinate data input for every movement is the relative
distance from the previous point. For example, when the tool moves from point 3 to point
4, the X distance is +5 and Z distance is zero. Thus, the co-ordinates depend on the axis
movements.

The co-ordinate distances in incremental mode for Fig5.24 are given below:
Point X Z
T to 1 – 35 – 25
1 to 2 + 10 0
2 to 3 0 – 40
3 to 4 +5 0

255
 In mixed mode, the co-ordinates can be either in absolute co-ordinates or incremental
co-ordinates. Absolute co-ordinates are labeled X and Z and incremental co-ordinates U
and W. For the example given, the co-ordinates can also be input as:
In mixed mode, the co-ordinates can be either in absolute co-ordinates or incremental
co-ordinates. Absolute co-ordinates are labeled X and Z and incremental co-ordinates U
and W. For the example given, the co-ordinates can also be input as:
Point Z Z
1 X0 Z0
2 U10 Z0
3 X20 W – 40
4 U+5 W0
In lathes it is convenient to program in mixed mode whereas in the case of machining
centres program segments can be either in incremental or absolute mode or the whole
program can be in either one of the modes.
ii. Preparatory codes and miscellaneous codes:
A typical line of a CNC program (called block) is given below:
N 0040 G01 X100.05 Y180.95 S450 M08;
Every block starts with a block number (3 or 4 digits), (N word); A block may have
one or more G functions. G- functions like G01 if defined earlier and if the value is the
same need not be repeated. For example, in a block if G01 is defined and if the next block
also involves G01, this will be implied and need not be explicitly stated. Such G
functions are called modal G functions. The block may contain the X, Y and Z co-
ordinates of the target point. The feed at which the slide movement is to be executed is
specified in the feed value. (e.g. F equal to 400 mm/min). If the feed is same as specified
in the previous block it need not be repeated again. The spindle speed is specified by the
S address. (e.g. Speed is 450 rpm). The M word represents a miscellaneous function. In
this case M08 switches on the coolant motor. Thus each word has a unique alphabetic
address. Hence this type of formatting the program is referred to as word address format.
Other commonly used word addresses are T for tool, V for cutting speed, A for angle, etc.
G-codes or G functions are mainly NC functions. These are also called preparatory
functions. Some of these have been assigned standard functions and others are left to be
defined by the CNC system manufacturers. Common preparatory functions in a CNC
system for lathes (FANUC 0) include:
(i) Interpolation functions
• Positioning (G00)
• Linear interpolation (G01)

• Circular interpolation (G02, G03)

• Polar co-ordinate interpolation (G112, G113)

• Cylindrical interpolation (G107)

256
 (ii) Thread cutting (G32, G34)
(iii) Feed functions

• Feed per minute (G98)

• Feed per revolution (G99)

• Dwell (G04)

(iv) Reference point

• Automatic reference point return (G28)
• 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference point (G30)

(v) Co-ordinate system setting (G50)

(vi) Inch-metric conversion (G20, G21)

(vii) Constant surface speed control (G96, G97)

(viii) Canned cycles

• Outer diameter cutting cycle (G90)

• Thread cutting cycle (G92)

• End face turning cycle (G94)

(ix) Multiple repetitive cycle

• Stock removal in longitudinal turning (G71)
• Contour parallel turning (G73)

• Finishing cycle (G70)

• Thread cutting (G76)

(x) Canned cycles

• Front drilling (G83)
• Side drilling (G87)

• Front tapping (G84)

257
 • Front boring (G85)

(xi) Compensation function

• Tool Nose radius compensation (G40 -—G42)
• Changing tool offset amount (G10)

(xii) Measurement functions

• Automatic tool offset (G36, G37)
M- Functions are mainly switching functions. These include spindle on/off, spindle
rotation (clockwise or anticlockwise) coolant on/off, tool change, pallet change, turret
indexing etc. Earlier, these functions were incorporated in the NC control itself.
Nowadays, a separate programmable logic controller (PLC) interface is provided so that
the machine tool designer can design his PLC program to incorporate unique control
features. This allows considerable flexibility for the designer. Control of auxiliary
devices like conveyors, robots, pallet loaders, bar feed systems, quick change of chuck
jaw, automatic door open/

258
 CAD/CAM/CIM

close, machining completion buzzer, automatic chuck operation, chuck air blast etc. can
be easily integrated in the machine tools either by the manufacturer or by the user.
interpolation
35)
5 4

2
3
2
1
1

(A ) L inea r Interpolation (B ) C ircula r Inte rpolation -— W

2
1

(C ) C ircula r Inte rpolation -— C W (D ) H elica l Inte rpolation

Fig 5.25 Interpolation Methods

The calculation of successive increments in slide position to reach the

programmable point is called interpolation. Common methods of interpolation
are linear, circular and helical. Figure 5.25 shows commonly used interpolation
methods. Linear interpolation is shown in Fig.(A). Length 12 represents a linear
movement parallel to X axis. Segments 2-3 and 4-5 are movements parallel to Z-
axis. Segment 3-4 involves simultaneous movement in X and Z directions.
Depending on the feed specified in the block the CNC system will calculate the
individual speeds of the slides so that a taper will be cut on the surface of the
workpiece. In Fig.(B) the segment 1-2 is turned using clockwise circular
interpolation. It may be noted that the slide velocities in each axes will have to
continuously vary to obtain the circular profile. This is also true with the counter
clockwise (CCW) circular interpolation shown in Fig.(C). Helical interpolation
used to cut threads in machining centers is illustrated in Fig.(D).

iv. Axes of movement

A CNC machine tool may have several controlled axes. If simultaneous
movements in 2-axes only are available, the control is called 2-axis control. The
CNC lathe will have two axes i.e. X and Z. A turning center will have three axes
i.e. X, Z and C. A machining center will usually have three axes (X,Y and Z).

259
5.11 PROGRAMMING OF CNC MACHINE
TOOLS

CNC programming is a term that refers to the methods for generating the instructions that
drive the CNC machine tool. For two dimensional components with little geometric
complexity, CNC instructions can be written manually. However, as the
geometricalcomplexity increases more sophisticated techniques are required, particularly for 3-
axis, 4-axis and 5-axis CNC machining.
There are three distinct techniques adopted for creating CNC programs:
i. Manual CNC Programming
ii. Programming using CAM software (CAD/CAM based programming systems)

Manual programming is recommended for simple workpieces which require only a few
blocks of program. Programming of complex workpieces requires the help of a CAM software.
CAD/CAM based systems have become popular recently and are now being widely adopted.
Detailed description of these techniques is given in the following section.

260
5.11.1 MANUAL PART PROGRAMMING
This technique is widely used for workpieces of relatively simple geometry. The steps in
manual programming are:
i. Careful study of component drawing- materials, tolerances, surface finish etc
ii. Select the raw material or blank if not specified.

iii. Select the number of set ups necessary and the machine/s on which the part is
machined.

iv. Deciding the workpiece datum for each set up.

v. Designing the fixtures or holding of the job.

vi. Deciding the process and sequence of processes to achieve the desired accuracy
and tolerances

vii. Selecting the tools and cutting parameters.

viii. Writing the program

ix. Input the program and dry run; correct mistakes if any.

x. Produce the first part and inspect.

xi. Correct the program if necessary and progress to lot production.

xii. Create documentation for future reference.

xiii. Archive the program and documentation.

It was mentioned earlier that an NC program will consist of a number of lines called
blocks. Each block will consist of a number of words. Each word will have two
components: a word address and a numeric code representing information. The common
word addresses are:
N -—G -—X -—Y -—Z -—A -—B -—C -—F -—S -—T -—M
where
N = sequence number of instructions
G = preparatory function
XYZABC = co-ordinate and angular data
261
CNC Machine Tools

F = feed
S = spindle speed
T = tool code

M = miscellaneous function
The program is directly input into the machine’s memory through the following
methods:

i. Manual data input through the keyboard of the NC console.

ii. A floppy disc and disc drive or magnetic tape.

iii. DNC mode -—directly from the computer used for programming or storage of
program to the memory of the CNC machine.

iv. The program can be transferred to the machine through a LAN or through
Internet.

Today, another form of programming built in the CNC control itself is gaining
acceptance. Using CNC programming software, the programmer can generate a set of
instructions at the machine control itself. Using basic tool motion commands combined
with canned cycles and custom or user defined macros the programmer can enter
component geometry information on the front panel CRT, provide supplementary
information about tool path and cause the CNC program to be produced automatically
within the machine tool control.
5.11.2 NOMENCLATURE OF THE CNC MACHINES AXES
X

Z z X Z

Y Y X

X Y X

X
Y
Z Z Z

Fig. 5.31 Co-ordinate System

262
 The co-ordinate system for designating the axes is the conventional right hand
co-
ordinate system. Some possible dispositions of these co-ordinates are shown in
the Fig 5.31. One could use his right hand (as shown in Fig.5.32) to get these
alternative relative positions of the same right hand co-ordinate system.

263
 CAD/CAM/CIM

+Y
+Y

+B

+B
C
+
+Z
+X
+C +A
+A

+Z +X
Direction for Rotary Motions

Fig. 5.32 Right Hand Co-ordinate Systems

5.11.3 DESIGNATING THE MOTIONS

i. Location: First of all, Z-motion shall be designated. This shall be followed by X
and Y motions respectively. Z-axis motion is either along the spindle axis or
parallel to the spindle axis.
ii. Direction: For NC machines the positive (+) Z-motion increases the clearance
between the work surface and the tool holder.

iii. When there are several spindles and slides: In such cases, one of the spindles,
preferably perpendicular to the work holding surface may be chosen as the
principal spindle. The primary Z-motion is then related to the primary spindle.
The tool motion of other spindle quills or other slides, which are termed as
secondary and tertiary motions, may be designated as U, V, W and P, Q, R
respectively.

Rotary Motions:
A, B and C defines the primary rotary motions.
i. Location: These motions are located about the axis parallel to X, Y and Z
respectively. If in addition to the above mentioned primary rotary motions, there
exist secondary rotary motions, whether parallel or not to A, B and C those
should be designated as D or E.
ii. Direction: Positive (+) A, B and C are in the directions which advance a right
hand screw in the positive (+) X, Y and Z directions respectively.

Programming of all CNC machine tools are done more or less on similar lines though
there are several variations due to the type of machining involved.
The programming aspects of machining centres are discussed in detail below :

264
5.11.4 PROGRAMMING ASPECTS OF MACHINING CENTRES
A machining centre may be either 3 or 4 or 5 axis machine. A 3-axis machine may have
simultaneous interpolation capability either in two or three axes. A machine usually will

265
CNC Machine Tools

have at least two pallets so that setting up of the workpiece can be carried out on one
pallet while the workpiece on the other pallet is machined. The spindle size is designated
by its taper (ISO 40, ISO 50, BT40 etc.). A distinguishing feature of the machining centre
is the tool magazine which can hold several tools (32, 40, 80, 120 etc). Normally a tool is
identified by the pocket in which it is inserted. The pockets are numbered consecutively.
There will be an automatic tool changer (ATC) which transfers the tool between ATC
and the spindle. While one operation is going on, ATC is ready with the tool for the next
operation. Therefore, while programming, the tool required for the next operation is
called at the start of an operation. Typically the tool changing time varies between 4 to 7
seconds. It may be as low as 0.5 sec in the case of high speed machines.
The datum point or surface for programming can be selected conveniently. There are
a number of possibilities. Similarly a number of workpiece reference points can also be
selected, and used in a program. These are entered in the memory of the system
separately.
A machining centre with 3 axis control may also have a rotary table (B axis). If this is
under CNC control it gives a fourth axis to the machine. In some machines, only discrete
indexing may be available. This table can be indexed in steps of 5 degrees so that
machining on several faces can be carried out in a single set up.
Programming requires knowledge of the G-codes and M-codes.
Table 5.11 and 5.12 give the G and M codes available in a typical CNC system.
Table5.11 Preparatory Functions
(G Functions) -—FANUC 0
Group G Code Initial State Description
01 G00 Positioning (Rapid feed)
G01 Linear Interpolation
G02 G01 Circular Interpolation/helical CW
G03 Circular Interpolation/helical CCW
G02.1 Circular threading CW
G03.1 Circular threading, CCW
G02.2 Involute interpolation, CW
G03.2 Involute interpolation, CCW
G02.3 Exponential function interpolation, CW
G03.3 Exponential function interpolation, CCW

00 G04 Dwell
G05.1 Multi-buffer
01 G06.1 Spline interpolation
00 G07.1 Cylindrical interpolation

G09 Exact stop check

G10 Setting offset amount and work zero offset amount

266
G10.1 PMC data setting

267
 CAD/CAM/CIM

Group G Code Initial State Description

G10.3 High speed machining registration start
G10.6 Tool retract data escape
G11 Data setting mode cancel
G11.3 High speed machining registration end
25 G12.1 Polar co-ordinate interpolation
G13.1 Polar co-ordinate interpolation cancel model
17 G15 Polar co-ordinate command cancel
G16 Polar co-ordinates command
02 G17 Selection of XY plane
G18 G17 Selection of ZX plane
G19 Selection of YZ Plane
06 G20 As selected Inch input
G21 before power Metric Input
turning off
04 G22 Stored stroke limit function on
G23 G22 Stored stroke limit function off
24 G25 Spindle speed fluctuation detection off
G26 Spindle speed fluctuation detection on
00 G27 Zero return check
G28 Return to zero
G29 Return from zero
G30 Return to second zero
G30.1 Floating zero return
G31 Skip function
G31.1 Multi-step skip function
G31.2 Multi-step skip function 2
G31.3 Multi-step skip function 3
01 G33 Thread cutting
00 G37 Automatic tool length measurement
07 G40 Cutter radius compensation cancel /
3-D tool offset cancel
G41 G40 Cutter radius compensation, left /
3-D tool offset
G42 Cutter radius compensation, right
19 G40.1 Normal direction control cancel
G41.1 Normal direction control left on
G42.1 Normal direction control right on
08 G43 Tool length compensation, plus
G44 G49 Tool length compensation, minus
Contd....

CNC

268
Machine Tools

Group G Code Initial State Description

G49 Tool length compensation cancel
00 G45 Tool offset extension
G46 Tool offset reduction
G47 Tool offset, double extension
G48 Tool offset, double reduction
11 G50 Scaling cancel
G51 Scaling
12 G54 Selection of work co-ordinate system 1
G54.1 Additional work co-ordinate system
G55 Additional work co-ordinate system 2
G56 G54 Additional work co-ordinate system 3
G57 Additional work co-ordinate system 4
G58 Additional work co-ordinate system 5
G59 Additional work co-ordinate system 6
00 G60 Single direction positioning
15 G61 Exact stop check mode
G62 Automatic corner override mode
G63 Tapping mode
G64 G64 Continuous cutting mode
00 G65 Call of user macro
G65.3 Call of high speed machining program
12 G66 Modal call of user macro
12 G66.1 Macro modal call B
G67 G67 Modal call of user macro, cancel
16 G68 Co-ordinate system rotation
G69 Co-ordinate system rotation cancel
G71 Metric Mode
00 G72.1 Rotation copy
G72.2 Parallel copy
09 G73 Peck drilling cycle
G74 Reverse tapping cycle
G76 Fine boring cycle
G80 Fixed cycle, cancel
G81 Drilling cycle, spot drilling
G82 Drilling cycle, counter
G83 G80 Peck drilling cycle
G84 Tapping cycle
G84.2 Rigid tapping cycle
G85 Boring cycle
Contd....

269
 CAD/CAM/CIM

G86 Boring cycle

G87 Back boring cycle
G88 Boring cycle
G89 Boring cycle
03 G90 G91 Absolute command
G91 Incremental command
00 G92 Setting co-ordinates
G92.1 Work co-ordinate system preset
05 G93 Inverse time feed
05 G94 G94 Feed rate, mm/min mode
G95 Feed rate, mm/rev. mode
10 G98 G98 Initial level return in fixed cycle mode
G99 R level return in fixed cycle mode

Table 5.12 M-Codes in a CNC System

M00 Program stop

M01 Optional stop
M02 End of program
M03 Spindle CW
M04 Spindle CCW
M05 Spindle stop
M06 Tool change
M07 Tap Oil on
M08 Coolant on
M09 Coolant/Tap Oil off
M10 B-axis clamp
M11 B-axis unclamp
M12 Hydraulic power rotary table on
M14 Oil hole drill coolant on
M16 Heavy tool change
M17 Tap cycle confirmation
M18 Tap cycle cancel
M19 Spindle orientation
M20 Coolant nozzle up
M21 Coolant nozzle middle
M22 Coolant nozzle down
M23 Detection of contact in -—
M24 Detection of contact in +X
M25 Detection of contact in -—
Contd....

CNC

270
Machine Tools

M26 Detection of contact in +Y

M27 Tool breakage detection
M28 Automatic gap elimination
M29 M27 & M28 together
M30 End of program and rewind
M50 Air blow on
M52 Tool length offset measurement
M53 Tool length Offset execution
M54 Tool length Offset cancel
M57 Measurement along Z axis
M58 Execution along Z axis
M59 Cancel along Z axis
M60 Measurement along +X axis
M61 Measurement along -— axis
M62 Execution along X axis
M63 Cancel along X axis
M64 Measurement along +Y axis
M65 Measurement along -— axis
M66 Executing along Y axis
M67 Cancel along Y axis
M70 Return to zero rotary table position
M73 Y Axis mirror image off
M74 Y Axis mirror image on
M75 X Axis mirror image off
M76 X Axis mirror image on
M80 Rotary table CW rotation
M81 Rotary table CCW rotation
M82 Step mode tool removal
M83 Step mode tool change cycle
M84 Step mode tool jog operation
M88 Splash guard open
M89 Splash guard close
M90 Pallet change
M92 Pallet unclamp
M96 Pallet loading and advance
M97 Pallet loading retract
M98 Call of sub program
M99 End of sub program

271
 CAD/CAM/CIM

5.11.3 PROGRAMMING CODES

Programs are written using the standard word addresses given below :
N Sequence number (1 to 9999)
G Preparatory function: Up to 4 G functions in a block are permitted. Some
systems use G codes in three digits too.
X
Y Dimension mode in each axis, up to 3 decimal place
Z
I
J Arc centre offset in X, Y, Z axis + or – Axis direction
K
P, Q Word address codes, meaning depending on G function
B Rotation axis about Y axis
F Feed rate mm/min; eg.F300.0
S Spindle speed; e.g. S630
T Tool function (TXX to TYY), say depending on number of tools in the magazine

M Miscellaneous function
H Offset number
E Dwell function
D Cutter radius offset
L No. of repetitions of fixed cycle and sub program
Example of a program block:
A typical block of program may be written as:
N005 G01 G45 X 50.0 Y 100.1 F300.0 S480 M03 H01;
End of Block

Tool Length Offset

Spindle, CW

Spindle Speed. 480 rpm

Feedrate 300 mm/min

Y Coordinate 100.1 mm

X Coordinate 50 .0 mm

Tool length offset Plus

Linear Interpolation
Line Number

272
5.12. PROGRAMME PREPARATION
An inspection of the component shows that the table positioning movements are for many
operations are repetitive in nature and hence these movements can be coded in a sub-
programme.

5.12.1 Sub-programme
The sub-programme is written assuming that the spindle is positioned above the reference
point (work piece datum) 1. The tool is then successively positioned at locations 2, 3, 4,
5, 6 and 7. Please refer to Fig. 5.33.
Like the main programme sub-programme is given a programme number.

2 00

7 2 3

12
Y
X
1

Chapter
6 5 4
100

Fig. 5.33 Locations Visited in the Sub Program

273
 CAD/CAM/CIM

027 ;(Programme Number 27. This number is used to call the sub-programme in the
main programme.)
X0.0 Y50.0 ; (Position 2)
X100.0 ; (Position 2)
Y-50.0 ;
X0.0;
X-100.0 ;
Y50.0 ;
M 99 ; (Return to the main programme)

5.12..2 Main Programme

018 ; (Programme number 18)
(Part-name)
G0 G40 G80 ; (Rapid traverse)
(Cutter compensation cancel)
(Canned cycle cancel)
G91 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; (Incremental positioning)
(XYZ zero return)
/T1 ; (Call tool in Pocket #1 Centre Drill)
/M06 (Call tool change)
(Tool #1 is now inserted in the spindle)
Note : Block delete switch (/) is used here as these blocks are used only during set up. These blocks
with “/” sign are again provided at the end of the programme. Hence during repeated machining the block
delete switch is kept in the on position and these lines preceding / symbol are ignored.
M1 ; ( An optional stop code is introduced so that the program will
Temporarily cease execution to facilitate inspection. The
program will continue if the “ Start” button is pressed. Once the
program is proven, the optional stop switch is shifted to “off”
mode so that M1 code is ignored.)

(Centre Drilling)
N1 T2 ; (Calling next tool i.e. 8.5 Drill)
G0 G90 G54 G43 X0 Y0 Z50.0 H1 S2000 M3 ;
(Select work co-ordinate system
(G54) Rapid positioning above
location 1 Tool length offset 1 active
Spindle speed 2000 rpm
Spindle rotation clockwise (M03))
G98 G81 Z-8.0
CNC Machine Tools

274
 Drilling depth = –5 mm
Rapid up to Z = 3 mm
Feed rate 100 mm / min)
M98 P27 ; (Calling sub programme #27- Centre drilling in 7 locations)
G80 G91 G28 Z0 ; (Fixed cycle cancel
Z axis zero return)
M6 ; (8.5 mm drill is now inserted in the spindle
The centre drill is returned to the tool magazine)
M1 ; Optional stop

Initial Level

Rapid Level
5
5

Work
Piece
Fig. 5.34 Centre Drilling Cycle

(8.5 Drill)
N2 T2 (Process #2, calling Tool #3)
G0 G90 G43 X0 Y0 Z50.0 H2 S936 M3;
G99 G81 Z-38.0 R47.0 F187 L0; (Rapid traverse to stop at Z=3 mm
Depth = 35 mm
Return to initial rapid level (G99)
No machining to be done at this
position (L0))
M98 P27 ;
G80 G91 G28 Z0 ; Returned to Z home position
for
M6: tool change

275
 CAD/CAM/CIM

M1 ;
(18 DIA DRILL)
N3 T4 ;
G0 G90 G43 X0 Y0 Z50.0 H3 S442 M3
; G81 Z41.0 R47.0 F88 ;
M 98
P27 ; M6 ;
M1 ;
(19.5 DRILL)
N4 T5;
G0 G90 G43 X0 Y0 Z50.0 H4 S408 M3
; G81 Z -38.0 R47.0 F82 ;
G80 G91 G28 Z0 ;
M6 ;
M1 ;
(CHAMFERING
) N5 T6 ;
G0 G90 G43 X0 Y0 Z50.0 H3 S442 M3
; G81 Z-41.0 R47.0 F88 ;
G80G91G28Z0;

S500 H5 M3;
G99G81 Z - —.0 R47.0 F51
L0 ; M98 P27
G80 G91 G28 Z0 ;
M6 ;
M1 ;
(M10 × 1.5 TAP)
G0 G90 G43 X0 Y0 Z50.0 H6 S318 M3
; G84 Z-38.0 R40.0 F477 L0;
(Note: Tapping cycle G84 involves rapid traverse, feed, reverse feed and return)
M98 P27 ;
G80 G91 G28 Z0;
M6 ;
M1 ;
(f20 H7 BORING)
N7 T1 ;
G0 G90 G43 X0 Y0 Z50.0 H7 S1194 M3;

276
CNC Machine Tools

limits. That is why the four succeeding lines of programme starts with block delete
symbol. Once the setting of the boring bar is proven to be satisfactory the block delete
switch can be thrown into the “ON’
/G81 Z-5.0 R3.0 F119 ; position thereby ignoring these lines
/G80 G91 G28 Z0 during regular production run)
M5 ; /M1 ;
/G0 G90 G43 X0 Y0 Z50.0 H7
M3 ; /G81 Z-8.0 R47.0 F119 ;
/G80 G91 G28 Z0
M5 ; /M1 ;
/G0 G90 G43 X0 Y0 Z50.0 H7 M3 ;
G76 Z-35.0 R47.0 P0.5 Q0.5 F119 ;

(P, Dwell 0.5 Sec,

Q, Offset 0.5 mm)
Note: G76 is precision boring operation. At the end of the boring operation the tool is
withdrawn along the radial direction at the orientated stop position of the spindle. There
is a dwell of 0.5 sec and the boring bar is withdrawn.
G80 G91 G28 Z0 ;
M6 ;
M30 ;
Note: The readers are advised to compare the G and M codes used in this program
with the G and M codes of the machines available with them as there may be differences
in the G-Codes and m codes from system to system.

277
QUESTIONS

278
 1. What is the most popular type of drive for CNC machines today?
2. Sketch and explain the torque speed characteristics of a spindle drive.
3. Why is a gearbox used in the main drive of some CNC machines?
4. Why is separate cooling motor used with DC drives?
5. List the advantages of AC servomotors over DC servomotors.
6. Why is a servomotor used for axes feed drive?
7. Why is often a reduction drive using timing belt, employed in feed drives?
8. What is the advantage of servomotors with built-in encoders?
9. What are the four common types of ball screw mounting arrangements?
10. What are the advantages of Linear Motion guide ways?
11. What is the type of plastic insert used in CNC machine sideways?
12. What is the purpose of using LM guides or plastic inserts in sideways?
13. What is the advantage of using slant bed design for turning machines?
14. Why should a brake be used with the X-axis drive in a slant bed lathe?
15. What is the principle of operation of a linear motor?
16. How is the turret of a CNC lathe indexed?
17. What is a bi-directional turret?
18. Why are not axial tools kept in adjacent pockets in a tool turret?
19. Why is a poly V belt preferred for main drive ?
20. What is the advantage of using a linear transducer for feedback measuring?
21. What is the advantage of using an absolute measuring system?
22. What is the advantage of using an analog measuring system?
23. Describe the principle of working of two analog transducers.
24. Explain the principle of working of two digital incremental transducers.
25. What is a Digital Read Out (DRO) ?
26. What is an A/D converter ? Where is it used in a CNC Machine?
27. Name three types of bearings used in the mounting of spindles of CNC machines.
28. Why is sometimes a spindle oil cooler necessary?
29. Is it necessary to keep a CNC machine in an A/C room?
30. What type of microprocessors are used in modern CNC systems?
31. What is the advantage of multiprocessor CNC system?
32. Name three techniques of interpolation.
33. Give major specifications of a machining centre.
34. Give major specifications of a CNC lathe.
35. What are the differences between a CNC lathe and a turning centre?
36. What is a typical tool changing time in a modern high speed machining centre?
37. How is the slide position referenced?
38. What is meant by accuracy?
39. What is meant by repeatability?

279
40. How is a CNC machine calibrated?
41. What are the following G Functions for a lathe?
G04, G09, G27, G54, G7642.
42. WHat are the following G Functions for a machining centre?
G17, G30, G81, G99
43. What are the following M functions for a machining Centre?
M03, M19, M06
44. Write and explain the standard format of G01 code in a CNC lathe.
45. What is a user macro?
46. What is the purpose of a tool pre-setter?
4
7
47. What are the D and H codes in a machining centre program?
48. How is a tapered thread cut in a machining centre?
49. How is a program number designated?
50. What is the difference between absolute and incremental programming?
51. Specify Nine linear axes as per ISO.
52. Specify the different combinations of axes of a 5-axis machining centre.
53. What are the axes of a 4 axes machining centre?
54. Name the roughing and finishing tool holders in a CNC lathe for turning.
55. Name the turning inserts for the above.
56. What is the difference between BT taper and ISO taper for machining centres?
57. What is the code for tool nose radius compensation in a lathe?
58. What is the G code for cutter diameter compensation in milling?
59. Describe the types of milling operations available in a CAM software.
60. Describe the common tool motion statements available in a CAM software.
61. Discuss the stock boundary definition and area clearance in a CAM software.
62. What is the speciality of a tapping tool holder in a machining centre? What is
the significance of rigid tapping?
63. Why is ceramic tool advantageous than carbide tools in CNC turning?
64. Why is a curvic coupling preferred in indexing devices in a CNC machine?
65. What are the common types of automatic tool changers?
66. Why is a pull stud used in the tool holder of a machining centre?

280
 UNIT-VI

COMPUTER AIDED PROCESS PLANNING

&
GROUP TECHNOLOGY

281
6.1 INTRODUCTION
Process planning is concerned with determining the sequence of individual
manufacturing operations needed to produce a given part or product. The resulting
operation sequence is documented on a form typically referred to as operation sheet. The
operation sheet is a listing of the production operations and associated machine tools for a
work part or assembly. Process planning is an important stage of product development
since production tooling like jigs, fixtures, special tools etc. can be designed only after
the process is finalized.
Like a group technology - —ased system utilizing classification and coding to
retrieve parts, code numbers can be used for retrieval of existing and preferred
manufacturing information. The principle of group technology is therefore discussed here
as part of process planning. The importance of process planning lies in the fact that
process plans have a direct bearing on the cost of the part. As new manufacturing
processes and machines are introduced, process plans also undergo changes. Hence
process planning is a dynamic activity. The continuous emphasis on cost reduction also
requires the process plans to be updated to reduce the cost. Cost information can be
included in a computer assisted process planning system, using an automatic time
standards (ATS) system.

6.2 PROCESS PLANNING

Manufacturing planning, process planning, material processing, process engineering and
machine routing are a few titles given to the topic referred to here as process planning.

282
 CAD/CAM
Process planning is that function within a manufacturing facility that establishes which
machining process and process parameters are to be used to convert a work material
(blank) from its initial form (raw material) to a final form defined by an engineering
drawing. Process planning is a common task in small batch, discrete parts metal working
industries. The process planning activity can be divided into the following steps:
• Selection of processes and tools
• Selection of machine tools/Manufacturing equipment

• Sequencing the operations

• Grouping of operations
S
• election of work piece holding devices and datum surfaces (set ups)
S
• election of inspection instruments
• Determination of production tolerances
• Determination of the proper cutting conditions

• Determination of the cutting times and non-machining times (setting time,

inspection time) for each operation
• Editing the process sheets.
All the information determined by the process planning function is recorded on a
sheet called process plan. The process plan is frequently called an operation sheet, route
sheet or operation planning sheet. This provides the instructions for the production of the
part. It contains the operation sequence, processes, process parameters and machine tools
used. Fig 6.1 shows a typical process planning sheet.
XYZ GLOBAL MANUFACTURING LTD. VELLORE 632014
PART NUMBER : 610 415 3426 MATERIAL: FG 200
PART NAME : PIN
Process Process Machine Tool Cutting Spindle Feed/ Set Up Process
Number Details Tip Speed Speed Feed Time Time
Tool m/min rpm Rate min min
holder
01 HOC CNC
CC LATHE
Drill
02 Drill CNC
LATHE
03 Face & CNC
Turn LATHE

283
Computer Aided Process Planning

04 Grooving CNC
LATHE
05 HOC CNC
LATHE
06 HOC CNC
GRINDER

HOC: HOLD ON CHUCK

CC : CENTRE DRILL
Fig. 6.1 Typical Process Planning Sheet

In conventional production system, a process plan is created by a process

planner. It requires a significant amount of time and expertise to determine an
optimal routing for each new part design. However, individual engineers will have
their own opinions about what constitutes the best routing. Accordingly there are
differences among the operation sequences developed by various planners. Efficient
process planning requires the service of experienced process planners.

Because of the problems encountered with manual process planning, attempts

have been made in recent years to capture the logic, judgment and experience
required for this important function and incorporates them into computer
programmes. Based on the features of a given part, the program automatically
generates the sequence of manufacturing operations. The process planning software
provides the opportunity to generate production routings which are rational,
consistent and perhaps even optimal. It has the following advantages:
i. Reduces the skill required of a planner.
ii. Reduces the process planning time.
iii. Reduces the process planning and manufacturing cost.
iv. Creates more consistent plans.
v. Produces more accurate plans.
vi. Increases productivity.

284
 The current approaches for computer aided process planning can be classified
into two groups:
i. Variant
ii. Generative

285
 CAD/CAM

6.3 STRUCTURE OF A PROCESS PLANNING SOFTWARE

Fig. 9.2 represents the structure of a computer aided process planning system. In Fig. 6.2
the modules are not necessarily arranged in the proper sequence but can be based on
importance or decision sequence. Each module may require execution several times in
order to obtain the optimum process plan. The input to the system will most probably be
a solid model from a CAD data base or a 2-D model. The process plan after generation
and validation can then be routed directly to the production planning system and
production control system.

Part
Classification
Feature Recognition

Material Selection

Process Selection
Display
Machine Selection

Parameter
Selection

Fixture Selection

End Effector Selection

Process Sequencing

Cutter Path Generation

Intermediate Surface
Generation
SOFTWARE
MODULES

286
 CAD

Tool
Process
Capability

Machinability
Machine
Tool

Standard
Time
Material

Standard
Cost
Fixture

Process
End Plans
Effector

DATABASES

Fig.6.2 Structure of a Computer Aided Process Planning System

6.4 INFORMATION REQUIRED FOR PROCESS PLANNING

The geometric model of the part is the input for the process planning system. The system
outputs the process plan (Fig. 6.3). The input to the process planning system may be
engineering drawing or CAD model. The other prerequisites for process planning are
given below:
- Parts list
- Annual demand/batch size
A
- ccuracy and surface finish requirement (CAD Database)
E
- quipment details (Work centre Database)

287
Computer Aided Process Planning

- Data on cutting fluids, tools, jigs & fixtures, gauges

- Standard stock sizes
M
- achining data, data on handling and setup

C
OMPONENT
DRAWING INPUT PROCESS OUTPUT
PROCESS
PLANNING
PLAN
CAD SOFTWARE
MODEL

Fig. 6.3 Activities in Process Planning

In a computerized process planning system a formal structure and a knowledge

database are required in order to transform the engineering design information into the
process definition. A brief description of the operation of a computer aided process
planning software is given in the following section.

288
 6.5 OPERATION OF A TYPICAL COMPUTER AIDED PROCESS
PLANNING SOFTWARE
A typical process planning software may provide the following basic functions:
i. Process planning
ii. Initialization function
R
iii. eport generation
B
rief descriptions of these functions are given below.

6.OCESS PLANNING
36) The structure of a process planning module will include
modules to: Create a new plan
Retrieve a plan and
edit Delete a plan
Display plan on
monitor List
summary information

6.5.2 CREATING A NEW PLAN

Creation of a new plan involves several stages. Fig. 9.4 shows the header of a
typical process plan format. The user has to enter various data as per the above
format. The manufacturing sequence is entered in a suitable format. A typical
format is given.The process plan gives each operation to be performed in sequence.
The example given is for turning and drilling a workpiece.

289
in the process plan. Some process plans will also give the inspection tool details, jigs and
fixtures to be used and will have a column for remarks, which may contain some
instructions to the operator.

Table 6.1 Format of Manufacturing Sequence

Serial Machine Operation Set Production Tool Cutting Feed/ rpm Number
Number Description/ Up Time Speed Feed of cuts/
Assembly Time m/min rate Passes
Operations
04 CNC Turning - 2 P40 240 0.5mm/ 1400 4
Lathe rev.
05 ” Drilling - 0.2 BW 200 0.2mm/ 2200 1
Drill rev.

The process planning software provides some standard strings that are to be used
when describing operations. Some examples are given below:
i. Hold between centres
ii. Rough turn xxxx dia. stock to xxxx dia.. for entire length of part
R
iii. ough turn xxxx dia. to xxxx dia..
F
iv. inish turn xxxx dia. to xxxx dia.
F
v. inish face xxxx dia. and chamfer
B
y selecting various strings, the operations can be entered in the operation description.

6.5.3 RETRIEVAL OF PLANS

A process plan can be retrieved using any of the data fields contained in its header. A
single field or a combination of fields may be necessary. Sometimes if we know a word
in the description of the part (NOTE) the process planning systems may come up with the

Computer Aided Process Planning I

f
plan numbers or related parts. For example if we are looking for gearbox parts, by t
searching notes we may get: h
e
Serial Number Part Number Part Description u
1 600-01-001 Input Shaft s
2 600-01-002 Drive Input Gear e
3 600-01-003 Input Pulley r
290
 wants to retrieve the plan for Sl. No. 1 he/she can type 1 and get the plan.
6.5.4 SUMMARY INFORMATION
Summary information will include Account information, Machine information,
Material information etc.
Process planning software will have several modules. One such module is the
automatic time standards system. Time standards are based on cutting conditions
used and therefore calculation of machining time requires selection of cutting
parameters. Typical input data for such a system is:
Material : C45
220
Material hardness : BHN
Work Centre Number : L 120

The module then goes through the operation description looking for a work
element (say, a machining operation). It then displays available tool materials:
i. Coated Carbide
ii. Ceramic
iii. Cubic Boron Nitride
iv. Diamond coated tools
From the operation description, pertinent dimensions will be retrieved (like
starting diameter, finish diameter, cut length and depth of cut).

Similarly there may be modules for time calculation for loading and unloading.

F
aci
liti
es
for
arc
hi
vi
ng
the
pla

291
n are also incorporated in a process planning software.

292
6.5.6 REPORT GENERATION

Computer aided process planning (CAPP) software packages have normally SQL
capabilities incorporated. Reports can be compiled for:

i. Parts with identical classification

ii. Parts using specific machine type
P
iii. arts machined using specific tool materials
iv. Bill of materials

293
 CAD/CAM

6.6 CAD BASED PROCESS PLANNING - —ERTAIN LIMITATIONS AND

PROBLEMS
The geometric model of an object is represented by a set of data. The data consists of
numerical values, names, codes and symbols. The data are stored in computer memory in
an organized manner. This organization represents the relationship of each data element
to other elements. Included in this relationship is the topological relationship of the
surface geometry.
The common methods of geometric modeling in use today are:
i. 2-D modeling
ii. Surface modeling
iii. Solid modeling
The techniques of these methods have been discussed in earlier chapters. The creation
of process for CNC machining is discussed in Chapter 12. This chapter concentrates on
general process design.
With the taxonomy of graphical representation described by above procedures, some
general problems of part representation systems can be identified. These problems
include:
i. The inability to represent special manufacturing techniques like coatings and
surface treatment.
ii. Lack of data interchange between some drafting representations. Since there is no
easy way to identify surfaces requiring machining using any of the geometric
representations mentioned previously, the best solution is to use a human-
computer interactive system to identify the surface.
In order to use a CAD system as the front end for computer aided process planning,
the following capabilities are required.
i. Location and interactive identification of lines and surfaces.
ii. Easy dimension retrieval.
iii. Storage and retrieval of tolerance information.
iv. Capability of displaying multiple objects.
v. Built- in special tags (i.e., drill angle for hole).
vi. Combining information on special processes like heat treatment, surface treatment
and surface finishing techniques with the geometric model.

The addition of automatic feature recognition (AFR) software has made the process
planning task considerably easy. CAD software which incorporates this feature highlights

T
Computer Aided Process Planning

294
he recent developments in modeling technologies and detailing procedures have
helped designers to incorporate auxiliary information like geometric tolerances.
These additions have improved the quality of process plans created by CAPP.
In the case of precision components, the process design can be extremely
complex. This is particularly so when we consider components with accuracies of
the order of a few micrometers and surface finishes at sub micrometer level.
Further, the need to achieve the required concentricity, parallelism and
perpendicularity etc. requires very careful design of the processes. Such extra
precision components will have high rejection levels. Process design even by
experienced planners may have to undergo several modifications to realize the
ultimate product. The inability to model the dynamics of machine tool - —aterial –
work piece - —ixture system is still a major bottleneck in manufacturing. Further,
the physical and metallurgical behavior of the work material and the non-
deterministic nature of tool wear may necessitate modifications to process plans.
Tolerance accumulation in machined components is another major problem.

One of the convenient ways in which process plans can be created for a
component is by searching for the availability of similar components in the
component database. The similarity can be in geometry, tolerances, materials and
processes. If a similar component is available it is likely that their manufacturing
process is also proven. In that case it is reasonable to use the process plan with
whatever modifications that may be necessary rather than creating a new process
plan. Automatic process planning tends to be more successful if such a “variant”
approach is adopted. This requires an efficient method of retrieval based on a
suitable identification number. Codes based on group technology provide unique
identification for part families. Group technology is known and practiced for the last
three decades or more in batch manufacturing industries and it is a convenient tool
for classifying and coding components, machined components, components made of
sheet metal etc. The following sections give a brief introduction to this technology
and its uses in CAPP.

There are two types of information that are required by a process planning system:
i. Design features of the component.
ii. Process knowledge/economic alternatives/information of materials/process
equipment.

6. G
R

295
 OUP TECHNOLOGY
Group technology is an operations management philosophy based on the
recognition that similarities occur in the design and manufacture of
discrete parts. Similar parts can then be arranged into part families. To
implement such a system, some form of classification of parts and
coding is required.
Part classification and coding is concerned with identifying the similarities and
using these similarities to evolve a classification code. Similarities are of two types:
design attributes (such as geometric shape and size), and manufacturing attributes
(the sequence of processing steps required to make the part).
In companies which employ several design engineers and manufacturing a
diverse range of products, such classifications and coding has a number of other
uses. One of the major benefits is avoiding the duplication of similar components.
This can result in considerable savings in terms of design cost, processing cost and
tooling cost. One prime necessity to realize this is to have a good design retrieval
system.
The parts classification and coding is required in a design retrieval system, and
in computer aided process planning the process routing is developed by recognizing
the specific attributes of the part and relating these attributes to the corresponding
manufacturing operations.

296
6.7.1 PART FAMILIES
A part family is a collection of parts which are similar either because of geometry and
size or because similar processing steps are required in their manufacture. The parts
within a family are different, but their similarities are close enough to merit their
identification as members of the part family. The major obstacle in changing over to
group technology from a traditional production shop is the problem of grouping parts into
families. There are three general methods for solving this problem.
i. Visual inspection
ii. Production flow analysis
P
iii. arts classification and coding system
W
hat is desirable in a computer integrated manufacturing environment is a software
which will analyze the geometric model of the part and come out with a set of alphabetic/
numeric characters which can broadly embed similarities.

6.7.2 PARTS CLASSIFICATION AND CODING SYSTEMS

Parts classification and coding systems can be grouped into three general types:
i. Systems based on design attributes
ii. Systems based on part manufacturing attributes
S
iii. ystems based on both design and manufacturing attributes
M
i
n
Computer Aided Process Planning o
r
Systems in the first category are useful for design retrieval and to promote d
design standardization. Systems in the second category are used for computer-aided i
process planning, tool design, and other production related functions. The third m
category represents an attempt to combine the functions and advantages of the other e
two systems into a single classification scheme. The types of design and n
manufacturing attributes typically included in classification schemes are listed s
below: i
o
Part Design Attributes n
Basic (External/Internal) shape s
Axisymmetric/Prismatic/sheet metal T
Length/diameter ratio o
Material l
e
Major dimensions

297
 rances
Surface finish

Part Manufacturing Attributes

Major process of manufacture
Surface treatments/coatings
Machine tool/processing
equipment Cutting tools

Operation
sequence
Production
time Batch
quantity
Production
rate Fixtures
needed

I
f
we
tak
ea
lo
ok
at
a
ma
chi
ne
to
ol

298
manufacturing industry, large part families can be grouped as:
i. Heavy parts - —eds, columns etc.
ii. Shafts, characterized by large L/D ratios
Spindles (long shafts, screw rods included)
iii. Non-rounds (small prismatic parts)
iv. Gears, disc type parts (whose L/D ratios are small)
From the manufacturing point of view, group technology can bring in considerable
economy in tooling, set up time, part changeover times, machine specifications etc.
The classification of components in groups can lead to formation of cells where
similar

299
6.CODING STRUCTURES
A part coding scheme consists of symbols that identify the part’s design and/or
manufacturing attributes. The symbols in the code can be all numeric, all alphabetic, or a
combination of both types. There are three basic code structures used in group technology
applications:

i. Hierarchical structure
ii. Chain type structure
iii. Hybrid structure which is a combination of the above two
With the hierarchical structure, the interpretation of each succeeding symbol depends
on the value of the preceding symbols. In the chain type structure, the interpretation of
each symbol in the sequence is fixed and does not depend on the value of preceding
digits. Most of the commercial parts coding systems are used in industry are a
combination of the two pure structures.
When selecting a coding system for a component’s representation, there are several
factors to be considered. They include:
i. The geometry of components (i.e., rotational, prismatic, deep drawn, sheet metal
etc.)
ii. The code structure
iii. The digital representation (i.e., binary, octal, hexadecimal etc.)
iv. Material of manufacture - —errous, non ferrous, plastics, composites etc.
When using a code to represent an engineering design, it is important to represent the
basic features of the design. For process planning, it is desirable to have codes that can
distinguish unique production families.
Some of the coding systems that have been successfully implemented in process
planning are given below:
i. OPITZ system
ii. The CODE system
iii. The KK-3 system
iv. The MICLASS system
v. CLASS system

vi. CODFORM (coding for machining)

When implementing a parts classification and coding system, most companies can
purchase a commercially available package or develop a system for their own specific
use.

300
Computer Aided Process Planning

Commercial systems have the advantage of less lead time in implementation. Brief
treatment of some commercial systems is given in subsequent sections.

6.9 OPITZ CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM

The Opitz coding system uses the following digit sequence:
12345 6789 ABCD
The basic code consists of nine digits, which can be extended by adding four more
digits. The first nine digits are intended to convey both design and manufacturing data.
The general interpretation of the nine digits is indicated in Fig 9.5. The first five digits,
12345, are called the “form code” and describe the primary design attributes of the part.
The next four digits, 6789, constitute the “supplementary code”. It indicates some of the
attributes that would be of use to manufacturing (work material, raw work piece shape,
and accuracy). The extra four digits, “ABCD”, are referred to as the “secondary code”
and are intended to identify the production operation type and sequence. The secondary
code can be designed by the firm to serve its own particular needs.
In the form code, the first digit identifies whether the part is a rotational or a non-
rotational part. It also describes the general shape and proportions of the part. Fig 6.4
shows the specification scheme. For the rotational work pieces, the coding of the first five
digits is given in Fig. 9.6.
8 A/C <4

Digit 1 9 Special
Digit 2 Digit 3 Digit 4
Part Class Main Shape Rotational Plane Surface
Machining Machining
1 L/D<=0 External Internal
Machining of
.5 Shape Shape
Element Element Plane Surfaces
2 0.5,L/D
<3
Main Rotational Machining of
L
Shape Machining Plane Surfaces
/D>=3
3 Rotational 3
L/D<=2WithDeviationWithDeviation
Main
Shape

4
Main Bore

and Machining of
L/D >2 Rotational Plane Surfaces
Main
Shape
5 Speci
Machining
al
A/B< Main
=3 A
Shape
6 /C>=4

No
7 nrotational A/B

>=3 A/B

<=3

301
6 8 9
37) Suppl
ementa
ry
Digits

302
 Dimensions
Material
Raw Material Shape
Accuracy

Fig. 6.4 Specification Scheme

303
 CAD/CAM

DIGIT 1 DIGIT 2 DIGIT 3 DIGIT 4 DIGIT 5

External shape Internal Shape Plane Auxiliary Holes
PART CLASS External Shape Internal Shape Surface and Gear
Elements Elements Machining Teeth
Smoothing No Hole, No No Surface No Auxiliary
0 L/D <=0.5
0 Shape Elements 0 Break Through 0 Machining 0 Holes
Rotational Parts

No Shape No Shape Surface Plane/ Axial, Not on

1 0.5<L/D<3
1 Elements 1 Elements 1 Curved 1 Pitch Circle Dia

Smooth orSteppedon
External Plane
or Smooth

2 L/D > 3 2 Thread 2 Thread 2 Surface, Circular 2 Axial on Pitch

One End
Stepped one end

Graduation Circle Diameter

3 External Groove Radial, Not on
3 Groove 3 Groove 3 and/or Slot 3 Pitch circle Dia.
4 No Shape Stepped Both Ends No Shape External Radial, on
BothEnds

4 Elements 4 Elements 4 Spline (Polygon) 4 Pitch Circle Dia.

5 Thread Thread External Plane Axial and/ Radial
Non rotational Parts

5 5 5 Surface/Slot 5 and/ other Direction

Spline
Internal Plane Spur Gear
Stepped

6
6 Groove 6 Groove 6 Surface or Slot 6 Teeth
7 Functional Functional Internal Spline Bevel Gear
7 Cone 7 Cone 7 (Polygon) 7 Teeth
8 Operating Operating Internal or Slot/ Other Gear
8 Speed 8 Speed 8 External Polygon 8 Teeth
9
9 All Others 9 All Others 9 All Others 9 All Others

Fig. 6.5 Coding the First Five Digits

EXAMPLE
Given the part design of Fig. 6.6, the form code for this part is discussed below.

M10 x 1.5
Dia.25

Dia.20

Dia.5 1 x 45

12.5
20
40

Fig.6.6Example Part

The overall length/diameter ratio, L/D = 1.6, so the first code = 1. The part is stepped
on both ends with a screw thread on one end, so the second digit code would be 5 the
third digit code is 1 because of the through hole. The fourth and fifth digits are both 0,
since no surface machining is required and there are no auxiliary holes or gear teeth on
the part. The complete form code in the Opitz system is “15100”. To add the
supplementary code, we would have to properly code the sixth through ninth digits with

304
data on dimensions, material, starting work piece shape, and accuracy.
int
er
Computer Aided Process Planning pr
eta
6.10 THE MICLASS SYSTEM tio
n
The MICLASS classification number can range from 12 to 30 digits. The first 12 of
digits are universal code that can be applied to any part. Up to 18 additional digits the
can be used to code data that are specific to the particular company or industry. For re
example, lot size, piece time, cost data, and operation sequence might be included in ma
the 18 supplementary digits. ini
ng
The component attributes coded in the first 12 digits of the MICLASS number di
are as follows: git
s
1st digit Main shape for
a d
2nd nd 3rd igits Shape elements ms
d
4th igit Position of shape elements a
5th and 6th digits Main dimensions ch
d ain
7th igit Dimension ratio
d -
8th igit Auxiliary dimension
ty
9th and 10th digits Tolerance codes
a d
pe
11th nd 12th igits Material codes str
One of the unique features of MICLASS system is that parts can be coded using uct
a computer interactively. To classify a given part design, the user responds to a ur
series of questions asked by the computer. The number of questions depends on the e.
complexity of the part. For a simple part, as few as seven questions are needed to He
classify the part. For an average part, the number of questions ranges between 10 nc
and 20. On the basis of responses to its questions, the computer assigns a code e
number to the part. the
C
6.11 THE CODE SYSTEM O
D
The CODE system is a parts classification and coding system developed and E
marketed by Manufacturing Data System, Inc (MDSI), of Ann Arbor, Michigan. Its sy
most universal application is in design engineering for retrieval of part design data, ste
but it also has applications in manufacturing process planning, purchasing, tool m
design, and inventory control. po
The code number has eight digits. For each digit, there are 16 possible values sse
(zero through 9 and A through F) which are used to describe the parts design and sse
manufacturing characteristics. The initial digit position indicates the basic geometry s a
of the part and is called the major division of the code system. This digit would be hy
used to specify whether the shape was cylinder, flat, block, or other. The bri

305
d structure.

6.
1
2
B
E
N
E
FI
T
S
O
F
G
R
O
U
P
T
E
C
H
N
O
L
O
G
Y
Im
ple
me
nta
tio
n
of
gr
ou
p

306
technology results in more focused factories. The likely impact of group technology
can be seen in Table 6.2.

Table 6.2 Impact of Group Technology

Before After
Discontinuous, Random Flow of Parts Structured Flow of Parts
Through the Shop
Reinvent New Parts Retrieve Parts Already in Production
Multitude of Process Plans for Some Parts Consistent, Single, Best Process Plans
Continuous Purchase of Components Regulated Purchase of Components
due to Lack of Total Visibility
Inflexible, Rigid, Unable to Respond to Flexible
Changing Environment

307
 When group technology is applied, a manufacturing company will typically realize
the following benefits:
Product engineering -
—Reduce part proliferation
Help design standardization
Provide manufacturing feed back
Manufacturing engineering -
—Process selection
Tool selection
Machine purchases
Material handling
Production engineering -
—Reduce lead time
Reduce delays
Reduce set-up time
Improve product quality
Production planning and control -
—Group scheduling
Stock accountability
Reduce expediting
Improved product design
Reduced materials handling
Better employee satisfaction

308
Computer Aided Process Planning

Other benefits:
• Increased productivity
• Improved accuracy in estimation of costs
G
• reater standardization and variety reduction
R
• educed set up times
B
• etter product delivery (Helps to implement just-in-time (JIT) manufacturing)
R
• educed cost of purchasing
I
• mproved plant efficiency

6.13 PROCESS SELECTION

Selecting the manufacturing processes to transform the raw material into the finished part
is based on matching requirements with process capabilities. Process capability is the
data base of knowledge for each process. It includes:
i. The shape and size of part a process can produce
ii. The dimensions and geometric tolerances that can be obtained
iii. The surface finish attainable
iv. The material removal rate
v. The relative cost
vi. Technological parameters
Process engineering does not necessarily imply that all process selection is based on
the information above. However, the more the information considered in selecting a
process, the more complete the result will be. A computer aided process planning system
functions based on this process capability information.
Earlier it was mentioned that planning systems could be classified into variant and
generative types. A variant planning system is a retrieval system and is analogous to
planning based on experience. In the variant planning system, standard plans are stored
based on component shape. These plans are then retrieved based on the similarity of a
coded part. A generative system, however, makes processing, tooling and other decision
via software logic.
6.14 EXPERIENCE-BASED PLANNING
It is always true that the accumulation of experience is knowledge. This is also true in the
context of manufacturing process. Even now, many process planning activities still rely

309
on the experience of the process planners. However, there are some problems associated
with such a planning approach.
Because of the problems noted above, it is necessary to seek more efficient ways to
represent process capability knowledge base so that it might be preserved and installed as
part of a decision support system on a computer.
6.15 HAND BOOKS/DATA BOOKS/MANUALS
One way to store the process information is to print it in a hand book or manual. This has
been a standard practice. Process information is usually presented in tables, figures or
listed as guide lines. Many manufacturers usually prepare their own manuals for internal
use. Some process information is listed as guide lines, so that the process planners can
follow some general rules. For example, the following guidelines can be applied to
produce holes.

Diameter <= 8 mm True position > 0.01

i. Tolerance > H10 Drill the hole.
ii. Tolerance <= H8 Drill and Ream etc.

6.16 DECISION TABLES AND DECISION TREES

Decision tables and decision trees are methods of describing or specifying the various
actions (decisions) associated with combination of (input) conditions. Both methods have
been used for a long time to help decision making. This is also suitable for use with
digital computers.

6.17 PROCESS CAPABILITY

The process capability depends on the following factors:
i. Shape that a process can generate.
ii. Size limitation (boundaries of the tooling, machine tooling, and fixtures).

iii. Tolerances (both dimensional and geometric).

iv. Surface finish attainable.
v. Cutting force.
vi. Tower consumption.
The shape element implies the basic geometry predicable by a process. However, this
is difficult task to achieve using a computer that is reasoning the shape capabilities in its
natural form (geometry and topology). A feasible alternative is to represent shape by a
code. For internal machining process, the size capability is constrained by the available
tool size. In external machining, size is constrained by the available machine table size.
The other capabilities and limitations can be expressed mathematically. These
expressions are straight forward to programme on a computer if the exact equations and
constraints can be quantified.

310
Computer Aided Process Planning

One way to represent process capabilities is to use process boundaries. A process

boundary is interpreted as the limiting size, tolerance and surface finish for a process.
This can be obtained by careful control of the cutting conditions and process parameters
(feed, speed, depth of cut). Machining force and power are not limiting values in process
selection, but becomes an important consideration in selecting process parameters. A
typical process boundary table is shown in Fig. 9.8.

Fig. 6.8 Process Boundary Table

6.17.1 PROCESS PARAMETERS FOR MACHINING

Surface finish, force and power constraints are directly affected by the process
parameters-feed, speed and depth of cut. Therefore, process selection becomes an
iterative procedure: first a process is selected and then the machining parameters are
adjusted to accommodate the system constraints.

311
 • Selection of the machining parameters also affects the time and cost required
to produce components.
• Several machinability systems are currently marketed that recommend sets
of parameters that either optimize machining cost, time or production rate,
or simply retrieve data table or calculated values.
O
ne extensively used data system is CUT DATA from Machinability Data
Systems of USA.
Recently computerized machinability systems have been introduced which
facilitate

quick selection of optimum process parameters.

312
 CAD/CAM

6.17.2 COST AND TIME MODELS

Machining optimization models can be classified as single pass and multi pass models. In
a single pass model, we assume that only one pass is needed to produce the required
geometry. In this case, depth of cut is fixed. In multi pass model, this assumption is
relaxed and depth of cut also becomes a control variable.

6.18 METHODS OF COMPUTER AIDED PROCESS PLANNING

The ultimate goal of a system is to integrate design and production data into a system that
generates useable process plans. As already mentioned there are two approaches:
i. Variant process planning
ii. Generative process planning

6.19 VARIANT PROCESS PLANNING

A variant process planning system uses the similarity among components to retrieve the
existing process plans. A process plan that can be used by a family of components is
called a standard plan. A standard plan is stored permanently with a family number as its
key.
A family is represented by a family matrix which includes all possible members. The
variant process planning system has two operational stages:
• A preparatory stage and
• A production stage.
D
uring the preparatory stage, existing components are coded, classified, and
subsequently grouped into families. The process begins by summarizing process plans
already prepared for components in the family. Standard plans are then stored in a data
base and indexed by family matrices (Fig. 9.9).

XXX XXX XXXX

YYY YYY YYYY
ZZZ ZZZ ZZZZ

Plan File
Indexed
by Family
Matrix

Fig.6.9 Process Family Matrix

313
Computer Aided Process Planning

The operation stage occurs when the system is ready for production. An incoming
part is first coded. The code is then input to a part family search routine to find the family
to which the component belongs. The family number is then used to retrieve a standard
plan. Some other functions, such as parameter selection and standard time calculations,
can also be added to make the system more complete (Fig. 6.10). This system is used in a
machine shop that produces a variety of small components.

YYY YYY YYYY

STANDARD
PLAN
FILE
CAD Model Coding
Retrieval

YYY YYY YYYY

yyy xyy yyyy

Feasible
Plans

Process Plan
Fig. 6.10 Part Search and Retrieval

6.SIGN OF VARIANT PROCESS PLANNING SYSTEM

The following are the sequences in the design of a variant process planning system:
i. Family formation
ii. Data base structure design
iii. Eearch algorithm development and implementation
iv. Plan editing
v. rocess parameter selection/updating

6.19.1.1 Family Formation

Part family classification and coding were discussed earlier. This is based on the
manufacturing features of a part. Components requiring similar processes are
grouped into the same family. A general rule for part family formation is that all
parts must be related. Then, a standard process plan can be shared by the entire
family. Minimum modification on the standard plan will be required for such family
members.

314
6.DATA BASE STRUCTURE DESIGN
The data base contains all the necessary information for an application,
and can be accessed by several programs for specific application. There
are three approaches to construct a data base: hierarchical, network, and
relational.

315
 CAD/CAM/CIM

6.APROARCH PROCEDURE
The principle of a variant system is to retrieve process plans for similar
components. The search for a process plan is based on the search of a part
family to which the component belongs. When, the part family is found,
the associated standard plan can then be retrieved. A family matrix search
can be seen as the matching of the family with a given code. Family
matrices can be considered as masks. Whenever, a code can pass through a
mask successfully, the family is identified.

6.19.4 PLAN EDITING AND PARAMETER SELECTION

Before a process plan can be issued to the shop, some modification of the standard plan
may be necessary, and process parameters must be added to the plan. There are two types
of plan editing: One is the editing of the standard plan itself in the data base, and the
other is editing of the plan for the component. For editing a standard plan, the structure of
the data base must be flexible enough for expansion, additions, and deletions of the data
records.
A complete process plan includes not only operations but also process parameters.
The data in the process parameter files are linked so that we can go through the tree to
find the speed and feed for an operation. The parameter file can be integrated into variant
planning to select process parameters automatically.
6.NERATIVE PROCESS PLANNING
38) Generative process planning is a system that synthesizes process information in
order to create a process plan for a new component automatically. In a generative
planning system, process plans are created from information available in
manufacturing data base without human intervention. Upon receiving the design
model, the system can generate the required operations and operation sequences
for the component. Knowledge of manufacturing must be captured and encoded
into efficient software. By applying decision logic, a process planner’s decision
making can be imitated. Other planning functions, such as machine selection, tool
selection, process optimization, and so on, can also be automated using generative
planning techniques. The generative planning has the following advantages:
i. It can generate consistent process plans rapidly.
ii. New process plans can be created as easily as retrieving the plans of existing
components.
iii. It can be interfaced with an automated manufacturing facility to provide detailed
and up-to-date control information.

Fig. 6.11 shows the modular structure of a generative CAPP system

316
Computer Aided Process Planning

Start

Old
New New/Old
Component Copy Existing Part Geometry File to Geometry File
Represntaion
N Y
module Y/N
Geometry 1. Code Gneration
2.Part Geometry Editing
Creation Module

Feature Extraction
and Recognition 6.
Feature-Process 20
Correlation
.1
F
Operation Selection &
Sequencing Module

Machine O
Machine Tool and Material R
Tool Selection Tool
Machinability
W
Standard Time and
A
Cost computation R
Standard
D
Report Generation Time & A
Editing Cost Library
N
Printing
D
B
Process Sheet A
C
Fig. 6.11 Modular Structure of a Generative CAPP System K
The generative part consists of: W
• Component representation module A
R
• Feature extraction module
D
• Feature process correlation module
P
• Operation selection and sequencing module
L
• Machine tool selection module A
• Standard time / cost computation module N
• Report generation module NI
In order to generate a more universal process planning system, variables such as N
process limitations, and capabilities, process costs and so on, must be defined at the G
planning stage. Several of methods have been proposed for creating generative
In
process plans. A few methods that have been implemented successfully are:
ge
i. Forward and backward planning ne
ii. Input Format rat
iii. APP based on CAD models ive
pr
oc
ess

317
planning, when process plans are generated, the system must define an initial state
in order to reach the final state (goal). The path taken represents the sequence of
processes. For example, the initial state is the raw material and the final state is the
component design. Then a planner works in modifying the raw workpiece until it
takes on the final design qualities. This is called forward planning.
Backward planning uses a reverse procedure. Assuming that we have a finished
component, the goal is to go back to the un-machined workpiece. Each machining
process is considered a filling process.
Forward and backward planning may seem similar. However they influence the
programming of the system significantly. Planning each process can be
characterized by a precondition of the surface to be machined and a post condition
of the machining (the end result). For forward planning, we must know the
successor surface before we select a process, because the post condition of the first
process becomes the precondition for second process. Backward planning
eliminates this problem since it begins with the final surfaces from and processes
are selected to satisfy the initial requirements.
In forward planning, the steps to obtain the final surface with the desirable
attributes must be carefully planned to guarantee the result. On the other hand,
backward planning starts with the final requirements and searches for the initial
condition.

318
6.20.2 INPUT FORMAT
The input format of a process planning system affects the ease with which a system can
be used, and the capability of the system. The transitional form from the original design
(either engineering drawing or CAD model) to a specific input format may be tedious and
difficult to automate. However, such input can provide more complete information about
a component, and more planning functions can be accomplished using the input.
Many different input formats have been used in process planning systems. Some of
the few input formats used are:
CODE: Some generative systems such as APPAS use GT codes as input. Codes used
are in generative system are more detailed.
DESCRIPTION LANGUAGE: Specially designed part description languages can
provide detailed information for process planning system. For example AUTAP system
uses a language similar to a solid modeling language. A component is described by the
union of some primitives and modifiers. Material, processes, machine selection, and time
estimates can be selected by the system using the input model. Another system CIMS/
PRO uses an input language called CIMS/DEC. CAPP system uses its own special
language.

6.20.3 CAPP BASED ON CAD MODELS

Using a CAD model as input to a process planning system can eliminate the human
effort of translating a design into code and other descriptive form. A CAD model
contains all the details about a design. However, an algorithm is necessary to identify a
general machined surface in a CAD model. Additional code is needed to convert the
machined surface shape from raw material shape. CAD/CAM system uses a CAD model
as its input. Several other systems such as GENPLAN, AUTOPLAN, etc., also use a
CAD database interactively for tool and fixture selection
pla
nn
6.20.4 CAPP BASED ON DECISION LOGIC in
The decision logic determines how a process or processes are selected. The major g,
function of the decision logic is to match the process capabilities with the design an
specification. The different techniques in decision logic are: d
i. Decision trees pr
ii. Decision tables ob
le
T m
hese two techniques are methods of describing or specifying the various actions
sol
associated with the combination of input conditions. vi
ng
6.20.5 CAPP BASED ON ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE (AI)
.
AI can be defined as the ability of a device to perform functions that are normally Ap
associated with the human intelligence. These functions include reasoning,

319
plications for AI have been in natural language processing, intelligent data base
retrieval, expert consulting systems, theorem proving, robotics, scheduling, and
perception problems. Process planning applications have been considered as part of
an expert consulting system.

There are two types of knowledge involved in process planning systems:

Component knowledge, and process knowledge. The component knowledge defines
the current state of the problem to be solved (declarative knowledge). On the other
hand, the knowledge of processes defines how the component can be changed by
processes (procedural knowledge).
There are several methods to represent declarative knowledge:
i. First order predicate calculus
ii. Frames and semantic networks
P
rocedural knowledge can be represented by IF (condition), THEN (action)
statements which are similar to decision trees or decision tables. In AI such rules
can be called production rules.

Even after the descriptive and procedural knowledge have been represented,
conclusions cannot be deduced, because we do not have mechanism to apply the
appropriate rules to the problem. Control knowledge is similar to human knowledge
in reasoning, which deduces certain facts from the knowledge base concerning
problem. This can be a difficult task to program on a computer.
Computer Aided Process Planning has been an active area of research work in
AI for many years. Feature recognition, feature process correlation, process
sequencing, blank

320
 CAD/CAM

selection, cutting parameter selection, tool selection etc. are the segments of CAPP where
AI can contribute to improve the quality of process plans.
The block diagram representation of an expert CAPP system is shown in Fig.6.12.

Rule E xa m p le s
G enerator

Ru le B ase
User Com ponent
K nowledge User
Representation E ditor
Inference Database
E ngine

O peration M achining R e p o rt
Tim e and
Route P aram eter G e n era tio n
G eneration S election Cost E stim ation

P ro cheds
P la n

Fig. 9.12 Block Diagram of Expert CAPP System

6.PLEMENTATION CONSIDERATIONS
39) The process planning function is manufacturing system dependent. This implies
that no one single process planning system can satisfy all of the different
manufacturing systems needs. There are several factors that must be considered
when one attempts to implement a process planning system. These include:
i. Manufacturing system components
ii. Production volume/batch size
iii. Number of different production families
For a moderate number of component families and many similar components in each
family, a variant process planning system is usually the most economic automated
planning alternative. Fig. 6.13 Illustrates the economic regions for the different planning
alternatives.

VARIANT GE NE RA TIVE
PROCES S PROCES S
COM PO NENTS
NUM BER OF
PER FAM ILY

PLANNING PLANNING
AVE RA GE

M ANIPROCES S
PLANNING

NUM BER OF PART FAM ILIE S

Fig. 9.13 Economic Regions for Different Types of Process Planning

321
Computer Aided Process Planning

6.22 PROCESS PLANNING SYSTEMS

The majority of existing process planning systems is based on variant process planning
approach. Some of them are: CAPP, MIPLAN, MITURN, MIAPP, UNIVATION,
CINTURN, COMCAPPV, etc. However, there are some generative system, such as
METCAPP, CPPP, AUTAP, and APPAS. Some of the planning systems are discussed in
the following paragraph. These are systems continuously evolving in many cases. The
descriptions are therefore only approximate.

6.22.1 CAM-I CAPP

The CAM-I (Computer Aided Manufacturing-International) system (CAPP) is perhaps
the most widely used of all process planning systems. CAPP is a database management
system written in ANSI standard FORTRAN. It provides a structure for a data base,
retrieval logic, and interactive editing capability. The coding scheme for part
classification and the output format are added by the user.
PI-CAPP, an extension of CAPP, has its own (built-in) coding and classification
system. This eliminates the requirement of a user developed coding scheme. A typical
CAPP system is shown in Fig. 6.14.
M
U
PART FAM ILY
M ATR IX FILE
STANDAR D
SEQ UENCE
O PERATIO N
PLA N FILE
APPLICATION
PRO G RAM S
LT
FILE
IC
A
PART HEAD ER STANDAR D O PERATIO N W OR K
FAM ILY DATA SEQ UENCE PLAN ELEM EN T PP
SEARC H INPUT RETRIEVAL RETRIEVAL/ PRO CESSO R
FILE EDIT sy
PART ste
C L A S S IF IC AT IO N
CODE m
PRO CESS PRO CESS PRO CESS is
PLAN PLAN PLAN
FOR M ATTER STO RE sh
ow
n
Fig.6.14 CAPP System in
Fi
6.22.2 MIPLAN AND MULTICAPP g.
Both MIPLAN and MULTICAPP were developed in conjunction with OIR 6.
(Organization for Industrial Research). They are both variant systems that use the 15
MICLASS coding system for part description. They are data retrieval systems .
which retrieve process plans based on part code, part number, family matrix, and
code range. By inputting a part code, parts with a similar code are retrieved. The
process plan for each part is then displayed and edited by the user. A typical

322
323
 CAD/CAM

SIGN ON
SECURITY

CREATE FINISH RETRIEVE PRINT MANAGEMENT

TYPE
LIST PROCESS
PLANNING
FILES
RETRIEVE MULTICLASS RETRIEVE BY
BY MATRIX CODE AND INFORMATION
MATCH RETRIEVE WITHIN PLAN STANDARD
PART FILES
RETRIEVE LIST AND DRAWING NO
BY DRG.NO DISPLAY CODE NO
SECURITY
EDIT FILE

REPLACE, STORE PRINT RE-EDIT

DELETE STANDARD
RENAME TEXT FILE
RE-EDIT

Fig. 6.15 MULTICAPP System

6.22.3 APPAS AND CADCAM

APPAS is a generative system for detailed process selection. CADCAM is an example of
APPAS. CADCAM operates using a CAD “front end” to interface with APPAS. APPAS
describes the detailed technological information of each machined surface by means of a
special code. CADCAM provides an interactive graphics interface to APPAS.
Components can be modeled graphically and edited interactively.

6.22.4 AUTOPLAN AND RPO

AUTOPLAN is generative only in the detailing of the part. The process selection and
process sequencing level do not differ significantly from CAPP or MIPLAN. The four
major modules of the system are:
i. Group technology retrieval-process plan retrieval.
ii. Graphical planning aides- tooling layout, verification and work instruction and
preparation.
iii. Generative process planning.
iv. Process optimization.

6.22.5 AUTAP SYSTEM

The AUTAP system is one of the most complete planning systems in use today. AUTAP
uses primitives to construct a part similar to a constructive solid geometry (CSG).
AUTAP is a system designed especially to interface with a CAD system. It can be
installed as part of an integrated CAD/CAM system.

324
Computer Aided Process Planning

6.PP
40) CPPP (computerized production process planning) was designed for
planning cylindrical parts. CPPP is capable of generating a summary of
operations and the detailed operation sheets required for production. The
principle behind CPPP is a composite component concept. A composite
component can be thought of as an imaginary component which contains all
the features of components in one part family. CPPP incorporates a special
language, COPPL, to describe the process model. CPPP allows an interactive
mode whereby the planner can interact with the system at several fixed
interaction points.
6.GARI
41) GARI is an experimental problem solver which uses artificial intelligence
(AI) techniques. The unique feature of the GARI is the representation of
planning knowledge. GARI employs a production rule knowledge base to
store process capabilities.

6.22.8 TIPPS
Although the process planning steps have been discussed, an integrated approach to
generative process planning has yet to be presented. TIPPS is acronym for Totally.
TIPPS has the following features:
• It has a modular structure
• It can interact with a CAD system
• t allows for interactive surface identification
• It contains a process/knowledge description language

PROCESS CAD
KNOWLEDGE CAD DATABASE
MODEL

PROCESS TIPPS TIPPS

KNOWLEDGE PREPROCESSOR CAD DATA
INTERPRETER

SURFACE SURFACE
MARKING FILE
MODULE

PROCESS
KNOWLEDGE PROCESS PROCESS
DATA SELECTION FILE
MODULE

PROCESS PARAMETER
PARAMETER FILE
MODULE

REPORT PROCESS
GENERATOR PLAN
MODULE

Fig. 6.16 TIPPS

Figure 6.16 shows a block diagram representation of TIPPS software.

325
 CAD/CAM

QUESTIONS
1. Discuss the importance of process planning in product development.
2. What is the need for computer aided process planning? What are its advantages?

3. Describe the structure of a process plan.

4. What are the major modules of a process planning software and the databases
required?
5. What is the need for CAD based process plans?
6. Discuss the principle and advantages of group technology coding.

7. Classify a component using either OPITZ or MICLASS system.

8. Discuss the principle of variant process planning.

9. What is generative process planning?

10. What are the modules of a generative process planning software?

11. Compare variant and generative process planning methodologies.

12. Describe any one computer aided process planning software.

13. Discuss how group technology is used in designing manufacturing cells.

14. How could artificial intelligence (AI) be used in generative process planning?

15. Two components are shown in Fig. 6.17. Do they belong to the same part family?
Discuss.
Dia.130
Dia.200
Dia. 140

Dia 60
Dia 50

Dia.120
Dia40

10
160 15
35 185
45
70

Fig. 6.17 Rotational Components

326
 UNIT-VII

COMPUTER AIDED QUALITY CONTROL

327
7.1 INTRODUCTION
Getting anything right first time costs money. However, it also saves money. While the
cost of getting it right increases, the cost of getting it wrong decreases. The important
thing is to establish the level at which these curves cross and to achieve the optimum in
terms of quality costs. However there is a further factor in the equation i.e. that of
customer satisfaction. Quality control, which encompasses inspection, measurement and
testing, is a vital part of any manufacturing activity and is applied to ensure consistently
high quality in manufactured goods.
The quality control (QC) function has traditionally been performed using manual
inspection methods and statistical sampling procedures. Manual inspection is generally a
time consuming procedure, which involves precise, yet monotonous work. Parts may
have to be removed from the vicinity of the production machines to a separate inspection
area. This causes delays and often obstructs smooth flow of the components through
different processes. Manufacturing schedules are also often upset because of this delay.
Inherent in the use of statistical sampling procedures is acknowledgement of the risk
that some defective parts will slip through. Indeed, statistical quality control implies that
a certain expected or average fraction defect rate will be generated during the production/
inspection process. The nature of traditional statistical QC procedures is that something
less than 100% good quality must be tolerated.

There is another aspect of statistical QC inspection process, which detracts it from its
usefulness. It is often performed after the parts are already made. If the parts are defective
they must be scrapped or reworked at an additional cost. There are several economic,
social, and technological factors at work to modernize the quality control function. The
economic factors include high cost of inspection and desire to eliminate inspection as a
source of costly delay in manufacture. The social factors include the ever-increasing
demand by customers for near perfection in the quality of manufactured items. The
technical factors consist of several important advances, which have been made, in
inspection automation.
Computer integrated manufacturing attempts to solve this problem in a different ways

328
7.2 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT (TQM)
In chapter 3, we discussed the application of concurrent engineering to product
development. The total quality management is based on more or less the same
philosophy. TQM is based on the assumption that quality cannot be “inspected into” a
product; it must be “built into” it. That means any amount of inspection after the products
or the components are manufactured will not help to improve the quality. One must look
at the process itself to avoid production of poor quality products. To ensure this,
consideration of the following aspects is necessary.

i. Quality of design: Primary attribute of a good product is that the quality of its
design must be superior. There are several factors, which influence the design
quality.

These include:
• Choice of right materials
• Selection of appropriate raw material shapes
• Design involving minimum number of parts
• Use of standardization and variety reduction
• Reduction in the material removed during processing
• Economic use of materials
• Use of standard/bought out parts
A good product can be evolved if the design is analyzed using “Failure Modes,
Effects and Criticality Analysis (FMECA)” as well as “Design for Manufacture and
Assembly (DFMA)” techniques. Softwares are now available to carry out this task. The
use of FMECA and DFMA techniques will ensure that all the weak aspects of design,
which affect product quality and make manufacturing difficult, can be identified and
rectified before the drawings are released for manufacture.
ii. Selection of appropriate process and equipment: Proper design of the
manufacturing technique plays an important role in the quality of the product.

329
Computer Aided Quality Control

CIM lays great emphasis on manufacturing technology development for new

product development, which often requires new manufacturing techniques or
refinement of existing technique. However, choice of appropriate technique of
manufacture is a key issue influencing the quality of the product.
iii. Choice of equipment: Choice of process equipment is another vital factor. The
equipment must have the capability to produce parts of requisite quality without
extra attention on the part of the operator. Since CIM uses equipment like
computerized machines and handling equipment with integrated process
monitoring and control, this aspect has been well taken care of.
iv. Training of personnel: One of the important aspects of quality production is that
the personnel involved in the production must be properly and adequately trained
to carry out their task. They ought to know how to produce the product, with the
required quality. They should be well aware of the quality requirements. The
axiom “doing it right, the first time, every time” is significant in this context.

Today, every manufacturer is keen to obtain ISO-9000 certification. Implementation

of CIM automatically takes care of many documentation and communication
requirements of ISO-9000, right from product design to testing and shipping, covering
the entire gamut of manufacture.
pr
oc
7.3 QC AND CIM ess
A wide range of computer-based instrumentation is being used for quality control. ,
In particular the increased sophistication of sensors and transducers, which are part an
of CIM, is making it easier to carry out pre-process, in-process, and post-process d
inspection. Inspection and testing are meant to reduce wastage and make maximum wh
use of resources. ich
The incorporation of digital techniques in manufacturing systems and the use of ha
computers and microprocessors for controlling manufacturing processes have s
resulted in the introduction of several types of inspection techniques. In modern the
manufacturing systems, inspection is no longer considered as an appraisal oriented po
process (ACCEPTED/ REJECTED) but as prevention oriented process. At present, ten
inspection with the use of computers has acquired a status of its own known as tia
COMPUTER AIDED INSPECTION (CAI) and is an integral part of Computer l
Integrated Manufacturing. for
The present day concern in any manufacturing shop is to ensure that every pr
component and the end product produced should meet an established and well- ov
defined quality levels. It should also to aim at a cost effective inspection system. idi
This calls for an inspection system, which should be able to track the production ng
inf

330
ormation to implement corrective action before the process goes out of

control. This can be carried out by both contact type and non-contact type
inspection which can collect the data not only to qualify or classify a component but
also to correct the manufacturing process that may cause undesirable deviation. The
additional advantages of non-contact type systems are the instant data collection and
data evaluation with less human effort. In addition to this, integration of the latest
measuring systems with the manufacturing activities and use of computer for
controlling, directing, machining, inspecting etc., result in the total integration of
manufacturing.

331
7.4 INSPECTION AND TESTING
Inspection is normally used to examine whether a product conforms to the design
standards specified for it. For a mechanical component, this would be probably concerned
with the dimensions, surface texture and tolerances specified for the part. Non-
conforming goods result in scrap, rework, and the loss of customer goodwill.
The common situations that warrant inspection are:
• Incoming materials (raw materials, standard items, subcontracted parts)
• Stage inspection during manufacturing (e.g., when the parts are moved from one
production section to another)
A
• t the completion of processing of the parts
B
• efore shipping the final assembled product to the customer.
W
hereas inspection is a regular activity in production, testing is a significant stage of
work in product development to prove the capability of the product. Testing is normally
associated with the functional aspect of item, and is often directed at the final product
rather than its components. Testing consists of the appraisal of the performance of the
final product under actual or simulated conditions. If the product successfully passes the
tests, it is deemed suitable for use. Testing ascertains the quality of performance of the
product.

Various categories of tests used for final product evaluation are listed below:
• Functional tests under normal or simulated operating conditions
• Fatigue or wear tests to determine the product’s life function until failure
O
• verload tests to determine the level of safety factor built into the product
E
• nvironmental testing to determine how well the product will perform under
d
ifferent environments (e.g. humidity, temperature, vibration).
Another test that is often resorted to is destructive testing. This is a procedure that
results in destruction of the item in order to measure the property of interest. A common
example is the tensile test on a metal specimen to determine the metal’s strength and
ductility properties. Destructive testing is often employed as an inspection procedure,
because it is often applied to raw materials, partially processed materials and component
parts. It can also be applied to the final product. However, destructive test for final
products is very expensive and would be done on a very limited sampling basis. Tests at
the prototype stage yield valuable information for product improvement.

332
Computer Aided Quality Control

7.5 STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROL (SPC)

A controlled production process is one in which only random causes influence quality
variation. It means that the process parameters which affect the variability of the process
is well under control and the process monitoring mechanism can detect any significant
change in the process. Statistical process control (SPC) is widely employed in CIM to
exercise process control. SPC uses X charts, R charts and SIGMA charts to monitor
process variability. Measuring instruments are directly linked to microprocessor-based
equipment to process the data and display results.

7.6 OBJECTIVES OF CAQC

The objectives of computer-aided quality control are to:

i. Improve product quality
ii. Increase productivity in the inspection process
iii. Increase productivity
iv. Reduce lead-time
v. Reduce wastage due to scrap/rework

The strategy for achieving these objectives is basically to automate the

inspection process through the application of computers combined with sensor
technology. Where technically possible and economically feasible, inspection
should be done on a 100% basis rather sampling.

333
7.7 ROLE OF COMPUTER IN QC
Computer-aided inspection (CAI) and computer aided testing (CAT) are the two
major segments of computer-aided quality control. Whereas these activities have
been traditionally performed manually (with the help of gauges, measuring devices
and testing apparatus), CAI and CAT are performed automatically using computer
and sensor technology. Today, CAI and CAT can be well integrated into the overall
CIM system.
The implications of the use of computer-aided quality control are important. The
automated methods of CAQC will result in significant improvements in product
quality. The following list summarizes the important benefits of CAQC.
With Computer aided inspection and computer aided testing inspection and testing
will typically be done on a 100% basis rather by the sampling procedures

334
normally used in traditional QC. This eliminates any problem in assembly later and
therefore is important in CIM.
ii. Inspection is integrated into the manufacturing process. This will help to reduce
the lead-time to complete the parts.
iii. The use of non-contact sensors is recommended for computer aided inspection
and CIM. With contact inspection devices, the part must be stopped and often
repositioned to allow the inspection device to be applied properly. These
activities take time. With non-contact sensing devices the parts can be inspected
while in operation. The inspection can thus be completed in a fraction of a
second.
iv. The on-line non-contact sensors are useful as the feedback element of adaptive
control systems. These systems will be capable of making adjustments to the
process variables based on analysis of the data including trend analysis. An
example of the application of trend analysis can be found in the compensation of
gradual wear of cutting tool in a machining operation. This would not only help
to identify out-of-tolerance conditions but also to take corrective action. By
regulating the process in this manner, parts will be made much closer to the
desired nominal dimension rather than merely within tolerance. This will help to
reduce scrap losses and improve product quality.
v. Sensor technology will not be the only manifestation of automation in CAQC.
Intelligent robots fitted with computer vision and other sensors, as an integral
part of completely automated test cells is also a feature of CIM.
vi. An important feature of QC in a CIM environment is that the CAD/CAM
database will be used to develop inspection plan.
As mentioned earlier inspection can be either contact or non-contact type. The contact
method usually involves the use of coordinate measuring machines (CMM).

7.8 COORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE

The coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is the most prominent example of the
equipment used for contact inspection of parts. When used for CIM these machines are
controlled by CNC. A typical three-dimensional measuring machine consists of a table,
which holds the part in a fixed, position, and movable head, which holds a sensing, probe.
The probe can be moved in three directions corresponding to the X, Y and Z Coordinates.
For manual operation, the control unit is provided with joysticks, or other devices which
drive X, Y and Z servo motors (AC/DC).

During operation, the probe is brought into contact with the part surface to be
measured and the three co-ordinate positions are indicated to a high level of accuracy.
Typical accuracies of these machines are in the neighborhood of + 0.004 mm with a
resolution of 0.001 mm. The measuring accuracy of a typical CMM is quoted 2.6 + L/300
micrometers, where L is the measured length in mm.

335
Computer Aided Quality Control

A typical CNC CMM is shown in Fig. 7.1.

Vertical Slide

Probe Bridge

Monitor

Computer
Printer
.
+
Table

336
The major features of a CMM are:
(i) Stationary granite measuring table: Granite table provides a stable reference
plane for locating parts to be measured. It is provided with a grid of threaded
holes defining clamping locations and facilitating part mounting. As the table has
a high load carrying capacity and is accessible from three sides, it can be easily
integrated into the material flow system of CIM.
(ii) Length measuring system: A 3-axis CMM is provided with digital incremental
length measuring system for each axis.

(iii) Air bearings: The bridge, cross beam and spindle of the CMM are supported on
air bearings with high rigidity. They are designed insensitive to vibrations.

(iv) Control unit: The control unit allows manual measurement and self teach
programming in addition to CNC operation. The control unit is microprocessor
controlled. Usually a joystick is provided to activate the drive for manual
measurement.

CNC Measuring Centres are provided with dynamic probe heads and a probe
changing system, which can be operated manually or automatically.
(v) Software: The CMM, the computer and the software together represent one
system whose efficiency and cost effectiveness depend to a large extent on the
software.

The features of CMM software will include:

• Measurement of diameter, centre distances, lengths, geometrical and form errors
in prismatic components etc.
• On-line statistics for statistical information in a batch.
• Parameter programming to minimize CNC programming time of similar parts.
• Measurement of plane and spatial curves.
• Data communications.
• Digital input and output commands for process integration
• Programs for the measurement of spur, helical, bevel and hypoid gears.
• Interface to CAD software.

Typical software may also provide a generalized method for reverse engineering
complex shaped objects. The component is digitized, taking a dense set of points, using a
CNC CMM. The digitized data is then converted into a computer model, which describes
the true surface of the component, with allowance for the digitizing probe diameter. The
model may then be expanded, offset or mirrored to an allowance for the manufacturing

337
process.
Recent advances in CMM technology are based largely on greater intelligence
features provided by the computer software. These advances include the capability for
automatic work part alignment on the table, interactive programming of the CMM for
inspection personnel who are not experienced in the use of computers. Besides this, the
software has the capability to orient the coordinate system as required (between polar and
Cartesian coordinate systems). Similarly translation of origin can be effected as desired.
Savings in inspection time by using CMM are significant. Typically between 5 and
10% of the time is required on a CMM compared to traditional manual inspection
methods. Other advantages include consistency in the inspection process from one part to
the next, which cannot be matched by manual inspection, and reductions in production
delays to get approval of the first workpiece in a batch.

7.8.1 ADVANTAGES OF CNC OPERATION OF CMM

CNC operation increases cost effectiveness through the following advantages:
i. Shorter measuring times
ii. Higher throughput rates

iii. Better repeatability

iv. Economical even for small batches

v. Simple operation

vi. Unmanned second and third shift inspection of parts if parts are loaded
automatically.

7.9 NON-CONTACT INSPECTION METHODS

The field of non-contact inspection, in particular optical inspection is composed of the
following basic areas:

i. Inspection of part dimensions.

ii. Inspection of surface defects.

iii. Inspection of completed or semi-completed parts.

T
Computer Aided Quality Control iii. h
e
The main advantages of non-contact inspection are: r
i. It eliminates the need to reposition the workpiece. e
ii. Non-contact inspection is faster than contact inspection.
i

338
 s no mechanical wear encountered in the contact inspection probe.
T
iv. he possibility of damage to the surface of a part due to measuring pressure is
eliminated.
S
ome of the examples of non-contact inspection are laser interferometer
measuring system, laser telemetric measuring system, machine vision system and
optical gauging. These are discussed below.

7.LASER INTERFEROMETER MEASURING SYSTEM

42) Presently lasers are used as length measuring devices. They are commonly
used for positional accuracy measurements. They are also used as length
measuring machines of high accuracy (accuracy of the order of 0.01
micrometer). The feed back of this can be used for positioning of the machine
and also for computation of measurements.
Nowadays it has become a common practice to use laser-measuring system for
the calibration of CNC machines. Using laser-measuring system the measurements
performed are reliable, accurate and faster compared to conventional methods. The
laser interferometer can be directly interfaced with a computer. This makes it easy
for the operator to evaluate the results as per the evaluation procedures mentioned in
various standards like AMT, AFNOR, VDI, MTTA, and JIS etc. Using different
attachments laser interferometer is also used for other measurements like
straightness, flatness, squareness, velocity, pitch, yaw etc.

339
7.9.2 LASER TELEMETRIC MEASURING SYSTEMS
This is a high speed gauging system providing accuracy and repeatability of a
contact type gauge with versatility of a non-contact type of gauge. The principle is
explained below:
A thin band of laser beam projects from a transmitter to receiver. When an
object is placed across the beam, the object casts a shadow. The signal from light
entering the receiver is used by the microprocessor to detect the shadow and to
calculate the dimension represented by the distance between the edges of the
shadow.

The transmitter module contains a low power He-Ne gas laser and its power
supply, a specially designed collimating lens, a synchronous motor, multi-faced
reflector prism, a synchronous pulse detector and protective window. This produces
a collimated parallel scanning laser beam moving at a high and constant speed. The
scanning beam appears as a line of red light. The receiver module collects and photo
electrically senses the laser light transmitted past the object being measured. The
processor electronics takes the receiver signals and converts them to digital signal
and displays the dimensions being gauged.

The information thus collected is processed not only to qualify or classify a part
but also can be used to correct the manufacturing process that might have caused the
undesirable deviation. This is done automatically without touching the part and
without the need for human intervention. The microprocessor actuates precise
computer control of continuously manufactured parts. The prompting formats guide
the operator regarding the gauge setting. The operational procedures notify the
operator in case any error occurs in the system by displaying error message on the
CRT terminal. It also keeps the operator informed about the product in the
production process, displays, prints out and records the complete measured and
analyzed results.

Laser telemetric measuring systems give out a number of signal outputs and
processing options to make the dimensional measurement more useful in production
environment. Examples are listed below:
i. A high/low limit alarm option, which activates lights and connector panel,
output when the tolerance limits are exceeded.
ii. A process control option, which makes it possible to provide a closed loop
control of the diameter of a continuously processed product..

340
 9.4.3 VISION SYSTEM
A vision system can be defined as a system for automatic acquisition and analysis of
images to obtain desired data for interpreting or controlling an activity. In a broader
sense, the term is applied to a wide range of non-contact electro-optical sensing
techniques from simple triangulation and profiling to a 3D object recognition technique.
These are based on sophisticated computerized image analysis routines. The applications
range from relatively simple detection and measuring tasks to full-blown robot control,
which include quality assurance, sorting, material handling and process control, robot
guidance, calibration and testing, machine monitoring and safety.
The schematic diagram of a typical vision system is shown in Fig 7.2. This system
involves image acquisition, image processing or image analysis and interpretation.
Acquisition requires appropriate lighting, the use of electronic camera and means of
storing a digital representation of the image. Processing involves manipulating the digital
image to simplify and reduce number of data points that must be handled by subsequent
analytical routines used to interpret the data. Computers with suitable softwares are used
for this purpose.

341
Computer Aided Quality Control

Digitized Store Feature

Image Extraction

Measurement
Software
Camera

Light Source

PART TO BE
INSPECTED

Fig. 7.2 Typical Vision System

By using the vision systems measurements can be carried out at any angle along
all the three reference axes X, Y and Z without contacting the part. The measured
values of the component parameters are then compared with the specified
tolerances, which are stored in the memory of the computer.
The measured values, the specified values with the deviation and an indicating
on whether the part is passed or not passed are displayed on the VDU. Using a
sorting system it is also possible to sort the parts based on these results.
Computer vision systems offer several advantages like reduction of tooling and
fixture costs, elimination of need for precise part location for handling by robots and
integrated automation of dimensional verification and defect detection.

342
7.9.4 NON-CONTACT CNC CMM
The non-contact CNC CMM inspects a part by observing it with a video camera,
analyzing the image and outputting the results. The construction of this CMM is
similar to that of a conventional CMM. These are particularly useful to measure the
following workpieces, which are difficult to measure with contact method:
• Printed circuit boards.
• Pins and connectors.

• Injection molded plastic items.

• Pressed parts.

• IC package.

• Ceramic parts.

• Photoelectric parts.

• Etched parts.

Some non-contact CMM’s operate using laser digitization technique. These are
particularly suitable for measurement of complex 3-D surfaces. This equipment
makes
product data generation for reverse engineering an easy task.

343
 CAD/CAM

7.PAST PROCESS METROLOGY

The process of measuring the workpieces during machining and automatically
updating the machine tool offsets in the control system to maintain the
dimensional quality of the workpiece machined without any manual
intervention is called post process metrology. Post process gauging in particular
embraces a variety of cost saving and quality control techniques.

The advantages of post-process gauging can be seen from Fig. 7.3. which shows the
conventional use of CNC machines with a long set-up time and first off approval cycle
delaying the start of full speed production. The post process metrology set-up can reduce
the cost and time of production. In this case the set up time and first off inspection time
constitute the total time for trial production. Also the faults can be rapidly detected and
corrected during the process itself.
One of the common methods of post process metrology is by using a touch trigger
probe. This can be incorporated into the machining centre or a CNC lathe to perform the
gauging operation on workpieces. These are omni-directional probes with inductive,
optical or infrared transmission, which incorporates a sensitive electrical contact, and
deflect from its home position when the pressure is applied.
At the start of the cycle, the probe is placed in the tool magazine of the machine tool.
The probe movement will be programmed as per the gauging of the component for its
dimensional parameters. As per the programmed sequence the probe takes the position in
the spindle in the place of cutter and moves in the required sequence to gauge the
component.

PROGRAM P R OG RAM
IN P U T INP U T

S IM U LAT IO N S IM U LATIO N

D R Y RU N D R Y RU N

TR IA L TR IA L
P R OD UC TIO N P R OD UC TIO N
M AN U AL M AN U AL
O F FS E T O F FS E T
C OR R EC TIO N C OR R EC TIO N
INS P E C TIO N P R OB ING

NO NO
OK OK

YES YES

P R OD UC TIO N P R OD UC TIO N

Fig. 7.3 Production of Parts with and without Post Process Metrology

344
Computer Aided Quality Control

The signals from the probe will be transmitted to the control system to initiate the
corrective action. After incorporating the correction through tool offset, the full speed
production will be started.
The general applications of probe systems are given below:
Inspection
Component verification
In-cycle gauging
Digitizing
Tool setting
Job set up
Tool breakage detection
The data from the probe systems can be communicated to the machine control unit in
three ways:
a. Inductive transmission
b. Hard-wired transmission
c. Optical transmission
The actual gauging cycle, contained in the part programme, is brought into action
between cutting cycles. Based on the information received from the measuring system
corrective action through appropriate offset values will be incorporated in the system to
machine the component to the required size.
ac
cu
7.COMPUTER AIDED INSPECTION USING ROBOTS
rat
Robots can be used to carry out inspection or testing operations for ely
mechanical dimensions and other physical characteristics and product an
performance. Generally robot must work with other pieces of equipment in d
order to perform the operations. Examples include machine vision systems, qu
robot manipulated inspection and/or testing equipment.
ick
ly
Checking robot, programmable robot, and co-ordinate robot are some of the
det
titles given to multi-axis measuring machines aimed at high-speed measurement.
ect
These machines automatically perform all the basic routines of a CNC co-ordinate
e
measuring machine but at a faster rate than that of a CMM. These machines are
designed to be used in environments such as shop floor. They are not as accurate as
precision CMM’s but they can check up to accuracies of 5 micrometres which is
often sufficient for many applications. However, quality levels can be improved by
increasing the number of inspections. By using robots the dimensional drifts can be

345
and the appropriate process action can be taken. One example is, segregating the
components according to the tolerance specifications.
Using the modern touch trigger probe, a co-ordinate robot or a pair of robots can take
successive readings at high speed and evaluate the results using a computer graphics
based real time statistical analysis system. This gives high-speed data processing of
measured information and can provide early warning of rejection. The computer also
monitors the geometry and wear of the tools, which produce the component. After the
measurement, if the component is not acceptable it is placed on a conveyor where it
slides under gravity into REJECT bin.

7.12 INTEGRATED COMPUTER AIDED INSPECTION SYSTEMS

Automation in industries is intended to provide a batch oriented manufacturing. The
integration of the activities starting from design to the part coming out of the factory
leads to total automation. This closes the loop in a computer integrated manufacturing
system. Some of the integrated systems are available in different configurations,
examples being integrated CAD/CAM/CAI Systems with robots etc. Some of these are
discussed in the following sections:

7.12.1 INTEGRATION OF CAD/CAM WITH INSPECTION SYSTEM

CAD/CAM systems are seen as a natural adjunct to automatic gauging wherein a product
is designed, manufactured and inspected in one automatic process. There is a strong trend
in the direction of a closed loop, fully adaptive manufacturing system.
One of the critical factors in manufacturing quality assurance is to ensure that every
part coming off the production line is within design tolerance. The successful factory
constantly monitors quality at each step of design and manufacturing process. In the
shop, the coordinate measuring machine assists in this quality assurance function. The
productivity of the coordinate measuring machine can be improved by interfacing with a
CAD/CAM system. Interfacing with the CAD/CAM database, the operator can use the
off-line programming capabilities of the CMM interface to process the input values for
the part geometry being measured. This eliminates the laborious manual data entry
techniques and reduces preparation time and increases availability of CMM for
inspection.

The CAD/CAM-CMM interface helps the programming efforts in the quality

assurance office where quick response to engineering changes can be made and current
data to the CMM can be provided. Generally the CAD/CAM-CMM interface consists of
a number of modules as shown in Fig. 7.4.

346
Computer Aided Quality Control

CAD
MODEL

CMM INTERFACE

PRE CMM PROCESSOR

POST CMM PROCESSOR

Fig. 7.4 CAD/CAM-CMM Interface

i. CMM-Interface: This interface allows interacting with the CAD/CAM database

to generate a source file that can be converted to a CMM control data file. During
source file creation, CMM probe path motions are simulated and displayed on
the CAD/CAM workstation for visual verification.
A set of CMM command statements allow the CMM Interface to take advantage
of most of the CMM’s functional capabilities. These command statements include
setup, part datum control, feature construction, geometric relations, tolerancing,
output control and feature measurements like measurements of lines, points,
arcs/circles, splines, conics, planes, analytic surfaces, tabulated cylinders and
sculptured surfaces.
ii. Pre-CMM processor: The pre-CMM processor converts the language source
file generated by CMM Interface into the language of the specified Coordinate
Measuring Machine. The output is a file stored in the CAD/CAM host
operating system level. Whenever, a statement is encountered which is not
supported by the selected CMM, the pre-CMM processor will display a
warning message. This allows generation of multiple CMM control data files
from one source file.
iii. Post-CMM processor: The post-CMM processor creates wire frame surface
model
from the CMM-ASCII output file. Comments are inserted into the ASCII-CMM
output file to control the creation of the CAD/CAM entities, which include
points, lines, arcs/circles, conics, splines and analytic surfaces.

347
 CAD/CAM

7.13 FLEXIBLE INSPECTION SYSTEM (FIS)

Fig. 7.5 shows the block diagram of a comprehensive flexible inspection system. This
system has been developed with the intention of the integration of the inspection done at
several places in a factory.
FIS also helps to close the loop between the design intent and product performance
and to improve inspection technology and thereby increasing the productivity. A
powerful computer serves as a real time processor to handle part dimensional data and as
a multi-programming system to perform such tasks as manufacturing process control. The
terminal provides interactive communication with personal computers where the
programmes are stored. The typical digital input devices used with this system are
CMM’s, microprocessor based gauges and other inspection devices. The data from
CMM’s and other terminals are fed into the main computer for analysis and feed back
control. The quality control data and inspection data from each station are fed through the
terminals to the main computer. This type of communication could be from more than
one factory location, in which case the data will be communicated through telephone
lines. Even data from acceptance tests on new machine tool building plant are fed to this
computer for analysis. Machine capability studies are also carried out by taking large
samples (30-50 pieces) from a particular machine. Final product audit and inspection are
also carried out with the help of CMM’s and other suitable inspection aids with the
capability of directly feeding the data to the computer. TESA, CARL JOHANSSON and
other manufacturers of metrology equipment supply such integrated systems.
Flexible inspection system involves more than one inspection station. The objective
of the flexible inspection system is to have an off-line multi-station automated
dimensional verification system to increase the production rate, lessen the inspection time
and to maintain the inspection accuracy and data processing integrity. The important
features of FIS include dynamic statistical sampling programs, which provide automatic
adjustment to modify the number of parts, and part features to be inspected based on the
inspection history.

Table

SHOP FLOOR

SERVER

SENSORS

TEST FLOOR

Fig. 7.5 Flexible Inspection System

348
Computer Aided Quality Control

QUESTIONS
1. What is the significance of quality control in CIM?
2. Define total quality management and explain its relevance to CIM.
W
3. What are the objectives of computer aided quality control?

4. Discuss the important benefits of computer-aided quality control.

5. Explain the method of part inspection using a CMM.

6. What are the important features available in CMM software?

7. Discuss major non-contact inspection methods.

8. What is the working principle of computer vision systems?

9. How is post-process metrology incorporated in CNC Machines?

10. Describe the features of a flexible inspection system.

11. Discuss the integration of CAD database and CMM operation.

349
 UNIT-VIII

COMPUTER INTEGRATED MANUFACTURING

SYSTEMS

350
8.1 INTRODUCTION
Computer Integrated Manufacturing (CIM) encompasses the entire range of product
development and manufacturing activities with all the functions being carried out with
the help of dedicated software packages. The data required for various functions are
passed from one application software to another in a seamless manner. For example, the
product data is created during design. This data has to be transferred from the modeling
software to manufacturing software without any loss of data. CIM uses a common
database wherever feasible and communication technologies to integrate design,
manufacturing and associated business functions that combine the automated segments of
a factory or a manufacturing facility. CIM reduces the human component of
manufacturing and thereby relieves the process of its slow, expensive and error-prone
component. CIM stands for a holistic and methodological approach to the activities of the
manufacturing enterprise in order to achieve vast improvement in its performance.

This methodological approach is applied to all activities from the design of the
product to customer support in an integrated way, using various methods, means and
techniques in order to achieve production improvement, cost reduction, fulfillment of
scheduled delivery dates, quality improvement and total flexibility in the manufacturing
system. CIM requires all those associated with a company to involve totally in the
process of product development and manufacture. In such a holistic approach, economic,
social and human aspects have the same importance as technical aspects.
CIM also encompasses the whole lot of enabling technologies including total quality
management, business process reengineering, concurrent engineering, workflow
automation, enterprise resource planning and flexible manufacturing.
A distinct feature of manufacturing today is mass customization. This implies that
though the products are manufactured in large quantities, products must incorporate

351
 CAD/CAM

customer-specific changes to satisfy the diverse requirements of the customers. This

requires extremely high flexibility in the manufacturing system.
The challenge before the manufacturing engineers is illustrated in Fig.8.1.

QUALITY

DELIVERY
COST TIME

Fig 8.1 Challenges in Manufacturing

Manufacturing industries strive to reduce the cost of the product continuously to

remain competitive in the face of global competition. In addition, there is the need to
improve the quality and performance levels on a continuing basis. Another important
requirement is on time delivery. In the context of global outsourcing and long supply
chains cutting across several international borders, the task of continuously reducing
delivery times is really an arduous task. CIM has several software tools to address the
above needs.
Manufacturing engineers are required to achieve the following objectives to be
competitive in a global context.
• Reduction in inventory
• Lower the cost of the product
• Reduce waste
• Improve quality
• Increase flexibility in manufacturing to achieve immediate and rapid response to:
• Product changes
• Production changes
• Process change
• Equipment change
• Change of personnel
au
Integrated Manufacturing to
m
The advances in automation have enabled industries to develop islands of ati

352
on. Examples are flexible manufacturing cells, robotized work cells, flexible
inspection cells etc. One of the objectives of CIM is to achieve the consolidation
and integration of these islands of automation. This requires sharing of information
among different applications or sections of a factory, accessing incompatible and
heterogeneous data and devices. The ultimate objective is to meet the competition
by improved customer satisfaction through reduction in cost, improvement in
quality and reduction in product development time.
CIM makes full use of the capabilities of the digital computer to improve
manufacturing. Two of them are:
i. Variable and Programmable automation
ii. Real time optimization
T
he computer has the capability to accomplish the above for hardware
components of manufacturing (the manufacturing machinery and equipment) and
software component of manufacturing (the application software, the information
flow, database and so on).
The capabilities of the computer are thus exploited not only for the various bits
and pieces of manufacturing activity but also for the entire system of manufacturing.
Computers have the tremendous potential needed to integrate the entire
manufacturing system and thereby evolve the computer integrated manufacturing
system.

8.2 TYPES OF MANUFACTURING

The term “manufacturing” covers a broad spectrum of activities. Metal working
industries, process industries like chemical plants, oil refineries, food processing
industries, electronic industries making microelectronic components, printed circuit
boards, computers and entertainment electronic products etc. are examples of
manufacturing industries. Manufacturing involves fabrication, assembly and testing in a
majority of situations. However, in process industries operations are of a different nature.
Manufacturing industries can be grouped into four categories:
i. Continuous Process Industries
In this type of industry, the production process generally follows a specific
sequence. These industries can be easily automated and computers are widely
used for process monitoring, control and optimization. Oil refineries, chemical
plants, food processing industries, etc are examples of continuous process
industries.
ii. Mass Production Industries
Industries manufacturing fasteners (nuts, bolts etc.), integrated chips,
automobiles, entertainment electronic products, bicycles, bearings etc. which are
all mass produced can be classified as mass production industries. Production
lines are specially designed and optimized to ensure automatic and cost effective
operation. Automation can be either fixed type or flexible.

353
 CAD/CAM

iii. Batch Production (Discrete Manufacturing)

The largest percentage of manufacturing industries can be classified as batch
production industries. The distinguishing features of this type of manufacture are
the small to medium size of the batch, and varieties of such products to be taken
up in a single shop. Due to the variety of components handled, work centres
should have broader specifications. Another important fact is that small batch
size involves loss of production time associated with product changeover.
As mentioned earlier, integration of computer in process industries for production
automation, process monitoring and control and optimization is relatively easy. In the
case of mass production and batch production computer integration faces a number of
problems as there are a large number of support activities which are to be tied together.
These are discussed in detail later in this chapter.
Automation of manufacture has been implemented using different techniques since
the turn of the 20th Century. Fixed automation is the first type to emerge. Single spindle
automatic lathe, multi spindle automatic lathe and transfer lines are examples of fixed
automation. Fixed automation using mechanical, electrical, pneumatic and hydraulic
systems is widely used in automobile manufacturing. This type of automation has a
severe limitation - —hese are designed for a particular product and any product change
will require extensive modifications to the automation system.
The concept of programmable automation was introduced later. These were
electrically controlled systems and programs were stored in punched cards and punched
tapes. Typical examples of programmable automation are:
i. Electrical programme controlled milling machines
ii. Hydraulically operated Automatic lathes with programmable control drum
S
iii. equencing machines with punched card control /plug board control
D
evelopment of digital computers, microelectronics and microprocessors significantly
altered the automation scenario during 1950-1990. Machine control systems are now
designed around microprocessors and microelectronics is part and parcel of industrial
drives and control. The significant advances in miniaturization through integration of
large number of components into small integrated chips and the consequent improvement
in reliability and performance have increased the popularity of microelectronics. This has
resulted in the availability of high performance desktop computing machines as well as
file servers which can be used for industrial control with the help of application software
packages.

354
8.3 EVOLUTION OF COMPUTER INTEGRATED
MANUFACTURING
Computer Integrated Manufacturing (CIM) is considered a natural evolution of the
technology of CAD/CAM which by itself evolved by the integration of CAD and CAM.
Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT, USA) is credited with pioneering the

development in both CAD and CAM. The need to meet the design and manufacturing
requirements of aerospace industries after the Second World War necessitated the
development these technologies. The manufacturing technology available during late
40’s and early 50’s could not meet the design and manufacturing challenges arising out
of the need to develop sophisticated aircraft and satellite launch vehicles. This prompted
the US Air Force to approach MIT to develop suitable control systems, drives and
programming techniques for machine tools using electronic control.
The first major innovation in machine control is the Numerical Control (NC),
demonstrated at MIT in 1952. Early Numerical Control Systems were all basically
hardwired systems, since these were built with discrete systems or with later first
generation integrated chips. Early NC machines used paper tape as an input medium.
Every NC machine was fitted with a tape reader to read paper tape and transfer the
program to the memory of the machine tool block by block. Mainframe computers were
used to control a group of NC machines by mid 60’s. This arrangement was then called
Direct Numerical Control (DNC) as the computer bypassed the tape reader to transfer the
program data to the machine controller. By late 60’s mini computers were being
commonly used to control NC machines. At this stage NC became truly soft wired with
the facilities of mass program storage, off-line editing and software logic control and
processing. This development is called Computer Numerical Control (CNC).

Since 70’s, numerical controllers are being designed around microprocessors,

resulting in compact CNC systems. A further development to this technology is the
distributed numerical control (also called DNC) in which processing of NC program is
carried out in different computers operating at different hierarchical levels - —ypically
from mainframe host computers to plant computers to the machine controller. Today the
CNC systems are built around powerful 32 bit and 64 bit microprocessors. PC based
systems are also becoming increasingly popular.

Manufacturing engineers also started using computers for such tasks like inventory
control, demand forecasting, production planning and control etc. CNC technology was
adapted in the development of co-ordinate measuring machine’s (CMMs) which
automated inspection. Robots were introduced to automate several tasks like machine
loading, materials handling, welding, painting and assembly. All these developments led
to the evolution of flexible manufacturing cells and flexible manufacturing systems in
late 70’s.
E

355
volution of Computer Aided Design (CAD), on the other hand was to cater to the
geometric modeling needs of automobile and aeronautical industries. The
developments in computers, design workstations, graphic cards, display devices and
graphic input and output devices during the last ten years have been phenomenal.
This coupled with the development of operating system with graphic user interfaces
and powerful interactive (user friendly) software packages for modeling, drafting,
analysis and optimization provides the necessary tools to automate the design
process.
CAD in fact owes its development to the APT language project at MIT in early
50’s. Several clones of APT were introduced in 80’s to automatically develop NC
codes from
the geometric model of the component. Now, one can model, draft, analyze,
simulate, modify, optimize and create the NC code to manufacture a component and
simulate the machining operation sitting at a computer workstation.
If we review the manufacturing scenario during 80’s we will find that the
manufacturing is characterized by a few islands of automation. In the case of design,
the task is well automated. In the case of manufacture, CNC machines, DNC
systems, FMC, FMS etc provide tightly controlled automation systems. Similarly
computer control has been implemented in several areas like manufacturing resource
planning, accounting, sales, marketing and purchase. Yet the full potential of
computerization could not be obtained unless all the segments of manufacturing are
integrated, permitting the transfer of data across various functional modules. This
realization led to the concept of computer integrated manufacturing. Thus the
implementation of CIM required the development of whole lot of computer
technologies related to hardware and software.

356
 CAD/CAM

8.4 CIM HARDWARE AND CIM SOFTWARE

CIM Hardware comprises the following:
i. Manufacturing equipment such as CNC machines or computerized work centres,
robotic work cells, DNC/FMS systems, work handling and tool handling devices,
storage devices, sensors, shop floor data collection devices, inspection machines
etc.

ii. Computers, controllers, CAD/CAM systems, workstations / terminals, data entry

terminals, bar code readers, RFID tags, printers, plotters and other peripheral
devices, modems, cables, connectors etc.,
C
IM software comprises computer programmes to carry out the following functions:
Management Information System
Sales
Marketing
Finance
Database Management
Modeling and Design
Analysis
Simulation
Communications
Monitoring
Production Control
Manufacturing Area Control
Job Tracking
Q
Computer Integrated Manufacturing
ua
Inventory Control lit
y
Shop Floor Data Collection
M
Order Entry an
Materials Handling ag
Device Drivers e
Process Planning m
en
Manufacturing Facilities Planning
t
Work Flow Automation
Business Process Engineering
Network Management
8.5

357
NATURE AND ROLE OF THE ELEMENTS OF
CIM SYSTEM
Nine major elements of a CIM system are in Fig 8.2. They are:
Marketing
Product Design
Planning
Purchase
Manufacturing Engineering
Factory Automation Hardware
Warehousing
Logistics and Supply Chain Management
Finance
Information Management

Fig.8.2 Major Elements of a CIM System

358
 CAD/CAM

i. Marketing: The need for a product is identified by the marketing division. The
specifications of the product, the projection of manufacturing quantities and the
strategy for marketing the product are also decided by the marketing department.
Marketing also works out the manufacturing costs to assess the economic
viability of the product.
ii. Product Design: The design department of the company establishes the initial
database for production of a proposed product. In a CIM system this is
accomplished through activities such as geometric modeling and computer aided
design while considering the product requirements and concepts generated by the
creativity of the design engineer. Configuration management is an important
activity in many designs. Complex designs are usually carried out by several
teams working simultaneously, located often in different parts of the world. The
design process is constrained by the costs that will be incurred in actual
production and by the capabilities of the available production equipment and
processes. The design process creates the database required to manufacture the
part.
iii. Planning: The planning department takes the database established by the design
department and enriches it with production data and information to produce a
plan for the production of the product. Planning involves several subsystems
dealing with materials, facility, process, tools, manpower, capacity, scheduling,
outsourcing, assembly, inspection, logistics etc. In a CIM system, this planning
process should be constrained by the production costs and by the production
equipment and process capability, in order to generate an optimized plan.
iv. Purchase: The purchase departments is responsible for placing the purchase
orders and follow up, ensure quality in the production process of the vendor,
receive the items, arrange for inspection and supply the items to the stores or
arrange timely delivery depending on the production schedule for eventual
supply to manufacture and assembly.
v. Manufacturing Engineering: Manufacturing Engineering is the activity of
carrying out the production of the product, involving further enrichment of the
database with performance data and information about the production equipment
and processes. In CIM, this requires activities like CNC programming, simulation
and computer aided scheduling of the production activity.
vi. Factory Automation Hardware: Factory automation equipment further enriches
the database with equipment and process data, resident either in the operator or
the equipment to carry out the production process. In CIM system this consists of
computer controlled process machinery such as CNC machine tools, flexible

vii. Manufacturing systems (FMS), Computer controlled robots, material handling

systems, computer controlled assembly systems, flexibly automated inspection
systems and so on.

359
Computer Integrated Manufacturing

viii. Warehousing: Warehousing is the function involving storage and

retrieval of raw materials, components, finished goods as well as shipment
of items. In today’s complex outsourcing scenario and the need for just-in-
time supply of components and subsystems, logistics and supply chain
management assume great importance.

ix. Finance: Finance deals with the resources pertaining to money. Planning of
investment, working capital, and cash flow control, realization of receipts,
accounting and allocation of funds are the major tasks of the finance
departments.

Fig.8.3 Various Activities in CIM

FEM - —inite Element Modeling MeM - —echanism Modeling ERP - —

nterprise
Resource Planning
ix. Information Management: Information Management is perhaps one of the
crucial tasks in CIM. This involves master production scheduling, database
management, communication, manufacturing systems integration and
management information systems.
It can be seen from Fig 1.3 that CIM technology ties together all the manufacturing
and related functions in a company. Implementation of CIM technology thus involves
basically integration of all the activities of the enterprise.

360
 CAD/CAM

8.6 DEVELOPMENT OF CIM

CIM is an integration process leading to the integration of the manufacturing enterprise.
Fig 8.4 indicates different levels of this integration that can be seen within an industry.
Dictated by the needs of the individual enterprise this process usually starts with the need
to interchange information between the some of the so called islands of automation.
Flexible manufacturing cells, automatic storage and retrieval systems, CAD/CAM based
design etc. are the examples of islands of automation i.e. a sort of computer based
automation achieved completely in a limited sphere of activity of an enterprise. This
involves data exchange among computers, NC machines, robots, gantry systems etc.
Therefore the integration process has started bottom up. The interconnection of physical
systems was the first requirement to be recognized and fulfilled.

Fig. 8.4 Levels of Integration Against Evolution of CIM

The next level of integration, application integration in Fig 1.4 is concerned with the
integration of applications, the term applications being used in the data processing sense.
The applications are those which are discussed in section 1.4 under the heading CIM
hardware and software. Application integration involves supply and retrieval of
information, communication between application users and with the system itself. Thus
the application integration level imposes constraints on the physical integration level.
There has to be control of the applications themselves also.

361
Computer Integrated Manufacturing

The highest level of integration, business integration in Fig.1.4 is concerned with the
management and operational processes of an enterprise. The management process provides
supervisory control of the operational process which in turn co-ordinates the day-to-day
execution of the activities at the application level. The business integration level therefore
places constraints on the application level. This level offers considerable challenge to the
integration activity.

QUESTIONS
1. Describe the need for CIM and the issues addressed by CIM.
2. What are the different types of manufacturing? Make an assessment of the extent of
computer control in specific cases of each types of manufacturing.
3. What are the various activities of a manufacturing plant which can be carried out
through computer control?
4. Discuss the main elements of CIM systems.
5. Differentiate among physical integration, application integration and business
integration. Give specific examples of each.
6. What are the benefits of CIMS?

362
 16.QUESTIONS BANK

IMPORTANT QUESTIONS UNIT WISE

UNIT-I
1.Describe the principle of working of a CRT.
2.How is a line displayed on a graphics monitor?
3.What is the function of a frame buffer?
4.What is the advantage of a mouse as an input device?

Unit-II
1. Explain the database structure for graphics modeling.
2. Explain the 2D transformation.
3. Write in detail about hidden surface removal.
4. Explain the 3D transformation

Unit-III
1. Describe briefly the following methods of surface modeling with a few
application examples:
i. Coon patch
ii. Tabulated cylinder
iii. Bicubic surface
iv. Bezier surface
2
.Compare the measures of continuity of curves and surfaces.
3.Explain the hermit cubic curve.
4.Explain the Bezier surface.

Unit-IV
1. How do you classify modeling package?
2.Compare 2-D and 3-D wire frame models.
3.Discuss the hardware required for a PC based drafting environment
4.Describe the importance of curve and surface modeling in computer aided
graphics and design.

Unit-V

1.What is the most popular type of drive for CNC machines today?
2.Sketch and explain the torque speed characteristics of a spindle drive.
3.Why is a gearbox used in the main drive of some CNC machines?
4.
Why is separate cooling motor used with DC drives?

363
Unit-VI
1.What is the need for CAD based process plans?
2.Discuss the principle and advantages of group technology coding.
3.Classify a component using either OPITZ or MICLASS system.
4.Discuss the principle of variant process planning

Unit-VII
1.Explain the method of part inspection using a CMM.
2.What are the important features available in CMM software?
3.Discuss major non-contact inspection methods.
4.What is the working principle of computer vision systems?

Unit-VIII
1. Describe the need for CIM and the issues addressed by CIM.
2.What are the different types of manufacturing? Make an assessment of the
extent of computer control in specific cases of each types of manufacturing.
3.What are the various activities of a manufacturing plant which can be carried
out through computer control?
4.Discuss the main elements of CIM systems.

364
 17.INTERNAL EXAMINATION QUESTION PAPERS

SUBJECTIVE QUESTION PAPERS

1. A.Y.2012-13

CMR INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY

Kandlakoya (v), Medchal Road, Hyderabad-501401
INTERNAL EXAM-I
Course: IV B.Tech I Sem Duration: 1 hour
Subject: CAD/CAM Max Marks: 10
Date:06/09/2012 Time: 10:00AM – 11:00AM

ANSWER ANY TWO OUT OF FOUR QUESTIONS

1. What are the various input devices used in CAD/CAM? Explain about Diziting tablet.
2. Explain the database structures used in graphics modeling.
3. Derive the parametric equation of Bezier curve.
4. What are the types of solid? What are the primitive solids? Discuss the concept of
three Boolean operations used in solid modeling.

CMR INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY

Kandlakoya (v), Medchal Road, Hyderabad-501401
INTERNAL EXAM-II
Course: IV B.Tech I Sem Duration: 1 hour
Subject: CAD/CAM Max Marks: 10
Date: 30/10/2012 Time: 10:00AM – 11:00AM
ANSWER ANY TWO OUT OF FOUR QUESTIONS
1. The drawing of component is shown in fig.1.Three holes to be drilled and reamed at three
places. The speed and feed rate for drilling are 592rpm and 3.55in/min. The speed and feed
rate for reaming are 382rpm and 3.82in/min. Write manual part programming
2. (A) How do you classify the part classification an coding system? Explain them.
(B)What are the advantages and disadvantages of group technology?
3. What is the computer controlled CMM? Explain various types of CMMs.
4. (A) How does CIM integrate all activities in an industry
(B) What are the benefits and limitations of CIM.

365
OBJECTIVE QUESTION PAPERS

1.AUGUST.2012, MID –I (A.Y 2012-13)

Code No: A107411808 Set No. 1
JAWAHARLAL NEHRU TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY HYDERABAD
IV B.Tech. I Sem., I Mid-Term Examinations, August – 2012
CAD/CAM
Objective Exam
Name: ______________________________ Hall Ticket No.
Answer All Questions. All Questions Carry Equal Marks.Time: 20 Min. Marks: 20.
I Choose the correct alternative:
1. Which of the following is not considered as a method of input control in a CAD system
[d ]
a) Programmable function box b) joystick.
c) Touch terminal d) plotter
2. Air crafts are manufactured by [c ]
a) Mass production b) batch production
c) job shop production d) continuous flow production
3. The software that is used to provIIe the users with various functions to perform [ b]
Geometric modeling and construction is known as
a) Operating software b) graphics software
c) Application software d) programming software.
4. Bresenham’s algorithm seeks to select the optimum raster locations that represent a [b
a) Arc b) straight line c) circle d) ellipse
5. The degree of Bezier curve with ‘n’ control points is [b ]
a)n-1 b)n+1 c) n d) 2n
6. Coons surface or patch is obtained by blending __________ boundary curves. [ c]
a) 2 b) 5 c) 4 d) All of the above
7. CSG and B- REP are [b ]
a) Two methods of modeling b) utilities software
c) Applications of software d) two methods of computer aided analysis
8. Partial erasing of the image is not possible in [c ]
a) Direct beam refresh b) raster scan c) DVST d) all of the above
9. Ambiguous representation of real objects is seen in [b ]
a) Surface model b) wire frame model
c) Solid model d) product model
10. The lowest form of computer language is called [c ]
a) BASIC b) FORTRAN c) Machine language d) COBOL

II Fill in the blanks

11. array command makes multiple copies Of selected objects in a rectangular or circular
polar pattern.
12. The vectors in the drawings are to be converted into its equivalent pixel points. This
process is termed as rasteristion
13. Integration of CAD and CAM is called CIM

366
14. For combining the primitives to form the complex solid, the basic set operators also
called Boolean operators

15. Two end points and two tangents are required to define hermit cubic spline
16. The data model that represents the data as a tree like structure is known as CGS
17. Individual transformations are combined in order to achieve the required results is called
concatenation
18. The technique of selecting and enlarging portions of a drawing is called windowing.
19. Programming automation is suitable for batch type of production.
20. Light pen works on the principle of light rather than ink.

OCTOBER/NOVEMBER.2013, MID –II (A.Y 2012-13)

JAWAHARLAL NEHRU TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY HYDERABAD

IV B.Tech. I Sem., II Mid-Term Examinations, Oct/Nov - 2012
CAD – CAM
Objective Exam
N—me: ______________________________ Hall Ticket No.
Answer All Questions. All Questions Carry Equal Marks. Time: 20 Min.
Marks: 10.
I. Choose the correct alternative:
1. The advantage of CNC is [d ]
a) Flexibility b) metric conversion c) tape editing at the machine site d) All of the above
2. Direct numerical control machines do not use [c ]
a) CPU b) Software c) Punched taps d) All the above
3. Contouring motion commands are used to specify the continuous path motion involving
_______and _______operations [a ]
a) Milling and turning b) Milling and drilling c) Both a & b d) None of these
4. Numerical control can be applied to [ d]
a) Milling machines b) Drilling and boring machines
c) Grinding and sewing machines d) All the above
5. In MICLASS system 11th and 12th codes are ____ [c]
a) Main shape b) Main dimension c) Material codes d) Shape elements
6. Advantage of numerical control on machines is [d ]
a) Reduces non productive time b) Reduces Fixturing
c) Improved quality control d) All the above
7. Dwell is defined by [a ]
a) G04 b) G03 c) G02 d) G01
8. APT is used [b ]
a) In teaching of the beginners b) In CAM for NC machine tools
c) In inventory management d) None of the above
9. In group technology, a part family is a collection of parts based on [d ]
a) Shape b) Size c) Similar processing steps d) Any of the above
10. Machinability database system makes use of [d ]
a) Tool life b) Material file c) Machine life d) Any of the above

367
II Fill in the Blanks:
11. CNC machines are also known as soft wired
12. Linear interpolation is carried out by G01
13. M03 code is used for spindle speed CW
14. Which is the last statement in APT program End
15. The main objective of DNC system is to eliminate the use of punched tape
16. In Optiz code, the from consists of Digits 9
17. The alternative approaches to CAPP have been developed Retrieval,generative &hybride
systems
18. MRP input requires master production scedule.
19. CMM stands for coordin chedulesuring machine
20. The NC modes are broadly classified into three categories.

368
18. External/End Examination Question Papers

UNIVERSITY QUESTION PAPERS

Code No: 57024 R09

JAWAHARLAL NEHRU TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY HYDERABAD
IV B.Tech. I Sem., Semester Examinations,Supply, December – 2014
CAD/CAM
(Common to ME,AE,AME)
Time:3 hours Max.Marks:75

Answer any five Questions

All questions carry equal Marks.
---
1. a) Briefly discuss the various input devices for the graphics and state their functions.
b)Briefly explain the working of refresh display and DVST.
c)What are the benefits of CAD/CAM.
2. a)What is aliasing? Discuss different methods of carrying out inti-alaising.
b)What are the various types of coordinate system used to input sore.
c)What is database structure?Explain the popular database model with an example.
3. a)How do you classify the varius modeling systems on the basis of the capabilities?
b)Descibe with the help of neat sketches the major surface entities provided by the
CAD/CAM system.
4.a)What is the importance of layer in drafting? Explain with an example.
b)Descibe the Euler-Poincare formula for the boundary representation of solid
modeling with an example.
5.a) Discuss the salient features of machining centers.
b)Under what circumstances the adaptive control machining system is used?
Discuss briefly.
6.a) Discuss the benefits of group technology.
b) What are the part families? What are the methods used for grouping of parts?
c)What is the generative process planning? Explain.
7.a)What are the functions of machine vision? Describe the procedure of machine vision
b)With help of schematic diagram explain the measurement system based used on
scanning laser beam system. Also explain its application in CAQC systems.
8.a)Describe different types of the material handling systems used in CIM briefly.
b)Discuss the roll of comport networks in CIM.
--ooOoo--—

369
Code No: 07A6EC04 R09
JAWAHARLAL NEHRU TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY HYDERABAD
IV B.Tech. I Sem., Semester Examinations,Supply, December – 2013
CAD/CAM
(Common to ME,AE,AME)
Time:3 hours Max.Marks:75

Answer any five Questions

All questions carry equal Marks.
---
1a)What is raster scanning? Why is it preferred in display devises?
b)How do specify a plotter? Describe various types of storage devices used in CAD
systems
2.a)Explain various graphics transformations required for manipulating the geometric
information.
b)Explain the importance of clipping. Give the details of method used for line clipping.
3.a) Give the classification of different surfaces that can be used in geometric modeling
application.
b) What are the problems with Bezier curves? How are these taken care of ?
4.a)Why layers are required in CAD? Explain various display commands used in CAD
applications.
B)Explain constraint based solid modeling in CAD.
5.a)With a block diagram explain the principle of NC.
b)Explain linear and circular interpolations in CNC system.
6.a)What is the group technology? State advantages and limitations of GT.
b) Define the concept of part family. Explain the one method of classification of parts
in GT.
7.a)Explain non-contact inspection method in CAQC.
b)State advantages and limitations of CAQC.
8.a) Draw a CIM circle and briefly explain main objectives in it.
b) Define AS/AR system. Explain various types material handling systems in
manufacturing industry.
--ooOoo—

370
Code No: 07A6EC04 R09
JAWAHARLAL NEHRU TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY HYDERABAD
IV B.Tech. I Sem., Semester Examinations, November – 2012
CAD/CAM
(Common to ME,AE,AME)
Time:3 hours Max.Marks:75

Answer any five Questions

All questions carry equal Marks.
---
1. a) What are the various input devices that are used for graphics information input?
b) A computer display system has resolution of 800 Horizontal X 600 vertical pixels.
If the screen aspect ratio is 4:3, show how a square box of 400 pixels can be drawn.
2. a) Explain the principle of DDA and Bresenham’s algorithm for linear interpolation for
graphics terminal.
b)Discuss why homogeneous coordinate system is generally used in graphics in place
of normal system. State advantages with example.
3. a)Discuss the concept of the three Boolean operations used in solid modeling.
Explain with neat sketches.
b)What are the advantages of using a B-rep scheme?

4. a) What are the types of dimensioning systems are available in CAD drafting system?
b)Why layer command is useful in computer drafting environment?
5. a)What are the main features of CNC machine tool? Explain ATC in CNC machines.
b)Write a manual CNC part program for a simple job and explain various parameters
in the program.
6. a)define and Explain the philosophy of group technology in manufacturing.
b)What is part family? State advantages and limitations of group technology.
7. a)Discuss major non contact inspection systems inCAQC
b) Explain the method of part inspection in computer aided quality control using
conventional CMM.
8. a) Explain the concept of CIM implementation in manufacturing unit. Draw CIM
circle.
b)State benefits and limitation of CIM.
--ooOoo--

371